Volvo 2014, XC60, 2014 Early Owner's manual

Volvo 2014, XC60, 2014 Early Owner's manual
XC60
OWNERS MANUAL
L:7:9>I>DC
DEAR VOLVO OWNER
THANK YOU FOR CHOOSING VOLVO
We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your Volvo.
The car has been designed for the safety and comfort of you and your
passengers. Volvo is one of the safest cars in the world. Your Volvo
has also been designed to satisfy all current safety and environmental
requirements.
In order to increase your enjoyment of the car, we recommend that
you familiarise yourself with the equipment, instructions and maintenance information contained in this owner's manual.
Table of contents
00 01 02
2
00 Introduction
01 Safety
Important information................................. 6
Volvo and the environment....................... 11
Seatbelts ..................................................
Airbags......................................................
Activating/deactivating the airbag*...........
Side airbags (SIPS bags) .........................
Inflatable Curtain (IC) ...............................
WHIPS ......................................................
Roll-Over Protection System - ROPS.......
When the systems deploy ........................
Safety mode..............................................
Child safety...............................................
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
02 Locks and alarm
16
19
22
24
26
27
29
30
31
32
Remote control key/key blade..................
Battery replacement, remote control key/
PCC*.........................................................
Keyless drive*............................................
Locking/unlocking.....................................
Child safety locks......................................
Alarm*.......................................................
46
51
53
56
62
63
Table of contents
03 04 05
03 Your driving environment
04 Driver support
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Instruments and controls.......................... 68
Volvo Sensus ........................................... 77
Key positions............................................ 78
Seats......................................................... 80
Steering wheel.......................................... 85
Lighting..................................................... 86
Wipers and washing.................................. 98
Windows, rearview and door mirrors...... 101
Compass*............................................... 106
Power panorama roof* ........................... 107
Alcolock*................................................. 110
Starting the engine.................................. 114
Starting the engine – external battery..... 119
Gearboxes............................................... 120
DRIVe Start/Stop*................................... 126
All-wheel drive – AWD*........................... 132
Foot brake............................................... 133
HDC Hill Descent Control....................... 135
Parking brake.......................................... 137
DSTC – Stability and traction control system.......................................................... 146
Road sign information - RSI*.................. 148
Cruise control*........................................ 150
Adaptive cruise control*.......................... 152
Distance Warning*.................................. 162
City Safety™........................................... 165
Collision Warning with Auto Brake &
Pedestrian Protection*............................ 170
Driver Alert System*................................ 178
Driver Alert System - DAC*..................... 179
Driver Alert System - LDW*..................... 182
Park assist syst*...................................... 185
Park assist camera*................................ 188
BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System. . 191
Menus and messages.............................
Menu source MY CAR............................
Climate control........................................
Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*..................
Additional heater*....................................
Trip computer.........................................
Adapting driving characteristics.............
Comfort inside the passenger compartment........................................................
198
200
208
218
221
222
224
225
HomeLinkŸ *............................................ 141
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
3
Table of contents
06 07 08
06 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment......
Radio.......................................................
Media player...........................................
External audio source via AUX/USB*
input........................................................
07 During your journey
232
244
251
255
Media BluetoothŸ* ................................. 258
BluetoothŸ handsfree*............................
Voice recognition* mobile phone............
TV*...........................................................
Remote control* .....................................
RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system*
4
261
270
274
278
280
Recommendations during driving...........
Refuelling................................................
Fuel.........................................................
Loading...................................................
Cargo area..............................................
Driving with a trailer................................
Towing and recovery..............................
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
08 Wheels and tyres
292
295
296
299
302
305
311
General ...................................................
Changing wheels ...................................
Tyre pressure .........................................
Warning triangle and first-aid kit*............
Emergency puncture repair (TMK)* ........
316
320
323
324
325
Table of contents
09 10 11
09 Maintenance and service
Engine compartment...............................
Lamps.....................................................
Wiper blades and washer fluid................
Battery.....................................................
Fuses......................................................
Car care..................................................
10 Specifications
332
339
345
348
353
364
Type designations...................................
Dimensions and weights.........................
Engine specifications..............................
Engine oil................................................
Fluids and lubricants...............................
Fuel.........................................................
Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pressure ........................................................
Electrical system.....................................
Type approval.........................................
Symbols in the display............................
11 Alphabetical Index
372
374
377
378
380
382
Alphabetical Index.................................. 402
385
386
387
399
5
Introduction
Important information
Reading the Owner's Manual
Introduction
A good way of getting to know your new car is
to read the owner's manual, ideally before your
first journey. This will give you the opportunity
to familiarise yourself with new functions, to
see how best to handle the car in different situations, and to make the best use of all the
car's features. Please pay attention to the
safety instructions contained in the manual.
The specifications, design features and illustrations in this owner's manual are not binding.
We reserve the right to make modifications
without prior notice.
©
In the event of uncertainty over what is standard or an option/accessory, contact a Volvo
dealer.
Special texts
WARNING
Warning texts advise of a risk of personal
injury.
IMPORTANT
Important texts advise of a risk of material
damage.
All types of option/accessory are marked with
an asterisk*.
In addition to standard equipment, this manual
also describes options (factory fitted equipment) and certain accessories (retrofitted extra
equipment).
The equipment described in the owner's manual is not available in all cars - they have different equipment depending on adaptations
for the needs of different markets and national
or local laws and regulations.
Warning for personal injury
NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitate
the use of features and functions for example.
Footnote
There is footnote information in the owner's
manual that is located at the bottom of the
page. This information is an addition to the text
that it refers to via a number. If the footnote
refers to text in a table then letters are used
instead of numbers for referral.
Message texts
There are displays in the car that show text
messages. These text messages are high-
6
Decals
The car contains different types of decal which
are designed to convey important information
in a simple and clear manner. The decals in the
car have the following descending degree of
importance for the warning/information.
NOTE
Volvo Car Corporation
Option
lighted in the owner's manual by means of the
text being slightly larger and printed in grey.
Examples of this are in menu texts and message texts on the information display (e.g.
Audio settings).
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
G031590
Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field,
white text/image on black message field. Used
to indicate the presence of danger which, if the
Introduction
Important information
warning is ignored, may result in serious personal injury or fatality.
Information
Procedure lists
Procedures where action must be taken in a
certain sequence are numbered in the owner's
manual.
Risk of property damage
When there is a series of illustrations for
step-by-step instructions each step is
numbered in the same way as the corresponding illustration.
G031592
G031593
There are numbered lists with letters adjacent to the series of illustrations where the
order of the instructions is not significant.
White ISO symbols and white text/image on
black or blue warning field and message field.
Used to indicate the presence of danger which,
if the warning is ignored, may result in damage
to property.
White ISO symbols and white text/image on
black message field.
NOTE
The labels shown in the owner's manual are
not provided as exact reproductions of
those in the car. The purpose is to show
their approximate appearance and location
in the car. The information that applies to
your car in particular is available on the label
in question in your car.
Arrows appear numbered and unnumbered and are used to illustrate a movement.
Arrows with letters are used to clarify a
movement when the reciprocal order is of
no relevance.
If there is no series of illustrations for step-bystep instructions then the different steps are
numbered with normal numbers.
Position lists
Red circles containing a number are used
in overview images where different components are pointed out. The number
recurs in the position list featured in connection with the illustration that describes
the item.
7
Introduction
Important information
Bulleted lists
A bulleted list is used when there is a list of
points in the owner's manual.
Example:
• Coolant
• Engine oil
To be continued
`` This symbol is located furthest down to the
right when a section continues on the following
page.
Recording data
Your vehicle contains a number of computers
whose function is to continuously check and
monitor the vehicle's operation and functionality. Some of the computers can record information during normal driving if they detect an
error. In addition, information is recorded in the
event of a collision or incident. Parts of the
recorded information are required so that technicians can diagnose and rectify faults in the
vehicle during servicing and maintenance and
so that Volvo can fulfil legal requirements and
other regulations. In addition to this, the information is used for research purposes by Volvo
in order to continually develop quality and
safety, as the information can contribute to a
better understanding of the factors that cause
accidents and injuries. The information
8
includes details of the status and functionality
of various systems and modules in the vehicle
with regard to engine, throttle, steering and
brake systems, amongst other things. This
information may include details regarding the
way the driver drives the vehicle, such as vehicle speed, brake and accelerator pedal use,
steering wheel movement and whether or not
the driver and passengers have used their
seatbelts. For the reasons given this information may be stored in the vehicle's computers
for a certain length of time, but also as a result
of a collision or incident. This information may
be stored by Volvo as long as it can help to
further develop and further enhance safety and
quality and as long as there are legal requirements and other regulations that Volvo needs
to consider.
Volvo will not contribute to the above-described information being disclosed to third parties
without the vehicle owner's consent. However,
due to national legislation and regulations
Volvo may be required to disclose such information to authorities such as police authorities,
or others who may assert a legal right to have
access to it.
To be able to read and interpret the information
recorded by the computers in the vehicle
requires special technical equipment that
Volvo, and workshops that have entered into
agreements with Volvo, have access to. Volvo
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
is responsible that the information, which is
transferred to Volvo during servicing and maintenance, is stored and handled in a secure
manner and that the handling complies with
applicable legal requirements. For further information - contact a Volvo dealer.
Accessories and extra equipment
The incorrect connection and installation of
accessories can negatively affect the car's
electrical system. Certain accessories only
function when their associated software is
installed in the car's computer system. Volvo
therefore recommends that you always contact an authorised Volvo workshop before
installing accessories which are connected to
or affect the electrical system.
Change of ownership for cars with
Volvo On Call*
Volvo On Call is a supplemental service that
consists of safety, security and comfort services. If the car has Volvo On Call and there is a
change of owner, it is very important that these
services are discontinued so that the former
owner cannot access the services in the car.
Contact the call centre by pressing the ON
CALL button in the car or contact an authorised Volvo workshop. See also "Changing the
security code" in the owner's manual for Volvo
On Call.
Introduction
Important information
Laser sensor
This vehicle is equipped with a sensor which
transmits laser light. It is absolutely essential to
follow the prescribed instructions when handling the laser sensor.
The following two labels in English are fitted
directly on the laser sensor unit:
exception of deviations in accordance with
"Laser Notice No. 50" from 26 July 2001.
Radiation data for the laser sensor
The following table specifies the laser sensor's
physical data.
Maximum pulse energy
2.64 ¦J
Maximum average output
45 mW
Pulse duration
Divergence (horizontal x vertical)
The upper label in the figure describes the laser
beam's classification:
• Laser radiation - Do not look into the laser
beam with optical instruments - Class 1M
laser product.
The lower label in the figure describes the laser
beam's physical data:
• IEC 60825-1:1993 + A2:2001. Complies
33 ns
WARNING
If any of these instructions are not followed
then there is a risk of eye injury!
•
Never look into the laser sensor (which
emits spreading invisible laser radiation)
at a distance of 100 mm or closer with
magnifying optics such as a magnifying
glass, microscope, lens or similar optical instruments.
•
Testing, repair, removal, adjustment
and/or replacement of the laser sensor's spare parts must only be carried
out by a qualified workshop - we recommend an authorised Volvo workshop.
•
To avoid exposure to harmful radiation,
do not carry out any readjustments or
maintenance other than those specified
here.
•
The repairer must follow specially
drawn up workshop information for the
laser sensor.
•
Do not remove the laser sensor (this
includes removing the lenses). A
removed laser sensor does not fulfil
laser class 3B as per standard IEC
60825-1. Laser class 3B is not eye-safe
and therefore entails a risk of injury.
28° × 12°
with FDA (U.S. Food Administration) standards for laser product design with the
9
Introduction
Important information
•
The laser sensor's connector must be
unplugged before removal from the
windscreen.
•
The laser sensor must be fitted onto the
windscreen before the sensor's connector is plugged in.
•
The laser sensor transmits laser light
when the remote control key is in position II and also with the engine switched
off (see page 78 on key positions).
For more information on the laser sensor, see
page 165.
Information on the Internet
At www.volvocars.com there is further information concerning your car.
To be able to read the QR code, you need a QR
code reader, which is available as an add-on
for a number of mobile phones. A QR code
reader can be downloaded from the App Store
or Android Market.
QR code
10
Introduction
Volvo and the environment
G000000
Volvo Cars' environmental philosophy
Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Corporation's core values which influence all operations. We also believe that our customers share
our consideration for the environment.
Your Volvo complies with strict international
environmental standards and is also manufactured in one of the cleanest and most resourceefficient plants in the world. Volvo Car Corporation has global ISO certification, which
includes the environmental standard ISO
14001 covering all factories and several of our
other units. We also set requirements for our
partners so that they work systematically with
environmental issues.
Fuel consumption
Volvo cars have competitive fuel consumption
in each of their respective classes. Lower fuel
consumption generally results in lower emission of the greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide.
It is possible for the driver to influence fuel consumption. For more information read under the
heading, Reducing environmental impact.
Efficient emission control
Your Volvo is manufactured following the concept "Clean inside and out" – a concept that
encompasses a clean interior environment as
well as highly efficient emission control. In
many cases the exhaust emissions are well
below the applicable standards.
Clean air in the passenger compartment
A passenger compartment filter prevents dust
and pollen from entering the passenger compartment via the air intake.
A sophisticated air quality system, IAQS* (Interior Air Quality System) ensures that the incoming air is cleaner than the air in the traffic outside.
The system consists of an electronic sensor
and a carbon filter. The incoming air is monitored continuously and if there is an increase in
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
11
Introduction
Volvo and the environment
the level of certain unhealthy gases such as
carbon monoxide then the air intake is closed.
Such a situation may arise in heavy traffic,
queues and tunnels for example.
The entry of nitrous oxides, ground-level ozone
and hydrocarbons is prevented by the carbon
filter.
Interior
The interior of a Volvo is designed to be pleasant and comfortable, even for people with
contact allergies and for asthma sufferers.
Extreme attention has been given to choosing
environmentally-compatible materials.
Volvo workshops and the environment
Regular maintenance creates the conditions
for a long service life and low fuel consumption
for your car. In this way you contribute to a
cleaner environment. When Volvo's workshops
are entrusted with the service and maintenance of your car it becomes part of our system. Volvo makes clear demands regarding the
way in which our workshops are designed in
order to prevent spills and discharges into the
environment. Our workshop staff have the
knowledge and the tools required to guarantee
good environmental care.
Reducing environmental impact
You can easily help reduce environmental
impact - here are a few tips:
12
• Avoid letting the engine idle - switch off the
engine when stationary for longer periods.
Pay attention to local regulations.
• Drive economically - think ahead.
• Perform service and maintenance in
accordance with the owner's manual's
instructions - follow the Service and Warranty Booklet's recommended intervals.
Recycling
As a part of Volvo's environmental work, it is
important that the car is recycled in an environmentally sound manner. Almost all of the
car can be recycled. The last owner of the car
is therefore requested to contact a dealer for
referral to a certified/approved recycling
facility.
• If the car is equipped with an engine block
heater*, use it before starting from cold - it
improves starting capacity and reduces
wear in cold weather and the engine reaches normal operating temperature more
quickly, which lowers consumption and
reduces emissions.
• High speed increases consumption considerably due to increased wind resistance
- a doubling of speed increases wind resistance 4 times.
• Always dispose of environmentally hazardous waste, such as batteries and oils, in
an environmentally safe manner. Consult a
workshop in the event of uncertainty about
how this type of waste should be discarded
- an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Following this advice can save money, the
planet's resources are saved, and the car's
durability is extended. For more information
and further advice, see the pages 292 and
382.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The owner's manual and the
environment
The Forest Stewardship CouncilŸ symbol
shows that the paper pulp in this publication
comes from FSCŸ certified forests or other
controlled sources.
Introduction
13
Seatbelts ................................................................................................
Airbags....................................................................................................
Activating/deactivating the airbag*.........................................................
Side airbags (SIPS bags) .......................................................................
Inflatable Curtain (IC) .............................................................................
WHIPS ....................................................................................................
Roll-Over Protection System - ROPS.....................................................
When the systems deploy ......................................................................
Safety mode............................................................................................
Child safety.............................................................................................
14
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
16
19
22
24
26
27
29
30
31
32
SAFETY
01 Safety
Seatbelts
01
General information
Releasing the seatbelt
Press the red button on the seatbelt buckle and
then let the belt retract. If the seatbelt does not
retract fully, feed it in by hand so that it does
not hang loose.
The seatbelt locks and cannot be withdrawn:
• if it is pulled out too quickly
• during braking and acceleration
• if the car leans heavily.
Make sure that you:
Heavy braking can have serious consequences
if the seatbelts are not used. Ensure that all
passengers use their seatbelts.
It is important that the seatbelt lies against the
body so it can provide maximum protection.
Do not lean the backrest too far back. The
seatbelt is designed to protect in a normal
seating position.
• do not use clips or anything else that can
prevent the seatbelt from fitting properly
•
ensure that the seatbelt is not twisted or
caught on anything
• the hip strap must be positioned low down
(not over the abdomen)
• tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling
the diagonal shoulder belt up towards the
shoulder.
Putting on a seatbelt
Pull the belt out slowly and secure it by pressing its locking tab into the seatbelt buckle. A
loud "click" indicates that the belt has locked.
The buckles only fit the intended lock in the rear
seat1.
1
16
Certain markets.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seatbelt is not used or is used incorrectly, this
may diminish the protection provided by the
airbag in the event of a collision.
WARNING
Each seatbelt is designed for only one person.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself. Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop.
If a seatbelt has been subjected to a major
load, such as in conjunction with a collision,
the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some
of the protective characteristics of the seatbelt may have been lost, even if it appears
to be undamaged. In addition, replace the
seatbelt if the belt is worn or damaged. The
new seatbelt must be type-approved and
intended for installation in the same position
as the replaced seatbelt.
01 Safety
Seatbelts
Seatbelts and pregnancy
and steering wheel). The aim should be to position the seat with as large a distance as possible between abdomen and steering wheel.
The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two
subfunctions:
are being used in the rear seat. A message
appears in the information display when
the seatbelts are in use, or if one of the rear
doors has been opened. The message is
cleared automatically after driving for
approximately 30 seconds or after pressing the indicator stalk's OK button.
G020998
The lap section should lay flat over the thighs
and as low as possible under the abdomen. –
It must never be allowed to ride upward.
Remove the slack from the seatbelt and ensure
that it fits as close to the body as possible. In
addition, check that there are no twists in the
seatbelt.
Rear seat
• Provides information on which seatbelts
Seatbelt reminder
• Provides a warning if one of the rear seat-
G017726
The seatbelt should always be worn during
pregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in the
correct way. The diagonal section should wrap
over the shoulder then be routed between the
breasts and to the side of the abdomen.
01
Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fasten
their seatbelts by means of an audio and visual
reminder. The audio reminder is speed
dependent, and in some cases time dependent. The visual reminder is located in the roof
console and the combined instrument panel.
belts is unfastened during travel. This
warning takes the form of a message on
the information display along with the
audio/visual signal. The warning stops
when the seatbelt is re-fastened, or it can
also be acknowledged manually by pressing the OK button.
The message on the information display showing which seatbelts are in use is always available. Press the OK button to see stored messages.
Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt
reminder system.
As the pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers
should adjust their seats and steering wheel
such that they can easily maintain control of the
vehicle as they drive (which means that they
must be able to easily operate the foot pedals
``
17
01 Safety
01
Seatbelts
Certain markets
An acoustic signal and indicator lamp remind
the driver and front seat passenger to use a
seatbelt if either of them is not wearing one. At
low speed, the audio reminder will sound for
the first 6 seconds.
Seatbelt tensioner
All the seatbelts are equipped with belt tensioners. A mechanism in the seatbelt tensioner
tightens the seatbelt in the event of a sufficiently violent collision. The seatbelt then provides more effective restraint for the occupants.
WARNING
Never insert the tongue of the passenger's
seatbelt into the buckle on the driver's side.
Always insert the tongue of the seatbelt into
the buckle on the correct side. Do not make
any damages on seatbelts nor insert any
foreign objects into a buckle. The seatbelts
and buckles would then possibly not function as intended in the event of a collision.
There is a risk of serous injury.
18
01 Safety
Airbags
Warning symbol on the combined
instrument panel
01
As well as the warning symbol, a message may
appear on the information display in appropriate cases. If the warning symbol malfunctions,
the warning triangle illuminates and SRS
Airbag Service required or SRS Airbag
Service urgent appears in the display. Volvo
recommends that you contact an authorised
Volvo workshop immediately.
G018666
Airbag system
Airbag system, right-hand drive car.
G018665
The warning symbol in the combined instrument panel illuminates when the remote control key is in key position II. The symbol clears
after approx. 6 seconds provided the airbag
system is fault-free.
WARNING
If the warning symbol for the airbag system
remains illuminated or illuminates while driving, it means that the airbag system does
not have full functionality. The symbol indicates a fault in the seatbelt tensioner system, SIPS, the IC system or some other fault
in the system. Volvo recommends that you
contact an authorised Volvo workshop
immediately.
The system consists of airbags and sensors. A
sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
and the airbag(s) are inflated and become hot.
To cushion the impact, the airbag deflates
when compressed. When this occurs, smoke
escapes into the car. This is completely normal. The entire process, including inflation and
deflation of the airbag, occurs within tenths of
a second.
Airbag system, left-hand drive car.
WARNING
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop for repair.
Defective work in the airbag system could
cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury.
19
01 Safety
01
Airbags
NOTE
Passenger airbag
The sensors react differently depending on
the course of the collision and whether or
not the seatbelts on the driver and passenger side are used.
It is therefore possible that only one (or
none) of the airbags may inflate in a collision. The airbag system senses the force of
the collision on the car and adapts accordingly so that one or more airbags are
deployed.
The capacity of the airbags is also adapted
to the collision force to which the vehicle is
subjected.
The car has an airbag to supplement the protection afforded by the seatbelt on the passenger side. It is folded up into a compartment
above the glovebox. Its cover panel is marked
AIRBAG.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the belt
is not used or is used incorrectly, this may
diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision.
Location of the front passenger airbag in a lefthand drive car.
To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag
deploys, passengers must sit as upright as
possible with their feet on the floor and
backs against the backrest. Seatbelts must
be secured.
Airbag on the driver's side
The car has an airbag to supplement the protection afforded by the seatbelt on the driver's
side. It is folded up into the centre of the steering wheel. The steering wheel is marked
AIRBAG.
WARNING
Do not put objects in front of or above the
dashboard where the passenger airbag is
located.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seatbelt is not used or is used incorrectly, this
may diminish the protection provided by the
airbag in the event of a collision.
20
Location of the front passenger airbag in a righthand drive car.
01 Safety
Airbags
01
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a
booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag
is activated.
Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front
of the front passenger seat.
No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit
in the front passenger seat if the airbag is
activated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life.
21
01 Safety
01
Activating/deactivating the airbag*
Key switch off - PACOS*
General information
The airbag for the front passenger seat can be
deactivated if the car is equipped with a switch,
PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch). For
information on how to activate/deactivate, see
under the heading Activating/deactivating.
Key switch off/switch
The switch for the passenger airbag (PACOS)
is located on the passenger end of the instrument panel and is accessible when the passenger door is open (see under the heading
below, Activating/deactivating).
Check that the switch is in the required position. Volvo recommends that the remote control key's key blade be used to change position.
For information on the key blade, see
page 50.
WARNING
Failure to follow the advice given above
could endanger the life of passengers in the
car.
22
WARNING
Activating/deactivating
If the car is equipped with a front passenger
airbag, but does not have a PACOS switch
(Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch), then the
airbag will always be activated.
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a
booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag
in the roof
is activated and the symbol
console is illuminated. Failure to follow this
advice could endanger the life of the child.
Switch location.
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to sit in the front passenger seat if the message in the roof console (see page 23) indicates that the airbag is deactivated and if the warning symbol for the airbag system is also displayed
in the combined instrument panel. This indicates that there has been a severe malfunction. Visit a workshop as soon as possible.
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The airbag is activated. With the switch in
this position, persons taller than 140 cm
can sit in the front passenger seat, but
never children in a child seat or on a
booster cushion.
The airbag is deactivated. With the switch
in this position, children in a child seat or
on a booster cushion can sit in the front
passenger seat, but never persons taller
than 140 cm.
01 Safety
Activating/deactivating the airbag*
WARNING
Activated airbag
01
Deactivated airbag
Activated airbag (passenger seat):
Never place a child in a child seat or on a
booster cushion on the front passenger seat
when the airbag is activated. This applies to
everyone shorter than 140 cm.
2
G017800
No one taller than 140 cm should ever sit in
the front passenger seat when the airbag is
deactivated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life.
NOTE
When the remote control key is in key position II the warning symbol for the airbag is
displayed on the combined instrument
panel for approx. 6 seconds (see page 19).
2
G017724
Deactivated airbag (passenger seat):
Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is
activated.
Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is
deactivated.
A warning symbol in the roof console indicates
that the airbag for the front passenger seat is
activated (see preceding illustration).
A text message and a symbol in the roof console indicate that the airbag for the front passenger seat is deactivated (see preceding illustration).
Following which, the indicator in the roof
console is illuminated showing the correct
status for the front passenger seat airbag.
For more information about the different key
positions for the remote control key, see
page 78.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
23
01 Safety
Side airbags (SIPS bags)
01
Side airbag
G032949
WARNING
In a side impact collision a large proportion of
the collision force is transferred by the SIPS
(Side Impact Protection System) to beams, pillars, the floor, the roof and other structural
parts of the body. The side airbags at the driver's and front passenger seats protect the
chest area and the hip and are an important
part of the SIPS.
The SIPS bag system consists of two main
components, side airbag and sensors. The
side airbags are located in the front seat backrests.
•
Volvo recommends that repairs are only
carried out by an authorised Volvo
workshop. Defective work in the SIPSbag system could cause malfunction
and result in serious personal injury.
•
Do not put objects in the area between
the outside of the seat and the door
panel, since this area is required by the
side airbag.
•
Volvo recommends the use only of car
seat covers approved by Volvo. Other
seat covers may impede the operation
of the side airbags.
•
Location
Driver's seat, left-hand drive.
The side airbag is a supplement to the
seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
Child seats and side airbags
The protection provided by the car to children
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion
is not diminished by the side airbag.
A child seat or booster cushion can be placed
on the front passenger seat provided that the
car does not have an activated1 passenger airbag.
Front passenger seat, left-hand drive.
The SIPS bag system consists of side airbags
and sensors. A sufficiently violent collision trips
1
24
For information on activating/deactivating the airbag, see page 22.
01 Safety
Side airbags (SIPS bags)
01
the sensors and the side airbags are inflated.
The airbag inflates between the occupant and
the door panel and thereby cushions the initial
impact. The airbag deflates when compressed
by the collision. The side airbag is normally only
deployed on the side of the collision.
25
01 Safety
01
Inflatable Curtain (IC)
Properties
WARNING
Never hang or attach heavy items onto the
handles in the roof. The hook is only
designed for light clothing (not for solid
objects such as umbrellas for example).
Do not screw or install anything onto the
car's headlining, door pillars or side panels.
This could compromise the intended protection. Volvo recommends that you only
ever use Volvo genuine parts that are
approved for placement in these areas.
WARNING
The inflatable curtain IC (Inflatable Curtain) is a
part of SIPS and the airbags. It is fitted in the
headlining along both sides of the roof and
protects the car's occupants sitting in the outer
seats. A sufficiently violent collision trips the
sensors and the inflatable curtain is inflated.
The inflatable curtain helps to prevent the
driver and passengers from striking their heads
on the inside of the car during a collision.
Do not load the car higher than 50 mm under
the top edge of the door windows. Otherwise, the intended protection of the inflatable curtain, which is concealed in the headlining, may be compromised.
WARNING
The inflatable curtain is a supplement to the
seatbelts.
Always use a seatbelt.
26
01 Safety
WHIPS
Protection against whiplash injury –
WHIPS
The whiplash protection system (WHIPS) consists of energy absorbing backrests and specially designed head restraints in the front
seats. The system is actuated by a rear-end
collision, where the angle and speed of the collision, and the nature of the colliding vehicle all
have an influence.
01
Correct seating position
For the best possible protection, the driver and
front seat passenger should sit in the centre of
the seat with as little space as possible
between the head and the head restraint.
Do not obstruct the WHIPS system
WARNING
The WHIPS system is a supplement to the
seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
Properties of the seat
When the WHIPS system is deployed, the front
seat backrests are lowered backward to alter
the seating position of the driver and front seat
passenger. This reduces the risk of whiplash
injury.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS
system yourself. Volvo recommends that
you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
WHIPS system and child seats/booster
cushions
Do not leave any objects on the floor behind the
driver's seat/passenger seat that may prevent the
WHIPS system from functioning.
WARNING
Do not squeeze rigid objects between the
rear seat cushion and the front seat backrest. Make sure you do not to obstruct the
function of the WHIPS system.
The protection provided by the car to children
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion
is not diminished by the WHIPS system.
27
01 Safety
01
WHIPS
WARNING
If a seat has been subjected to extreme
forces, such as due to a rear-end collision,
the WHIPS system must be checked. Volvo
recommends that it is checked by an
authorised Volvo workshop.
Part of the WHIPS system's protective
capacity may have been lost even if the
seats appear to be undamaged.
Do not place objects on the rear seat that may
prevent the WHIPS system from functioning.
WARNING
If a rear seat backrest is folded down, the
corresponding front seat must be moved
forward so that it does not touch the folded
backrest.
28
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop to have the system checked even after a minor rear-end
collision.
01 Safety
Roll-Over Protection System - ROPS
01
Function
Volvo's Roll-Over Protection System (ROPS)
has been designed to reduce the risk of the car
overturning and to provide the best possible
protection in the event of such an accident.
The system consists of a stabiliser system,
Roll Stability Control (RSC) that minimises the
risk of overturning, for example, during sudden
evasive manoeuvres or if the car skids.
The RSC system uses a sensor which registers
changes in the car's lateral inclination angle.
This information is used to calculate the risk of
the car overturning. If a risk exists, the DSTC
system engages, engine torque is lowered and
one or more wheels are braked until the car has
regained its stability.
For more information on the DSTC system, see
page 146 .
WARNING
Under normal driving conditions, the RSC
system improves the car's road safety, but
this must not be taken as a reason to
increase speed. Always follow the usual
precautions for safe driving.
29
01 Safety
When the systems deploy
01
When the systems deploy
System
Triggered
Seatbelt tensioner,
front seat
In the event of a
frontal collision,
and/or side-impact
collision, and/or
rear-end collision
and/or overturning
Seatbelt tensioner,
rear seat
A
30
In a frontal collision
and/or side-impact
accident and/or
overturning
Airbags (SRS)
In a frontal collisionA
Side airbags (SIPS)
In a side-impact
accident
Inflatable Curtain IC
In the event of a side
impact and/or overturning and/or some
frontal collisions
Whiplash protection
WHIPS
In a rear-end collision
The bodywork of the car could be greatly deformed in a collision without airbag deployment. A number of factors such
as the rigidity and weight of the object hit, the speed of the
car, the angle of the collision etc. affects how the different
safety systems of the car are activated.
If the airbags have deployed, the following is
recommended:
• Recovering the car. Volvo recommends
that you have it conveyed to an authorised
Volvo workshop. Do not drive with
deployed airbags.
• Volvo recommends that you engage an
authorised Volvo workshop to handle the
replacement of components in the car's
safety systems.
• Always contact a doctor.
NOTE
The airbags and belt tensioner system are
deployed only once during a collision.
WARNING
The airbag control module is located in the
centre console. If the centre console is
drenched with water or other liquid, disconnect the battery cables. Do not attempt to
start the car since the airbags may deploy.
Recovering the car. Volvo recommends that
you have it conveyed to an authorised Volvo
workshop.
WARNING
Never drive with deployed airbags. They
can make steering difficult. Other safety
systems may also be damaged. The smoke
and dust created when the airbags are
deployed can cause skin and eye irritation/
injury after intensive exposure. In case of
irritation, wash with cold water. The rapid
deployment sequence and airbag fabric
may cause friction and skin burns.
01 Safety
Safety mode
Driving after a collision
effect that the ignition is on, press the start
button. Then close the door and reinsert the
remote control key. The car's electronics will
now try to reset themselves to normal mode.
Then try to start the car.
If the message Safety mode See manual is
still shown on the display then the car must not
be driven or towed, but a vehicle recovery service used instead. Even if the car appears to be
driveable, hidden damage may make the car
impossible to control once moving.
If the car is involved in a collision, the text
Safety mode See manual may appear on the
information display. This means that the car
has reduced functionality. Safety mode is a
protective state that is enforced when the collision may have damaged any of the car's vital
functions, such as the fuel lines, sensors for
one of the safety systems, or the brake system.
Attempting to start the car
First, check that no fuel is leaking from the car.
There must be no smell of fuel either.
If everything seems normal and you have
checked for indications of fuel leakage, you
may attempt to start the car.
01
WARNING
Never, under any circumstances, attempt to
restart the car if it smells of fuel when the
Safety mode See manual message is displayed. Leave the car at once.
WARNING
If the car is in safety mode it must not be
towed. It must be transported from its location. Volvo recommends that it is transported to an authorised Volvo workshop.
Moving the car
If Normal mode is shown after Safety mode
See manual has been reset, the car can be
moved carefully out of a dangerous position.
Do not move the car further than necessary.
WARNING
Never attempt to repair your car or reset the
electronics yourself if the car has been in
safety mode. This could result in personal
injury or the car not functioning as normal.
Volvo recommends that you engage an
authorised Volvo workshop to check and
restore the car to normal status after Safety
mode See manual has been displayed.
Remove the remote control key and open the
driver's door. If a message is now shown to the
31
01 Safety
Child safety
01
Children should sit comfortably and
safely
Volvo recommends that children travel in rearfacing child seats until as late an age as possible, at least until 3-4 years of age, and then
front-facing booster cushions/child seats until
up to 10 years of age.
NOTE
WARNING
In the event of questions when fitting child
safety products, contact the manufacturer
for clearer instructions.
Do not secure the straps of the child seat to
the seat's horizontal adjustment bar,
springs or the rails and beams under the
seat. Sharp edges may damage the straps.
Child seats
Look in the installation instructions for the child
seat for the correct fitting.
The position of a child in the car and the choice
of equipment are dictated by the child's weight
and size, for more information, see page 33.
Location of child seats
You may place:
NOTE
• a child seat/booster cushion on the pas-
Regulations regarding the placement of
children in cars vary from country to country. Check what does apply.
senger seat, provided the passenger airbag is not activated1.
Volvo has child safety equipment (child seats,
booster cushions & attachment devices) which
is designed for your particular car. Using Volvo's child safety equipment provides you with
optimum conditions for your child to travel
safely in the car. Furthermore, the child safety
equipment fits and is easy to use.
1
32
For information on activated/deactivated airbag, see page 22.
G020739
• one or more child seats/booster cushions
Children of all ages and sizes must always sit
correctly secured in the car. Never allow a child
to sit on the knee of a passenger.
Child seats and airbags are not compatible.
NOTE
When using child safety products it is
important to read the installation instructions included.
in the rear seat.
Always fit child seats/booster cushions in the
rear seat if the passenger airbag is activated. If
a child is sitting on the front passenger seat
then he/she could suffer serious injury if the
airbag deploys.
01 Safety
Child safety
WARNING
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a
booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag
(SRS) is activated.
No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit
in the front passenger seat if the airbag
(SRS) is activated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life.
01
Label Airbag
Booster cushions/child seats with steel
braces or some other design that could rest
on the seatbelt buckle's opening button
must not be used, as they could cause the
seatbelt buckle to open accidentally.
Do not allow the upper section of the child
seat to rest against the windscreen.
The label becomes visible when the passenger
door is opened; see the illustration on page 22.
Recommended child seats2
Weight
Front seat (with deactivated airbag)
Group 0
Group 0+
Type approval: E5 03301146
max 13 kg
(L)
Group 0
Centre rear seat
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) rear-facing child seat, secured with the
ISOFIX fixture system.
max 10 kg
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) rear-facing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt.
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) rear-facing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt.
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) rear-facing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt.
Group 0+
Type approval: E1 04301146
Type approval: E1 03301146
Type approval: E1 03301146
max 13 kg
(U)
(U)
(U)
max 10 kg
2
Outer rear seat
With regard to other child seats your car should be included in the manufacturer's enclosed list of vehicles or be universally approved in accordance with the ECE R44 legal requirement.
33
01 Safety
01
Child safety
Weight
Front seat (with deactivated airbag)
Outer rear seat
Centre rear seat
Group 0
Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) rear-facing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt and straps. Use a protective cushion between the child seat
and the dashboard.
Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) rear-facing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt and straps.
Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) rear-facing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt and straps.
Type approval: E5 03135
Type approval: E5 03135
(L)
(L)
Child seats which are universally
approved.
Child seats which are universally
approved.
Child seats which are universally
approved.
(U)
(U)
(U)
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat
(Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rearfacing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt and straps.
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat
(Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rearfacing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt and straps.
Type approval: E5 04192
Type approval: E5 04192
(L)
(L)
max 10 kg
Group 0+
max 13 kg
Type approval: E5 03135
(L)
Group 0
max 10 kg
Group 0+
max 13 kg
Group 1
9-18 kg
34
01 Safety
Child safety
Weight
Front seat (with deactivated airbag)
Outer rear seat
Centre rear seat
Group 1
Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) rear-facing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt and straps. Use a protective cushion between the child seat
and the dashboard.
Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) rear-facing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt and straps.
Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) rear-facing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt and straps.
Type approval: E5 03135
Type approval: E5 03135
(L)
(L)
9-18 kg
Type approval: E5 03135
01
(L)
Group 1
Britax Fixway – rear-facing child seat,
secured with the ISOFIX fixture system
and straps.
9-18 kg
Type approval: E5 03171
(L)
Group 1
9-18 kg
Group 2
15-25 kg
Child seats which are universally
approved.
Child seats which are universally
approved.
Child seats which are universally
approved.
(U)
(U)
(U)
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat
(Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rearfacing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt and straps.
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat
(Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rearfacing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt and straps.
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat
(Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rearfacing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt and straps.
Type approval: E5 04192
Type approval: E5 04192
Type approval: E5 04192
(L)
(L)
(L)
``
35
01 Safety
01
Child safety
Weight
Front seat (with deactivated airbag)
Outer rear seat
Group 2
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat
(Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - frontfacing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt.
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat
(Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - frontfacing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E5 04191
Type approval: E5 04191
(L)
(L)
Volvo booster seat with backrest
(Volvo Booster Seat with backrest).
Volvo booster seat with backrest
(Volvo Booster Seat with backrest).
Volvo booster seat with backrest
(Volvo Booster Seat with backrest).
Type approval: E1 04301169
Type approval: E1 04301169
Type approval: E1 04301169
(UF)
(UF)
(UF)
Booster cushion with and without
backrest (Booster Cushion with and
without backrest).
Booster cushion with and without
backrest (Booster Cushion with and
without backrest).
Booster cushion with and without
backrest (Booster Cushion with and
without backrest).
Type approval: E5 03139
Type approval: E5 03139
Type approval: E5 03139
(UF)
(UF)
(UF)
15-25 kg
Group 2/3
15-36 kg
Group 2/3
15-36 kg
36
Centre rear seat
01 Safety
Child safety
Weight
Front seat (with deactivated airbag)
Group 2/3
15-36 kg
Outer rear seat
01
Centre rear seat
Integrated booster cushion (Integrated
Booster Cushion) - available as a factory fitted option.
Type approval: E5 04189
(B)
L: Suitable for specific child seats. These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model, limited or semi-universal categories.
U: Suitable for universally approved child seats in this weight class.
UF: Suitable for front-facing universally approved child seats in this weight class.
B: Built-in child seats approved for this weight class.
``
37
01 Safety
01
Child safety
Integrated two-stage booster
cushions*
The booster cushions are specially designed to
provide optimum safety. In combination with
the seatbelt they are approved for children who
weigh between 15 and 36 kg and who are at
least 95 cm in height.
Stage 1
Check before driving that:
• the integrated 2-stage booster cushion is
correctly set (see table page 38) and in
locked position
• the seatbelt is in contact with the child's
body and is not slack or twisted
• the seatbelt does not lie across the child's
Correct position, the seatbelt should be positioned in on the shoulder.
throat or below the shoulder (see preceding illustrations)
• the lap section of the seatbelt is positioned
Pull the handle forward and up in order to
release the booster cushion.
low over the pelvis to provide optimal protection.
For instructions on adjusting the booster cushion's two levels, see pages 38–39.
Raising the two-stage booster cushion
The integrated booster cushion can be folded
up into two stages. How many stages the cushion should be folded up depends on the child's
weight.
Incorrect position, the head restraint must be
adjusted as high as the head and the seatbelt must
not be below the shoulder.
38
Weight
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Stage 1
Stage 2
22-36 kg
15-25 kg
Press the booster cushion backwards to
lock.
01 Safety
Child safety
Stage 2
Lift the booster cushion up at the front edge
and press it back against the backrest to lock.
01
the booster cushion from the upper stage to
the lower stage.
WARNING
Start from the lower stage. Press the button.
Volvo recommends that repair or replacement is only carried out by an authorised
Volvo workshop. Do not make any modifications or additions to the booster cushion.
If an integrated booster cushion has been
subjected to a major load, such as in conjunction with a collision, the entire booster
cushion must be replaced. Even if the
booster cushion appears to be undamaged,
it may not afford the same level of protection. The booster cushion must also be
replaced if it is heavily worn.
Pull the handle forwards to release the
cushion.
NOTE
It is not possible to adjust the booster cushion from stage 2 to stage 1. It must first be
reset by being fully folded into the seat
cushion. Refer to the heading below, Lowering the two-stage booster cushion.
Lowering the two-stage booster cushion
Lowering can take place from both the upper
and lower stage to fully lowered position in the
cushion. However, it is not possible to adjust
39
01 Safety
01
Child safety
Press down with your hand in the centre of
the cushion in order to lock it.
ISOFIX fixture system for child seats
WARNING
If the instructions regarding the two-stage
booster cushion are not followed then this
could cause serious injury to a child in the
event of an accident.
Size
class
IMPORTANT
Check that there are no loose objects (e.g.
toys) left behind in the space under the
cushion before lowering.
NOTE
The booster cushion must be lowered first
when lowering the backrest.
Child safety locks, rear doors
The controls for operating the rear door power
windows and the rear door opening handles
can be blocked from opening from the inside.
For more information, see page 62.
Mounting points for the ISOFIX fixture system
are concealed behind the lower section of the
rear seat backrest, in the outer seats.
The location of the mounting points is indicated
by symbols in the backrest upholstery (see preceding illustration).
Press the seat cushion down to access the
mounting points.
Always follow the manufacturer's installation
instructions when connecting a child seat to
the ISOFIX mounting points.
Size classes
Child seats are in different sizes – cars are in
different sizes. This means that not all child
seats are suitable for all seats in all car models.
40
Consequently, there is a size classification for
child seats using the ISOFIX fixture system in
order to assist users in choosing the correct
child seat (see the following table).
Description
A
Full size, front-facing child
seat
B
Reduced size (alt. 1), frontfacing child seat
B1
Reduced size (alt.2), frontfacing child seat
C
Full size, rear-facing child
seat
D
Reduced size, rear-facing
child seat
E
Rear-facing infant seat
F
Transverse infant seat, lefthand
G
Transverse infant seat, righthand
01 Safety
Child safety
WARNING
NOTE
Never place a child in the passenger seat if
the car is equipped with an activated airbag.
01
NOTE
If an ISOFIX child seat has no size classification then the car model must be included
on the child seat's vehicle list.
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo dealer for recommendations about which ISOFIX child seats Volvo
recommends.
Types of ISOFIX child seat
Type of child seat
Infant seat transverse
Infant seat, rear-facing
Weight
max 10 kg
max 10 kg
Size class
Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats
Front seat
Outer rear seat
F
X
X
G
X
X
E
X
OK
(IL)
Infant seat, rear-facing
max 13 kg
E
X
OK
(IL)
D
X
OK
(IL)
C
X
OK
(IL)
41
01 Safety
Child safety
01
Type of child seat
Child seat, rear-facing
Weight
9-18 kg
Size class
Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats
Front seat
Outer rear seat
X
OK
D
(IL)
C
X
OK
(IL)
Front-facing child seat
9-18 kg
B
X
OKA
(IUL)
B1
X
OKA
(IUL)
A
X
OKA
(IUL)
X: The ISOFIX position is not suitable for ISOFIX child seats in this weight class and/or size class.
IL: Suitable for specific ISOFIX child seats. These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model, limited or semi-universal categories.
IUF: Suitable for front-facing ISOFIX child seats that are universally approved in this weight class.
A
42
Volvo recommends rear-facing child seats for this group.
01 Safety
Child safety
Upper mounting points for child seats
01
NOTE
For cars equipped with a cargo area cover
over the cargo area, this must be removed
before a child seat can be fitted in the
mounting points.
For detailed information on how the child seat
should be tensioned in the upper mounting
points, see the seat manufacturer's instructions.
WARNING
The car is equipped with upper mounting
points for certain front-facing child seats.
These mounting points are located on the rear
of the seat.
The child seat's straps must always be
drawn through the hole in the head restraint
leg before they are tensioned at the attachment point.
The upper mounting points are primarily
intended for use with front-facing child seats.
Volvo recommends that small children should
sit in rear-facing child seats to as late an age
as possible.
NOTE
Fold the head restraints in order to facilitate
fitting this type of child seat in cars with
folding head restraints on the outer seats.
43
Remote control key/key blade................................................................
Battery replacement, remote control key/PCC*......................................
Keyless drive*..........................................................................................
Locking/unlocking...................................................................................
Child safety locks....................................................................................
Alarm*......................................................................................................
44
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
46
51
53
56
62
63
LOCKS AND ALARM
02 Locks and alarm
Remote control key/key blade
02
General
Loss of a remote control key
Indicator for locking/unlocking
The car is supplied with 2 remote control keys
or PCCs (Personal Car Communicator). They
are used to start the car and for locking and
unlocking.
If you lose a remote control key then a new one
can be ordered at a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended. The remaining remote control keys must then be taken to
the workshop. The code of the missing remote
control key must be erased from the system as
a theft prevention measure.
When the car is locked or unlocked using the
remote control key, the direction indicators
confirm that locking/unlocking was correctly
performed.
Additional remote control keys can be ordered
- up to 6 can be programmed and used for the
same car.
The remote control key contains a removable
key blade made of metal. The visible section is
available in two versions so that it is possible
to distinguish between the remote control
keys.
The PCC has increased functionality compared with the remote control key. The continuation of this chapter describes the functions
available in both the PCC and the remote control key.
WARNING
If there are children in the car:
Remember to switch off the supply to the
power windows and sunroof by removing
the remote control key if the driver leaves
the car.
1
2
46
Only in combination with power driver's seat and power mirrors.
Only for cars with retractable power door mirrors.
The current number of keys registered to the
car can be checked in the menu system MY
CAR under Information Number of keys.
For a description of the menu system, see
page 200.
• Locking - one flash and the door mirrors
are folded2 in.
• Unlocking - two flashes and the door mirrors are folded2 out.
After locking the indication is only given if all
locks have been activated once the doors have
been closed.
Selecting the function
Key memory1 – door mirrors and driver's
seat
The settings are automatically connected to
each respective remote control key, see pages
81 and 103.
The function can be activated/deactivated in
the menu system MY CAR under Settings
Car settings Car key memory.
For a description of the menu system, see
page 200.
For cars with the Keyless drive system, see
page 53.
Different options for indicating locking/unlocking with light can be set in the car's menu system, see page 200.
Search in the menu system MY CAR for
Settings Car settings Light settings
and select Door lock confirmation light and/
or Unlock confirmation light.
Immobiliser
Each remote control key has a unique code.
The car can only be started with the correct
remote control key with the correct code.
02 Locks and alarm
Remote control key/key blade
The following error messages in the combined
instrument panel's information display are related to the electronic immobiliser:
Message
Specification
Insert car key
Error when reading
the remote control
key during starting Remove the key
from the ignition
switch, press it in
again and make a
new start attempt.
Car key not found
Error reading the
remote control key
during starting - Try
to start again.
If the error persists:
Insert the remote
control key into the
ignition switch and
try to start again.
Immobiliser Try
start again
Error in immobiliser
system during starting. If the error persists: Contact a
workshop - an
authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
Functions
02
Remote control key, standard version.
Locking
Unlocking
Approach light duration
Tailgate
Panic function
For starting the car, see page 114.
``
47
02 Locks and alarm
Remote control key/key blade
02
Remote control key with PCC* - Personal Car
Communicator.
Information
Function buttons
Locking – Locks the doors and tailgate
while the alarm is activated.
Press and hold (at least 2 seconds) to close all
the windows and sunroof* simultaneously.
WARNING
If the sunroof and windows are closed using
the remote control key, check that no one is
in danger of getting hands caught.
Unlocking – Unlocks the doors and tailgate while the alarm is deactivated.
48
Press and hold (at least 4 seconds) to open all
windows simultaneously.
5 seconds. Otherwise the function switches off
automatically after 2 minutes and 45 seconds.
The function can be changed from unlocking
all doors simultaneously, to unlocking the driver's door only with one press of the button and,
after a further press of the button - within 10
seconds - unlocking the remaining doors.
The remote control key's functions have a
range of about 20 m from the car.
The function can be changed in the menu system MY CAR under Settings Car settings
Lock settings Doors unlock with both
the alternatives All doors and Driver door,
then all. For a description of the menu system,
see page 200.
Approach light duration – Used to switch
on the car's lighting at a distance. For more
information, see page 94.
Tailgate - Unlocks and disarms the alarm
for the tailgate only. On cars with power tailgate* the tailgate is opened after the button is
kept depressed. For more information, see
page 58.
Panic function – Used to attract attention
in an emergency.
Press and hold the button for at least 3 seconds or press it twice within 3 seconds to activate the direction indicators and the horn.
The function can be turned off with the same
button once it has been active for at least
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Range
If the car does not verify a button being pressed
- move closer and try again.
NOTE
The remote control key functions can be
disrupted by surrounding radio waves,
buildings, topographical conditions etc. The
car can always be locked/unlocked using
the key blade, see page 50.
If the remote control key is removed from the
car when the engine is running or key position
I or II is active (see page 78) and if all doors
are closed, then a warning message is shown
in the information display and an audible
reminder signal sounds at the same time.
The warning message clears and the audio
reminder signal stops when the remote control
key is brought back to the car after:
• The remote control key has been inserted
in the ignition switch
• Speed exceeds 30 km/h
• the OK button has been pressed.
02 Locks and alarm
Remote control key/key blade
Unique PCC functions*
If any of the other buttons are pressed
during this time then the reading is interrupted.
NOTE
If none of the indicator lamps illuminates with repeated use of the information
button and in different locations (as well as
after 7 seconds and after the light has travelled around on the PCC), contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Remote control key with PCC* - Personal Car
Communicator.
Indicator lamps display information in accordance with the following illustration:
Information button
Indicator lamps
Using the information button enables access to
certain information from the car via the indicator lamps.
Press the information button
02
Range PCC
The PCC's range for locking, unlocking and
tailgate is about 20 m from the car - for other
functions up to about 100 m.
If the car does not verify a button being pressed
- move closer and try again.
NOTE
The information button functions can be
disrupted by surrounding radio waves,
buildings, topographical conditions etc.
If the PCC is too far away from the car for the
information to be read then the status the car
was last left in is shown, without the light travelling around on the PCC.
.
> All indicator lamps flash for approximately 7 seconds and the light travels
around on the PCC. This indicates that
information from the car has been read.
Red light flashing alternately in both indicator lamps – The alarm was triggered less
than 5 minutes ago.
Out of PCC range
Using the information button
–
Red continuous light – the alarm has been
triggered since the car was locked.
If several PCCs are used for the car then it is
only the PCC last used for locking/unlocking
that shows correct status.
Green continuous light – the car is locked.
Yellow continuous light – the car is
unlocked.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
49
02 Locks and alarm
Remote control key/key blade
NOTE
02
If no indicator lamps illuminate when
the information button is used within range
then this may be because the last communication between the PCC and the car was
disrupted by surrounding radio waves,
buildings, topographical conditions etc.
• the airbag for front passenger seat
(PACOS)* can be activated/deactivated,
see page 22.
Removing the key blade
See also the illustration and further information see page 54.
A remote control key contains a detachable
key blade of metal with which some functions
can be activated and some operations carried
out.
NOTE
When the door has been unlocked using the
key blade and is opened, the alarm is triggered.
The key blade's unique code is provided by
authorised Volvo workshops, which are recommended when ordering new key blades.
Slide the spring-loaded catch to the side.
At the same time pull the key blade straight
out backwards.
Key blade functions
• the driver's door can be opened manually
if central locking cannot be activated with
the remote control key, see page 54.
• the rear doors' mechanical child safety
locks can be activated/deactivated, see
page 62.
• access to the glovebox can be blocked.
50
If central locking cannot be activated with the
remote control key - e.g. if the batteries are
discharged - then the driver's door can be
opened as follows:
1. Unlock the driver's door with the key blade
in the door handle's lock cylinder.
Detachable key blade
Using the remote control key's detachable key
blade:
Unlocking doors with the key blade
Attaching the key blade
Carefully refit the key blade into its location in
the remote control key.
1. Hold the remote control key with the slot
pointed up and lower the key blade into its
slot.
2. Lightly press the key blade. You should
hear a "click" when the key blade is locked
in.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
2. Deactivate the alarm by inserting the
remote control key in the ignition switch.
For a car with the Keyless system, see
page 54.
02 Locks and alarm
Battery replacement, remote control key/PCC*
Replacing the battery
Battery replacement
Closely study how the battery/batteries are
secured on the inside of the cover, with
regard to their (+) and (–) sides.
The batteries should be replaced if:
• the information symbol is illuminated and
the display shows Low battery in remote
control. Please change batteries.
Remove control key (1 battery)
and/or
1. Carefully prize out the battery.
• the locks repeatedly do not react to signals
2. Install a new one with the (+) side down.
from the remote control key within
20 metres from the car.
02
PCC* (2 batteries)
1. Carefully prize out the batteries.
Opening
2. First install one new one with the (+) side
up.
Slide the spring-loaded catch to the
side.
3. Position the white plastic tab in between
and finally install a second new battery with
the (+) side down.
At the same time pull the key blade
straight out backwards.
Insert a 3 mm slot screwdriver in the
hole behind the spring-loaded catch and
gently prize the remote control key up.
NOTE
Battery type
Use batteries with the designation CR2430, 3V
- one in the remote control key and two in the
PCC.
Assembly
Turn the remote control key over with the
buttons facing up, this is to avoid the batteries falling out when it is opened.
1. Press the remote control key together.
2. Hold the remote control key with the slot
pointed up and lower the key blade into its
slot.
IMPORTANT
Avoid touching the battery and its terminals
with your fingers, as this could damage their
functionality.
3. Lightly press the key blade. You should
hear a "click" when the key blade is locked
in.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
51
02 Locks and alarm
Battery replacement, remote control key/PCC*
IMPORTANT
02
52
Make sure that you dispose of old batteries
in an environmentally-friendly way.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
02 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive*
Keyless lock and ignition system (only
PCC1)
General
the car door handle or tailgate. This means that
the person who wishes to lock or unlock a door
must have the PCC with him or her. It is not
possible to lock or unlock a door if the PCC is
on the opposite side of the car.
The red rings in the preceding illustration indicate the range covered by the system's antennas.
If all PCCs are removed from the car when the
engine is running or key position I or II is active
(see page 78) and if all doors are closed, then
a warning message is shown in the information
display and an audible reminder signal sounds
at the same time.
The keyless drive function in the PCC allows
the car to be unlocked, driven and locked without the need for a key. You simply have to have
the PCC with you. The system makes it easier
and more convenient to open the car, e.g.
when your hands are full.
Both of the car's PCCs incorporate the Keyless
function. Additional PCCs can be ordered, see
page 46.
PCC range
In order to open a door or the tailgate, a PCC
must be no more than approx. 1.5 metres from
1
The warning message clears and the audio
reminder signal stops when the PCC is brought
back to the car after:
• a door has been opened and closed
• the PCC is inserted into the ignition switch
• the OK button has been pressed.
reactivated. It is therefore important to handle
all PCCs with great care.
02
IMPORTANT
Never leave a PCC behind in the car.
Interference to PCC function
Electromagnetic fields and screening can interfere with the keyless drive system.
NOTE
Do not place/store the PCC near a mobile
phone or metal object - no closer than 10-15
cm.
If interference is experienced nonetheless, use
the PCC and the key blade as a remote control
key, see page 47.
Handling the PCC safely
If a PCC with keyless drive function is left in the
car, it is deactivated temporarily when the car
is locked. This prevents unauthorised entry.
However, if someone breaks into the car,
opens the door and finds the PCC, it can be
Personal Car Communicator, see page 49.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
53
02 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive*
Locking
Unlocking
Unlocking takes place when a hand grasps a
door handle or the tailgate's rubberised pressure plate is actuated - open the door or tailgate as normal.
02
Unlocking with the key blade
1. Press the key blade approx. 1 cm straight
up into the hole on the underside of the
door handle/cover - do not prize.
> The plastic cover loosens automatically
by means of the torque when the blade
is pushed straight up and into the opening.
2. Then insert the key blade in the lock cylinder and unlock the door.
3. Refit the plastic cover after unlocking.
NOTE
Cars with the keyless system have a button on the
outside door handles.
When the driver's door is unlocked using the
key blade and is opened, the alarm is triggered. It is switched off by inserting the PCC
in the ignition switch, see page 64.
Lock the doors and the tailgate by pressing the
lock button on one of the door handles on the
outside.
All doors and the tailgate must be closed
before the car can be locked - otherwise the
car is not locked.
NOTE
On cars with automatic transmission, the
gear selector must be set in the P position
– otherwise the car cannot be locked or the
alarm armed.
2
54
Hole for key blade - to loosen the cover.
If central locking cannot be activated with the
PCC, e.g. if the batteries are discharged, then
the left-hand front door can be opened with the
PCC's detachable key blade (see page 50)
To access the lock cylinder, the door handle's
plastic cover must be removed - this is also
done with the key blade:
Only in combination with power driver's seat and power mirrors.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Key memory2 – driver's seat and door
mirrors
PCC memory function
If several people each with a PCC approach the
car, then the settings for seat and mirrors are
implemented for the person who opens the
driver's door.
After the driver's door has been opened by
person A with PCC-A, but person B with PCC-
02 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive*
B shall drive, the settings can be changed in
three ways:
Antenna location
WARNING
People with pacemaker operations should
not come closer than 22 cm to the keyless
system's antennae with their pacemaker.
This is to prevent interference between the
pacemaker and the keyless system.
• Standing by the driver's door, or sitting
behind the steering wheel, person B
presses their PCC's unlock button, see
page 47.
02
• Select one of three possible memories for
seat adjustment with seat button 1-3, see
page 81.
• Adjust seat and mirrors manually, see
page 81 and 103.
Lock settings
The Keyless function can be adapted by indicating in the menu system MY CAR which
doors shall be unlocked, under Car settings
Lock settings Keyless entry - there
select between All doors unlock, Any door,
Doors on same side and Both front doors.
For a description of the menu system, see
page 200.
The keyless system has a number of integrated
antennae located around the car:
Tailgate, by wiper motor
Door handle, left rear
Cargo area, central and furthest in under
the floor
Door handle, right rear
Centre console, under the rear section
Centre console, under the front section.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
55
02 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking
From the outside
02
The remote control key can lock/unlock all
doors and the tailgate simultaneously. Different
sequences for unlocking can be selected, see
"Unlocking with the remote control key" page
48.
In order that the lock sequence can be activated, the driver's door must be closed - if any
of the other doors or the tailgate is open, then
it/they is/are locked and the alarm is activated
only when it/they are closed. With the Keyless* system all the doors and tailgate must be
closed.
NOTE
WARNING
Be aware of the risk of being locked in the
car when it is locked from the outside using
the remote control key - it is then not possible to open any of the doors from the
inside with the door controls. Read more
about this in the section "Deadlocks" later
on.
Central locking
Automatic relocking
If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened
within 2 minutes of unlocking, all are locked
again automatically. This function reduces the
risk that the car is left unlocked unintentionally.
(For cars with alarm, see page 63.)
Be aware of the risk of locking the remote
control key in the car.
If it is not possible to lock/unlock with the
remote control key, the battery may be discharged - lock or unlock the driver's door with
the detachable key blade, see page 50.
NOTE
Remember that the alarm is triggered when
the door is opened after being unlocked
with the key blade - the alarm is switched
off when the remote control key is inserted
into the ignition switch.
56
From the inside
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Central locking.
All of the doors and the tailgate can be locked
or unlocked simultaneously using the central
locking button on either front door.
• Press one side
the other side
of the button to lock to unlock.
Unlocking
A door can be unlocked from the inside in two
different ways:
• Press the central locking button
.
Press and hold (at least 4 seconds) to also
open all the side windows* simultaneously.
02 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking
• Pull the door handle once and release - the
Glovebox
Tailgate
door is unlocked. Pull the door handle
again to open the door.
Manual opening
02
Locking
• Press the central locking button
after
the front doors have been closed.
Press and hold (at least 2 seconds) to also
close all the side windows and the sunroof*
simultaneously.
All doors can also be individually locked manually with their lock buttons - the door in question must then be closed.
Global opening
Press and hold the central locking button
(at least 4 seconds) to also open all the windows simultaneously - for example, to quickly
ventilate the passenger compartment during
hot weather.
Automatic locking
The doors and tailgate are locked automatically when the car starts to move.
The function can be activated/deactivated in
the menu system MY CAR under Settings
Car settings Lock settings Automatic
door locking. For a description of the menu
system, see page 200.
The glovebox can only be locked/unlocked
using the remote control key's detachable key
blade. For information on the key blade, see
page 50.
Locking the glovebox:
Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock
cylinder.
Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise.
The keyhole is horizontal in the locked
position.
Rubber plate with electrical contact.
The tailgate is held closed by an electrical lock.
To open:
1. Push down gently on the rubberised pressure plate under the outer handle - the lock
is released.
2. Lift the outside handle in order to fully open
the tailgate.
Pull out the key blade.
• Unlock by carrying this out in reverse
order.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
57
02 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking
IMPORTANT
02
•
Minimal force is required to release the
rear hatch lock - just gently press the
rubberised panel.
•
Do not place the lift force on the rubber
panel when opening the rear hatch - lift
the handle. Using too much force may
damage the electrical contact for the
rubber panel.
The doors remain locked and armed.
• The tailgate is unlocked, but remains
closed - press lightly on the rubberised
pressure plate under the outer handle and
lift the tailgate.
If the tailgate is not opened within 2 minutes
then it is relocked and the alarm is re-armed.
Locking with the remote control key
–
Press the remote control key's button for
, see page 47.
locking,
> If the car is equipped with an alarm* the
alarm indicator on the instrument panel
starts to flash, which means that the
alarm is armed.
Power operated tailgate*
Unlocking the car from inside
G031965
Unlocking with the remote control key
armed. The alarm's level and movement sensors and the sensors for opening the tailgate
are disconnected.
NOTE
The alarm for the tailgate can be disarmed* and
the tailgate unlocked on its own by using the
button.
remote control key's
To unlock the tailgate:
–
If the car is equipped with an alarm* the alarm
indicator on the instrument panel stops to
show that alarm for the whole of the car is not
58
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Press the lighting panel button (1).
> The tailgate is unlocked and can be
opened within 2 minutes (if the car is
locked from the inside).
Consider the roof height when using electrical operation. Do not use electrical operation of the tailgate under a low roof height,
see under the heading "Interrupt opening/
closing of tailgate".
02 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking
NOTE
•
•
If the system has been operating continuously for a long time, it is switched
off to avoid overload. It can be used
again after about 2 minutes.
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected then the tailgate must be
opened and closed again to reset the
system.
Pinch protection
If something with sufficient resistance prevents
the tailgate from opening/closing then the
pinch protection is activated.
• Open the tailgate manually, hold it in the
desired position and give the button on the
tailgate one long press (at least 3 seconds)
and then release the tailgate - the programming is complete.
• To clear the programming - move the tail-
is deactivated and the tailgate is disengaged.
backs off from the obstacle a couple of
centimetres.
WARNING
Pay attention to the risk of crushing when
opening/closing. Before starting to open/
close; make sure that there is nobody close
to the tailgate as a crushing injury could
have serious consequences.
Always operate the tailgate with caution.
Opening the tailgate
The tailgate can be opened three
ways (two of which involve this but-
If the tailgate is forced down by something just
when it is being opened, e.g. snow, ice or
strong wind, and this causes the tailgate to
lower, then it is closed automatically.
ton):
02
• Long press on the button on the remote
control key - hold the button depressed
until the tailgate starts to open.
• Push down gently on the rubberised pressure plate under the outer handle.
• When closing - the tailgate stops and
gate manually to a higher position.
Snow and wind
panel - hold the button depressed until the
tailgate starts to open.
• During opening - power tailgate operation
Programmable max. opening
Tailgate maximum opening position can be
programmed. Can be used for e.g. low roof
height in a garage. Proceed as follows:
• Long press on the button in the lighting
Closing the tailgate
Close using this button on the tailgate
or manually.
• Press the button – the tailgate closes automatically.
Stop the opening/closing of the tailgate
This can be done four ways (of which
three involve this button):
•
•
•
•
Press the lighting panel button
Press the remote control key button
Press the tailgate's button
Press the rubberised pressure plate
beneath the outside handle.
- The tailgate's movement is interrupted and it
stops.
59
02 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking
Manual tailgate operation
02
The system is disengaged if the opening/closing sequence is interrupted in accordance with
the preceding section.
• The tailgate can then be operated man-
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to remain in the car
without first deactivating the deadlocks in
order to avoid the risk of anyone being
locked in.
ually.
Temporary deactivation
Deadlocks*1
Deadlocks means that all lock buttons and
door handles are mechanically disengaged,
which prevents doors being opened from the
inside.
the deadlocks function can be temporarily
switched off. This is carried out as follows:
1. Access the menu system MY CAR under
Settings Car settings Reduced
Guard (for a detailed description of the
menu system, see page 200).
2. Select Activate once.
> The instrument panel display shows the
message Reduced guard See
manual and the deadlocks function is
switched off when the car is locked.
or
The deadlocks are activated with the remote
control key and are set after an approximately
10 second delay after the doors have been
locked.
–
NOTE
If a door is opened within the delay time then
the sequence is interrupted and the alarm is
deactivated.
The car can only be unlocked from a deadlock
state with the remote control key. The front left
door can also be unlocked with the detachable
key blade.
1
60
Active menu options are indicated with a cross.
MY CAR
OK MENU
If the deadlocks function shall be switched
off
TUNE knob control
–
EXIT
If someone is going to stay in the car but the
doors must be locked from the outside, then
Only in combination with alarm.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Select Ask when exiting.
> Each time the engine is switched off the
centre console display screen shows
the message Activate Reduced Guard
until engine has started again? followed by the alternatives Confirm with
OK and Cancel with EXIT.
Press OK/MENU and lock the car. (Note
that the alarm's movement and tilt detectors* are switched off at the same time, see
page 64.)
02 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking
> The next time the engine is started, the
system is reset to zero and the instrument panel display shows the message
Full guard at which the deadlocks
function and the alarm's movement and
tilt detectors are re-engaged.
02
If the locking system shall not be changed
–
Press EXIT and lock the car.
NOTE
•
Remember that the alarm is activated
when the car is locked.
•
If any of the doors are opened from the
inside then the alarm is triggered.
61
02 Locks and alarm
Child safety locks
Manual blocking of the rear doors
02
NOTE
The child safety locks prevent children from
opening a rear door from the inside.
•
A door's knob control only blocks that
particular door - not both rear doors
simultaneously.
•
Cars with an electric child safety lock do
not have a manual child lock.
Electrical locking of the rear doors*
and power windows
1. Start the engine or choose a key position
higher than 0.
2. Press the button in the driver's door control
panel.
> The information display shows the message Rear child locks Activated and
the button's lamp illuminates - the locks
are active.
When the electric child safety lock is active
then the rear:
• windows can only be opened with the drivG021077
er's door control panel
•
The current setting is stored when the engine
is switched off - if the child safety locks are
activated at engine shutdown, the function will
remain activated the next time the engine is
started.
The child safety locks are located on the trailing
edge of the rear doors and are only accessible
when the doors are open.
To activate/deactivate the child safety locks:
–
Use the remote control key's detachable
key blade to turn the knob - see page 50.
The door is blocked against opening from
the inside.
The door can be opened from both the
outside and the inside.
Control panel driver's door.
The child safety locks can be activated/deactivated in all key positions higher than 0 - see
page 78. Activation/deactivation can be performed up to 2 minutes after switching off the
engine, provided that no door is opened.
To activate the child safety locks:
62
doors cannot be opened from inside.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
02 Locks and alarm
Alarm*
General
Activated alarm is triggered if:
• a door, the bonnet or the tailgate is opened
• a movement is detected in the passenger
compartment (if fitted with a movement
detector*)
• the car is raised or towed away (if fitted
with a tilt detector*)
• the battery's cable is disconnected
• the siren is disconnected.
If there is a fault in the alarm system, the information display shows a message. In which
case, contact a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
Alarm indicator
NOTE
The movement sensors trigger an alarm in
the event of movement in the passenger
compartment - air currents are also registered. For this reason the alarm is triggered
if the car is left with a window or the sunroof
open or if the passenger compartment
heater is used.
To avoid this: Close the window/sunroof
when leaving the car. If the car's integrated
passenger compartment heater (or a portable electric heater) shall be used - direct the
airflow from the air vents so that they are not
pointing upwards in the passenger compartment.
NOTE
One of the detectors for the alarm is located
under the cup holder in the centre console.
This detector is sensitive for metals.
02
A red LED on the instrument panel indicates
the alarm system's status:
• LED not lit – Alarm not armed
• The LED flashes once every other second
– Alarm is armed
• The LED flashes rapidly after disarming the
alarm (and until the remote control key is
inserted in the ignition switch and key position I is selected) – Alarm has been triggered.
Avoid storing coins, keys or similar metal
objects in the centre console's cup holder
as such objects could accidentally trigger
the alarm.
Arming the alarm
NOTE
Do not attempt to repair or modify alarm
system components. All such attempts
could affect the terms of insurance.
–
Press the remote control key lock button.
Deactivate the alarm
–
Press the remote control key unlock button.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
63
02 Locks and alarm
Alarm*
02
Deactivating a triggered alarm
Reduced alarm level
–
To avoid accidental triggering of the alarm e.g. if a dog is left in a locked car or during
transport on a car train or car ferry - temporarily
deactivate the movement and tilt detectors.
Press the remote control key unlock button
or insert the remote control key in the ignition switch.
Other alarm functions
The procedure is the same as with the temporary disengaging of deadlocks, see page 60.
Automatic re-arming of the alarm
This function prevents the car being left with
the alarm disarmed unintentionally.
If the car is unlocked with the remote control
key (and the alarm is disarmed) but none of the
doors or the tailgate is opened within 2
minutes, then the alarm is automatically rearmed. The car is relocked at the same time.
Remote control key not working
If the alarm cannot be deactivated with the
remote control key, e.g. if the key's battery is
discharged - the car can be unlocked, disarmed and the engine started as follows:
1. Open the driver's door with the detachable
key blade - see page 54.
> The alarm is triggered, the alarm indicator flashes rapidly and the siren sounds.
2. Insert the remote control key in the ignition
switch.
> The alarm is deactivated and the alarm
indicator goes out.
3. Start the engine.
Alarm signals
When the alarm is triggered, the following happens:
• A siren sounds for 30 seconds or until the
alarm is switched off. The siren has its own
battery and works independently of the car
battery.
• The direction indicators flash for 5 minutes
or until the alarm is switched off.
64
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
02 Locks and alarm
02
65
Instruments and controls........................................................................ 68
Volvo Sensus ......................................................................................... 77
Key positions.......................................................................................... 78
Seats....................................................................................................... 80
Steering wheel........................................................................................ 85
Lighting................................................................................................... 86
Wipers and washing................................................................................ 98
Windows, rearview and door mirrors.................................................... 101
Compass*.............................................................................................. 106
Power panorama roof* ......................................................................... 107
Alcolock*............................................................................................... 110
Starting the engine................................................................................ 114
Starting the engine – external battery................................................... 119
Gearboxes............................................................................................. 120
DRIVe Start/Stop*................................................................................. 126
All-wheel drive – AWD*......................................................................... 132
Foot brake............................................................................................. 133
HDC Hill Descent Control..................................................................... 135
Parking brake........................................................................................ 137
HomeLinkŸ *.......................................................................................... 141
66
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
YOUR DRIVING ENVIRONMENT
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
Instrument overview
03
Left-hand drive.
68
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
Function
Page
Function
Page
Menus and messages,
direction indicators,
main/dipped beam, trip
computer
87,
92, 198,
222
Control for infotainment
and menu control
200, 236
Control panel for climate
control
208
Cruise control
150, 152
Gear selector
120
Horn, airbags
20, 85
71, 75
Controls for active chassis (Four-C)*
224
Combined instrument
panel
Wipers and washing
98, 99
Menu, audio and phone
control
200,
234, 261,
236
Steering wheel adjustment
85
START/STOP ENGINE
button
114
Bonnet opener
332
Parking brake
137
Ignition switch
78
Display for infotainment
and menus
200,
237, 236
Headlamp control,
opener for fuel filler flap
and tailgate
57, 86,
295
Door handle
–
Seat adjustment*
81
Control panel
56, 62,
101, 103
Hazard warning flashers
92
03
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
69
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
03
Right-hand drive.
70
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
Information displays
Function
Page
Function
Page
Display for infotainment
and menus
200,
237, 236
57, 86,
295
Ignition switch
78
Headlamp control,
opener for fuel filler flap
and tailgate
Parking brake
137
START/STOP ENGINE
button
114
Bonnet opener
332
Cruise control
150, 152
85
Combined instrument
panel
71, 75
Steering wheel adjustment
Horn, airbags
20, 85
87,
92, 198,
222
Menu, audio and phone
control
200,
234, 261,
236
Menus and messages,
direction indicators,
main/dipped beam, trip
computer
Gear selector
120
Controls for active chassis (Four-C)*
224
Control panel for climate
control
208
Control for infotainment
and menu control
200, 236
Hazard warning flashers
92
,,,
Wipers and washing
98, 99
Door handle
–
Control panel
56, 62,
101, 103
Seat adjustment*
81
03
The combined instrument panel's information
displays show information on some of the car's
functions, e.g. cruise control, trip computer
and messages. The information is shown with
text and symbols.
There are further descriptions under the functions that use the information displays.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
71
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
Meters
Indicator and warning symbols
If the engine does not start or if the functionality
check is carried out in key position II then all
symbols go out after 5 seconds except the
symbol for faults in the car's emissions system
and the symbol for low oil pressure.
Indicator symbols
03
Symbol
Specification
ABL fault
Emissions system
Meters in the combined instrument panel.
Indicator and warning symbols.
Main beam and direction indicator symbol
Fuel gauge. See also Trip computer, page
222, and Refuelling, page 295.
warning symbols1
Rear fog lamp on
Symbol for DRIVe - Start/Stop*, see
page 126
Stability system
Tachometer. The meter indicates engine
speed in thousands of revolutions per
minute (rpm).
Indicator symbols
Functionality check
All indicator and warning symbols illuminate in
key position II or when the engine is started.
When the engine has started, all the symbols
should go out except the parking brake symbol, which only goes out when the brake is disengaged.
1
72
ABS fault
Speedometer
Stability system, sport mode
Engine preheater (diesel)
Low level in fuel tank
Information, read display text
For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are made via display text. For information on checking the oil level, see page 333.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
Symbol
Specification
Main beam On
Left-hand direction indicators
2. Restart the engine.
Information, read display text
3. If the symbol remains illuminated, drive to
a workshop to have the ABS system
checked. Volvo recommends that you
seek assistance from an authorised Volvo
workshop.
When one of the car's systems does not
behave as intended, this information symbol
illuminates and a text appears on the information display. The message text is cleared with
the OK button, see page 198, or it disappears
automatically after a time (time depending on
which function is indicated). The information
symbol can also illuminate in conjunction with
other symbols.
Right-hand direction indicators
Rear fog lamp on
DRIVe - Start/Stop*, the engine
auto-stopped, see page 126
This symbol illuminates when the rear fog lamp
is on. There is only one fog lamp. It is located
on the driver's side.
Not used
ABL fault
The symbol illuminates if a fault has arisen in
the ABL function (Active Bending Lights).
Emissions system
If the symbol illuminates then it may be due to
a fault in the car's emissions system. Drive to
a workshop for checking. Volvo recommends
that you seek assistance from an authorised
Volvo workshop.
ABS fault
If this symbol illuminates then the system is not
working. The car's regular brake system continues to work, but without the ABS function.
1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the
engine.
Stability system
03
NOTE
A flashing symbol indicates that the stability
system is operating. If the symbol illuminates
with constant glow then there is a fault in the
system.
When a service message is shown, the symbol and message are cleared using the OK
button, or disappear automatically after a
time.
Stability system, Sport mode
Sport mode allows for a more active driving
experience. The system then detects whether
the accelerator pedal, steering wheel movements and cornering are more active than in
normal driving and then allows controlled skidding of the rear section up to a certain level
before it intervenes and stabilises the car.
Main beam On
The symbol illuminates when main beam is on
and with main beam flash.
Left/right-hand direction indicators
Both direction indicator symbols flash when
the hazard warning flashers are used.
DRIVe – Start/Stop*
Engine preheater (diesel)
This symbol illuminates during engine preheating. Preheating takes place mostly due to low
temperature.
The symbol shines when the engine is autostopped.
Low level in fuel tank
When the symbol illuminates the level in the
fuel tank is low, refuel as soon as possible.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
73
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
Warning symbols
Symbol
Specification
Low oil pressureA
Parking brake applied
03
Airbags – SRS
Seatbelt reminder
Alternator not charging
Fault in brake system
Parking brake applied
This symbol illuminates with a constant glow
when the parking brake is applied. The symbol
flashes during application, and then changes
over to a constant glow.
A
For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure
is not used. Warnings are made via display text, see pages
333 and 335.
Low oil pressure
If this symbol illuminates during driving then
the engine's oil pressure is too low. Stop the
engine immediately and check the engine oil
level, top up if necessary. If the symbol illuminates and the oil level is normal, contact a
workshop. Volvo recommends that you seek
assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop.
74
If the brake and ABS symbols illuminate at the
same time, there may be a fault in the brake
force distribution system.
A flashing symbol means that a fault has arisen.
Read the message on the information display.
1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the
engine.
Airbags – SRS
2. Restart the engine.
If this symbol remains illuminated or illuminates
while driving, it means a fault has been
detected in the seatbelt buckle, SRS, SIPS, or
IC systems. Drive immediately to a workshop
to have the system checked. Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an
authorised Volvo workshop.
Seatbelt reminder
Warning
and check the level in the brake fluid reservoir,
see page 337.
This symbol illuminates if someone in a front
seat has not put on their seatbelt or if someone
in a rear seat has taken off their seatbelt.
• If both symbols extinguish, continue
driving.
• If the symbols remain illuminated, check
the level in the brake fluid reservoir, see
page 337. If the brake fluid level is normal but the symbols are still illuminated,
the car can be driven, with great care, to
a workshop to have the brake system
checked. Volvo recommends that you
seek assistance from an authorised
Volvo workshop.
Alternator not charging
This symbol illuminates during driving if a fault
has occurred in the electrical system. Visit a
workshop. Volvo recommends that you seek
assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop.
Fault in brake system
If this symbol illuminates, the brake fluid level
may be too low. Stop the car in a safe place
WARNING
If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the
brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further
before topping up the brake fluid.
The loss of brake fluid must be investigated
by a workshop. Volvo recommends that you
contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
WARNING
If the brake and ABS symbols are illuminated at the same time, there is a risk that
the rear end will skid during heavy braking.
Warning
The red warning symbol illuminates when a
fault has been indicated which could affect the
safety and/or driveability of the car. An explanatory text is shown on the information display
at the same time. The symbol remains visible
until the fault has been rectified but the text
message can be cleared with the OK button,
see page 198. The warning symbol can also
illuminate in conjunction with other symbols.
panel. Stop the car in a safe place as soon as
possible and close the door, bonnet or boot lid,
whichever is open.
If the car is driven at a speed lower than
approx. 7 km/h then the information
symbol illuminates.
If the car is driven at a speed higher
than approx. 7 km/h then the warning
symbol illuminates.
The meters are used to measure short distances. The distance is shown in the display.
One short press on the control switches
between the two trip meters T1 and T2. A long
press (more than 2 seconds) resets the currently displayed trip meter.
03
Clock
Trip meter
Action:
1. Stop in a safe place. Do not drive the car
further.
2. Read the information on the information
display. Implement the action in accordance with the message in the display. Clear
the message using the OK button.
Reminder – doors not closed
If one of the doors, the bonnet2 or tailgate is not
closed properly then the information or warning symbol illuminates together with an explanatory text message in the combined instrument
2
Clock and setting knob.
Display for showing the time
Controls for setting the clock
Trip meter and controls.
Display for trip meter
Controls for switching between trip meters
T1 and T2, as well as resetting the trip
meters
Turn the knob clockwise/anticlockwise to set
the clock. Turn first to the end position and then
turn past/over the end position a further
approx. 1 mm - a "click" sounds and is felt in
Only cars with alarm*.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
75
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
the button. Each "click" scrolls 1 minute. In
order to change quickly - hold in the "click
position".
In connection with a message the clock can be
temporarily replaced by a symbol, see
page 198.
03
Setting the clock in MY CAR
In addition to the previous manual/mechanical
method the clock can also be set in the menu
group MY CAR, for more information see
page 200.
4. Turn TUNE to select the box for Minute (A)
and press OK - the box is activated (B).
5. Turn TUNE to set the correct minute and
press OK - the box is deactivated.
6. Turn TUNE to select the box for OK and
press OK - the setting is complete.
The menu option Settings System options
Time format selects the 24h or 12h system
(AM/PM).
RSI*
The function RSI (Road Sign Identification)
helps the driver to see road signs containing
information on current speed, that a motorway
or road is starting/ending and when overtaking
is prohibited. For detailed information on RSI,
see page 148.
1. Locate Settings
Time.
System options
2. The cursor is located in the first box for
Hour: Press OK - the box is activated.
3. Turn TUNE to set the correct hour and
press OK - the box is deactivated.
76
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Your driving environment
Volvo Sensus
General
the car can be personalised by means of an
intuitive user interface. Settings can be made
in Car settings, Infotainment, Climate, etc.
With the centre console buttons and controls
or the steering wheel's right-hand keypad*
functions can be activated or deactivated and
many different settings can be made.
03
With a press on MY CAR all settings related to
the driving and control of the car are presented,
such as City Safety, Locks and alarm, setting
the clock, etc.
Control panel in centre console
Navigation* - NAV, see separate owner's
manual (Road and Traffic Information System - RTI).
Infotainment (RADIO, MEDIA, TEL*), see
page 232.
Car settings - MY CAR, see page 200.
With a press on the respective function:
RADIO, MEDIA, TEL*, NAV* and CAM* other
sources, systems and functions can be activated, e.g. AM, FM1, CD, DVD*, TV*, Bluetooth*, navigation* and park assist camera*.
For more information on all functions/systems,
see the respective section in the owner's manual.
Park assist camera - CAM*, see
page 188.
Climate control, see page 208.
Volvo Sensus is the car's operating system, the
heart of your personal Volvo experience. Volvo
Sensus combines and presents many functions in several of the car's systems on the
centre console TV screen. With Volvo Sensus
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
77
03 Your driving environment
Key positions
Insert and remove the remote control
key
IMPORTANT
Foreign objects in the ignition switch may
jeopardise the function or destroy the lock.
Level
0
• Power seats can be adjusted.
• The audio system can be
used for a limited time - see
page 232.
Withdraw the key
• Push the remote control key, allow it to
eject, then pull it out from the ignition
switch.
I
NOTE
For cars with the Keyless* function the key
does not need to be inserted into the ignition
switch but can be stored in e.g. a pocket.
For more information on Keyless functions see page 53.
In order to enable the use of a limited number
of functions with the engine switched off, the
car's electrical system can be set in 3 different
levels (key positions) - 0, I and II - with the
remote control key. Throughout this owner's
manual these levels are described using the
denomination "key positions".
The following table shows the functions available in each key position/level.
Insert the key
1. Hold the end of the remote control key with
the detachable key blade and insert the key
in the ignition switch.
2. Then press the key in the lock up to its end
position.
78
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
• Panorama roof, power windows, 12 V socket in the passenger compartment, RTI,
phone, ventilation fan and
windscreen wipers can be
used.
Functions at different levels
Ignition switch with remote control key extracted/
inserted.
• Odometer, clock and temperature gauge are illuminated.
Do not press the remote control key incorrectly turned - Hold the end with the detachable key blade, see page 50.
03
Functions
II
• The headlamps come on.
• Warning/indicator lamps illuminate for 5 seconds.
• Several other systems are
activated. However, heating
in seat cushions and the rear
window can only be activated
after the engine has been
started.
This key position consumes a
lot of current from the starter
battery and should therefore be
avoided!
03 Your driving environment
Key positions
Choosing key position/level
Starting and stopping the engine
Key position 0
For information about starting/switching off the
engine - see page 114.
• Unlock the car - this means that the car's
electrical system is at level 0.
Key position I
• With the remote control key fully inserted
Towing
For important information about the remote
control key during towing - see page 311.
into the ignition switch1 - Briefly press
START/STOP ENGINE.
03
NOTE
To reach level I or II without starting the
engine - do not depress the brake/clutch
pedal when these key positions are due to
be selected.
Key position II
• With the remote control key fully inserted
into the ignition switch1 - Give a long2 press
on START/STOP ENGINE.
Back to key position 0
• To return to key position 0 from position II
and I - Briefly press on START/STOP
ENGINE.
Audio system
For information on the audio system's functions with remote control key removed - see
page 232.
1
2
Not necessary for cars with the Keyless* function.
Approx. 2 seconds.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
79
03 Your driving environment
Seats
Front seats
WARNING
Adjust the position of the driver's seat
before setting off, never while driving. Make
sure that the seat is in locked position in
order to avoid personal injury in the event of
sudden braking or an accident.
Lift the catches on the rear of the backrest
and fold it forward.
4. Push the seat forward so that the head
restraint "locks" in under the glovebox.
Raising takes place in reverse order.
03
Lowering the front seat backrest
WARNING
Grasp the backrest and make sure that it is
properly locked after being folded up in
order to avoid personal injury in the event of
sudden braking or an accident.
Lumbar support adjustment, turn the
wheel1.
Forward/backward: lift the handle to adjust
the distance to the steering wheel and pedals. Check that the seat is locked after
changing position.
Raise/lower* front edge of seat cushion,
pump up/down.
Adjust backrest rake, turn the wheel.
1
80
The passenger seat backrest can be folded
forward to make room for long loads.
Raise/lower the seat, pump up/down.
Move the seat as far back/down as possible.
Control panel for power seat*.
Adjust the backrest to an upright position.
Also applies to power seat.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Your driving environment
Seats
Power seat*
Power lumbar support*
Seat with memory function*
03
Front edge of seat cushion up/down
Lumbar support, increasing
Seat forward/backward and up/down
Lumbar support, decreasing
Backrest rake
The power front seats have overload protection
which is tripped if a seat is blocked by an
object. If this happens, go to key position I or
0 and wait a short time before adjusting the
seat again.
Only one movement (forward/back/up/down)
can be made at a time.
Store setting
Memory button
The lumbar support can be adjusted when the
engine is running or when key position II is
active.
Memory button
Memory button
Button for storing settings
Preparations
The seats can be adjusted for a certain time
after unlocking the door with the remote control key without the key in the ignition switch.
Seat adjustment is normally made in key position I and can always be made when the engine
is running.
1. Adjust the seat and the door mirrors.
2. Hold the button depressed to store settings while depressing one of the memory
buttons.
Using a stored setting
Hold one of the memory buttons depressed
until the seat and the door mirrors stop. If you
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
81
03 Your driving environment
Seats
and door mirrors will automatically adopt
the positions that are stored in the remote
control key's memory (if the seat has been
moved since you locked the car).
release the button then the movement of the
seat will stop.
Key memory* in remote control
key2
The key memory can be activated/deactivated
in the menu system MY CAR under Settings
Car settings Car key memory. For a
description of the menu system, see
page 200.
03
Heated seats
For heated seats, see page 213.
Rear seats
Head restraint, centre seat, rear
Emergency stop
If the seat accidentally begins to move, press
one of the setting buttons for the seat or memory buttons in order to stop the seat.
All remote control keys can be used by different drivers to store the settings for the driver's
seat and door mirrors3. Proceed as follows:
• Adjust the seat as you want it.
• Lock the car by pressing the lock button on
the remote control key that you normally
use. This stores the positions of the seat
and door mirrors in the remote control
key's memory4.
• Unlock the car (by pressing the unlock but-
Restarting to reach the seat position stored in
the key memory is performed by pressing the
unlock button on the remote control key. The
driver's door must then be open.
WARNING
Risk of crushing! Make sure that children do
not play with the controls. Check that there
are no objects in front of, behind or under
the seat during adjustment. Ensure that
none of the backseat passengers will be
trapped.
ton on the same remote control key) and
open the driver's door. The driver's seat
2
3
4
82
For key memory for Keyless function, see page 54.
Only if the car is equipped with power seat with memory and retractable power door mirrors.
This setting does not affect settings that have been stored in the power seat's memory function.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Adjust the head restraint according to passenger height so that the whole of the back of the
head is covered if possible. Slide it up as
required.
To lower the head restraint again, the button
(located in the centre between the backrest
and head restraint, see illustration) must be
pressed in while the head restraint is pressed
down carefully.
03 Your driving environment
Seats
Manual lowering of the outer head
restraints, rear seat
Lowering the rear seat backrest
IMPORTANT
There must be no objects on the rear seat
when the backrest is to be folded down. The
seat belts must not be connected either.
Otherwise there is a risk of damaging the
rear seat upholstery.
03
The triple-section backrest can be folded in
different ways.
NOTE
Pull the locking handle closest to the head
restraint to fold the head restraint forward.
The head restraint is moved back manually
until a "click" can be heard.
WARNING
The head restraints must be in locked position after being raised.
The front seats may need to be pushed forwards, and/or the backrests adjusted
upwards, in order that the rear backrests
can be folded forward fully.
• The left-hand section can be folded separately.
• The centre section can be folded separately.
• The right-hand section can only be folded
together with the centre section.
• If the entire backrest is to be folded then
the different sections should be folded
separately.
If the centre backrest is being lowered fold and adjust the centre backrest's head
restraint downwards, see page 82.
The outer head restraints are lowered automatically when the outer backrests are
lowered. Pull up the backrest's locking
handle
while folding the backrest forward at the same time. A red indicator on
the lock catch
shows that the backrest
is no longer locked in place.
83
03 Your driving environment
Seats
Raising takes place in reverse order.
NOTE
03
When the backrest has been raised, the red
indicator should no longer be showing. If it
is still showing then the backrest is not
locked in place.
WARNING
Check that the backrests and head
restraints in the rear seats are firmly locked
after raising.
1. The remote control key must be in position
I or II.
2. Press the button to lower the rear outer
head restraints to improve rearward visibility.
WARNING
Do not lower the outer head restraints if
there are any passengers using of the outer
seats.
Move the head restraint back manually until a
click is heard.
Electrical lowering of the rear seat's
outer head restraints*
WARNING
The head restraints must be in locked position after being raised.
84
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Your driving environment
Steering wheel
Adjusting
Horn
WARNING
Adjust and secure the steering wheel before
driving.
With speed related power steering* the level of
steering force can be adjusted, see page 224.
03
G021138
Keypads*
Adjusting the steering wheel.
Horn.
Lever - releasing the steering wheel
Press the centre of the steering wheel to signal.
Possible steering wheel positions
The steering wheel can be adjusted for both
height and depth:
1. Pull the lever towards you to release the
steering wheel.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position
that suits you.
3. Push back the lever to fix the steering
wheel in place. If the lever is stiff, press the
steering wheel lightly at the same time as
you push the lever back.
Keypads in the steering wheel.
Cruise control, see page 150
Adaptive cruise control, see page 152
Menu, audio and phone control, see
page 233.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
85
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
Headlamp control
Headlamp control with AUTO mode
The intensity of the instrument lighting is
adjusted with the thumbwheel.
Headlamp levelling
The load in the car changes the vertical alignment of the headlamp beam, which could dazzle oncoming motorists. Avoid this by adjusting
the height of the beam. Lower the beam if the
car is heavily laden.
03
1. Leave the engine running, or have the car's
electrical system in key position I.
Overview, headlamp control.
Overview, headlamp control.
Thumbwheel for adjusting display and
instrument lighting
Thumbwheel for adjusting display and
instrument lighting
Rear fog lamp
Rear fog lamp
Headlamp control
Headlamp control
Thumbwheel1 for headlamp levelling
Thumbwheel1 for headlamp levelling
Instrument lighting
Different display and instrument lighting is
switched on depending on key position, see
page 78.
The display lighting is automatically subdued
in darkness - the sensitivity is set with the
thumbwheel.
1
86
Not available for cars equipped with active Xenon headlamps*.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
2. Roll the thumbwheel up/down to raise/
lower beam alignment.
Cars with active Xenon headlamps* have automatic headlamp levelling and are therefore not
equipped with the thumbwheel.
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
Main/dipped beam
Position
Headlamp control with AUTO mode
Specification
Dipped beamA/Dipped beam
off.
Main beam can be activatedA.
Main beam flash operates in
this position.
03
Position/parking lamps
Dipped beam
Main beam can be activated.
Headlamp control and stalk switch.
Main beam flash operates in
this position.
Position for main beam flash
Position for main beam
A
Applies to certain markets.
Headlamp control and stalk switch.
Position for main beam flash
Position for main beam
Position
Specification
Dipped beam off.
Main beam flash operates in
this position.
Position/parking lamps
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
87
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
Position
Specification
Dipped beamA/Dipped beam
off in good light conditions. The
"Tunnel detection*" function
activates dipped beam in poor
light conditions.
03
The function for "Main beam
with automatic activation*" can
be used.
Main beam flash operates in
this position.
Dipped beam
Main beam can be activated.
Main beam flash operates in
this position.
A
Applies to certain markets.
Volvo recommends that
mode is used,
as long as the traffic situation or weather conditions are not unfavourable for the function for
"Main beam with automatic activation*".
Main beam comes on until the stalk switch is
released.
Dipped beam
When the engine is started, dipped beam is
activated automatically2 if the headlamp con. If necessary, autotrol is in position
matic dipped beam for this position can be
deactivated by a workshop. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo
workshop.
In position
dipped beam is always
switched on when the engine is running or
when key position II is active.
Main beam
Main beam can be activated when the head2 or
.
lamp control is in position
Activate/deactivate main beam by moving the
stalk switch towards the steering wheel to the
end position and release.
When main beam has been activated the symilluminates in the combined instrubol
ment panel.
Main beam flash
Move the stalk switch gently towards the steering wheel to the position for main beam flash.
2
88
Applies to certain markets, for headlamp control without AUTO mode.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Main beam with automatic activation AHB*
Main beam with automatic activation (Active
High Beam - AHB) is a function which uses a
camera sensor at the top edge of the windscreen to detect the headlamp beams of
oncoming traffic or the rear lights of vehicles in
front, and then switches from main beam to
dipped beam. The lights are switched back to
main beam a second or so after the camera
sensor no longer detects any such light.
In cars with this function the headlamp control
has another design, see page 87.
This function can be activated when the head. For activation
lamp control is in position
to take place, the engine must have been running for at least 20 seconds and the speed of
the car must be 20 km/h or higher.
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
When AHB has been activated the symbol
illuminates in the combined instrument panel's display. When main beam has
symbol also illumibeen activated the
nates in the combined instrument panel.
NOTE
Keep the windscreen surface in front of the
camera sensor clean from ice, snow, mist
and dirt.
Light switch in position AUTO.
Activate/deactivate AHB by moving the lefthand stalk switch towards the steering wheel
to the end position and release. Deactivation
when main beam is on means that the lights
switch directly to dipped beam.
message goes out and the
minates.
symbol illu-
WARNING
AHB is an aid for using optimum light composition when conditions are favourable.
03
The driver always bears responsibility for
manually switching between main and
dipped beam when traffic situations or
weather conditions so require.
Do not attach or fit anything to the windscreen in front of the camera sensor, as this
could reduce or prevent the function of one
or more camera-dependent systems.
If the message AHB temporary unavailable
is shown in the combined instrument panel's
display then you have to switch manually
between main and dipped beam. However, the
headlamp control may nevertheless be in posi. The same applies if the message
tion
Windscreen Sensors blocked and the
symbol are shown. The
symbol goes out when these messages are shown.
AHB may be temporarily unavailable e.g. in situations with dense fog or heavy rain. When
AHB becomes available again, or the windscreen sensors are no longer covered, the
Headlamp control and stalk switch.
89
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
IMPORTANT
Examples of when manual switching
between main and dipped beam may be
required:
•
•
•
•
•
03
In heavy rain or dense fog
In snow flurries or slush
In moonlight
When driving in poorly lit built-up areas
If there are pedestrians on or beside the
road
•
If there are highly reflective objects such
as signs in the vicinity of the road
•
When the lighting from oncoming traffic
is obscured by e.g. a crash barrier
•
When there is traffic on connecting
roads
On the brow of a hill or in a hollow
In sharp bends.
For more information on the limitations of the
camera sensor, see page 175.
Tunnel detection*
In cars with rain sensor* the rain sensor detects
the changed light conditions when the car is
3
90
Active Xenon headlamps - ABL*
When the traffic ahead has weak lighting
•
•
•
e.g. driven into a tunnel, and dipped beam is
activated within a second in markets without
automatic dipped beam. Dipped beam is deactivated approx. 20 seconds after the car has
been driven out of the tunnel. Note! - The headlamp control must be in
position for tunnel detection to work.
Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left)
and activated (right) respectively.
If the car is equipped with active Xenon headlamps Active Bending Lights - ABL the light
from the headlamps follows the steering wheel
movement in order to provide maximum lighting in bends and junctions and so provide
increased safety.
Activated on delivery from the factory.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The function is activated automatically when
the car is started. In the event of a fault in the
function the
symbol illuminates in the
combined instrument panel at the same time
as the information display shows an explanatory text and a further illuminated symbol.
Symbol
Display
Specification
Headlamp
failure
Service
required
The system
is disengaged. Visit
a workshop
if the message
remains.
Volvo recommends
that you
contact an
authorised
Volvo workshop.
The function is only active in twilight or darkness and only when the car is moving.
The function3 can be deactivated/activated in
the menu system MY CAR under My XC60
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
Active Bending Lights or under Settings
Car settings Light settings Active
Bending Lights. For a description of the menu
system, see page 201.
For headlamp pattern adjustment, see
page 94.
Auxiliary lamps*
If the car has auxiliary lamps, the driver can use
the MY CAR menu system to choose whether
they should be deactivated or switched on/off
simultaneously with the main beam4, see
page 202.
Position/parking lamps
Turn the headlamp control to the position for
position/parking lamps (number plate lighting
is illuminated at the same time).
Rear fog lamp
When it is dark outside and the tailgate is
opened the rear position lamps illuminate to
alert traffic behind. This takes place irrespective of what position the headlamp control is in
or what key position the car's electrical system
is in.
03
Brake lights
The brake light automatically comes on during
braking. For information on the Emergency
brake lights and automatic hazard warning
flashers, see page 133.
Button for rear fog lamp.
The rear fog lamp consists of one rear lamp and
can only be switched on in combination with
main/dipped beam.
Press the button for On/Off. The rear fog lamp
on the combined
indicator symbol
instrument panel and the light in the button illuminate when the rear fog lamp is switched on.
The rear fog lamp is switched off automatically
when the engine is switched off.
NOTE
Headlamp control in position for position/parking
lamps.
4
Regulations for using rear fog lamps vary
between different countries.
Auxiliary lamps must be connected to the electrical system by a workshop. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
91
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
Hazard warning flashers
Direction indicators/flashers
Direction indicator symbols
For direction indicator symbols, see page 72.
Interior lighting
Button for hazard warning flashers.
Direction indicators/flashers.
Press the button to activate the hazard warning
flashers. Both direction indicator symbols in
the combined instrument panel flash when the
hazard warning flashers are in use.
Short flash sequence
The hazard warning flashers are activated
automatically when the car has been braked so
suddenly that the emergency brake lights have
been activated at a speed below 10 km/h. The
hazard warning flashers remain on when the
car has stopped and are deactivated automatically when the car is driven off again or the
button is depressed. For more information on
Emergency brake lights and automatic hazard
warning flashers, see page 133.
92
Move the stalk switch up or down to the
first position and release. The direction
indicators flash three times. The function
can be activated/deactivated in the menu
system MY CAR under Settings Car
settings Light settings Triple
indicator. For a description of the menu
system, see page 201.
Continuous flash sequence
Move the stalk switch up or down to the
outer position.
The stalk switch remains in its position and is
moved back manually, or automatically by the
steering wheel movement.
G021149
03
Controls in roof console for the front reading
lamps and passenger compartment lighting.
Reading lamp, left-hand side
Reading lamp, right-hand side
Interior lighting
All lighting in the passenger compartment can
be switched on and off manually within
30 minutes from when:
• the engine has been switched off and the
car's electrical system is in key position 0
• the car has been unlocked but the engine
has not been started.
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
Front roof lighting
Lighting, cargo area
The front reading lamps are switched on or off
by pressing the relevant button in the roof console.
The lighting in the cargo area is switched on
and off respectively when the tailgate is
opened or closed.
Rear roof lighting
Automatic lighting
The switch for passenger compartment lighting has three positions for the lighting in the
passenger compartment:
03
• Off – right-hand side pressed in, automatic
lighting deactivated.
G021150
Rear roof lighting in cars with panorama roof.
Rear roof lighting.
• Neutral position – automatic lighting activated.
The lamps are switched on or off by pressing
each respective button.
• On – left-hand side pressed in, passenger
Courtesy lighting
Neutral position
Courtesy lighting (and passenger compartment lighting) is switched on and off respectively when a side door is opened or closed.
When the button is in neutral position the passenger compartment lighting is switched on
and off automatically in accordance with the
following.
Glovebox lighting
Glovebox lighting is switched on and off
respectively when the lid is opened or closed.
Vanity mirror
The lighting for the vanity mirror, see
page 227, is switched on and off respectively
when the cover is opened or closed.
compartment lighting switched on.
The passenger compartment lighting is
switched on and remains on for 30 seconds if:
• the car is unlocked with the remote control
key or key blade, see pages 47 or 50
• the engine has been switched off and the
car's electrical system is in key position 0.
Passenger compartment lighting is switched
off when:
``
93
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
03
If any lighting is switched on manually and the
car is locked then it will be switched off automatically after two minutes.
Mood lights
When the normal passenger compartment
lighting is switched off and the engine is running, a number of LEDs illuminate, including
one in the ceiling lighting, in order to provide a
low-light and enhance the mood while driving.
This lighting goes out for a little while after the
normal passenger compartment lighting when
the car is locked.
Home safe light duration
Some of the exterior lighting can be kept
switched on to work as home safe lighting after
the car has been locked.
1. Remove the remote control key from the
ignition switch.
2. Move the left-hand stalk switch toward the
steering wheel to the end position and
release it. The function can be activated in
94
Adjusting headlamp pattern
3. Get out of the car and lock the door.
When the function is activated, dipped beam,
parking lamps, door mirror lamps, number
plate lighting, interior roof lamps and courtesy
lighting are switched on.
The length of time for which the home safe
lighting should be kept on can be set in the
menu system MY CAR under Settings Car
settings Light settings Home safe light
duration. For a description of the menu system, see page 201.
G021151
The passenger compartment lighting comes
on and remains on for two minutes if one of the
doors is open.
the same way as with main beam flash, see
page 87.
Headlamp pattern, left-hand traffic.
Approach light duration
Approach lighting is switched on with the
remote control key, see page 47, and is used
to switch on the car's lighting at a distance.
When the function is activated with the remote
control, parking lamps, door mirror lamps,
number plate lighting, interior roof lamps and
courtesy lighting are switched on.
The length of time for which the approach lighting should be kept on can be set in the menu
system MY CAR under Settings Car
settings Light settings Approach light
duration. For a description of the menu system, see page 201.
G021152
• the engine is started
• the car is locked.
Headlamp pattern, right-hand traffic.
The headlamp pattern must be adjusted to
avoid dazzling oncoming motorists and can be
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
set for right or left-hand traffic. The correct pattern will also better illuminate the verge.
Active Xenon headlamps*
The car must be stationary with the engine running when the headlamp pattern is shifted
between right and left-hand traffic.
1. Access the menu system MY CAR under
Settings Car settings Light
settings.
2. Select between Temporary RH traffic
and Temporary LH traffic.
For a description of the menu system, see
page 201
• D = RHD Left (right-hand drive, left lens)
2. Transfer the template to a self-adhesive
waterproof material and cut it out.
3. Position the self-adhesive templates at the
right distance from the edge of the headlamp lens using the illustration, see
page 96, and the dimensions in the following list:
03
• Templates A and D: horizontal line
approx. 104 mm, vertical line approx.
20 mm
• Templates B and C: horizontal line
approx. 167 mm, vertical line approx.
14 mm
Halogen headlamps
The headlamp pattern for halogen headlamps
is readjusted by masking the headlamp lens.
The headlamp pattern may not be as good.
Masking the headlamps
1. Copy the A and B templates for left-hand
drive cars or the C and D templates for
right-hand drive cars with a scale of 1:1,
see page 97:
• A = LHD Right (left-hand drive, right
lens)
• B = LHD Left (left-hand drive, left lens)
• C = RHD Right (right-hand drive, right
lens)
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
95
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
Aligning the templates
03
Upper row: left-hand drive cars, templates A and B. Lower row: right-hand drive cars, templates C and D.
96
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
Templates for halogen headlamps
03
97
03 Your driving environment
Wipers and washing
Windscreen wipers1
Continuous wiping
The wipers sweep at normal speed.
The wipers sweep at high speed.
03
IMPORTANT
Before activating the wipers during winter ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen
in and that any snow or ice on the windscreen (and rear window) is scraped away.
IMPORTANT
Windscreen wipers and windscreen washers.
Rain sensor, on/off
Thumbwheel sensitivity/frequency
Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers
are cleaning the windscreen. The windscreen must be wet when the windscreen
wipers are operating.
Windscreen wipers off
Move the stalk switch to position 0 to
switch off the windscreen wipers.
Single sweep
Raise the stalk switch and release to
make one sweep.
Intermittent wiping
Set the number of sweeps per time
unit with the thumbwheel when intermittent wiping is selected.
1
98
Service position wiper blade
For cleaning the windscreen/wiper blades and
replacement of wiper blades see see
page 345 and 364.
Rain sensor*
The rain sensor automatically starts the windscreen wipers based on how much water it
detects on the windscreen. The sensitivity of
Replacing the wiper blades see page 345, service position, wiper blade see page 345 and filling washer fluid see page 347.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
the rain sensor can be adjusted using the
thumbwheel.
When the rain sensor is activated a light in the
button the rain sensor symbol
is shown
in the right-hand display in the combined
instrument panel.
Activating and setting the sensitivity
When activating the rain sensor, the car must
be running or the remote control key in position
I or II while the windscreen wiper stalk switch
must be in position 0 or in the position for a
single sweep.
Activate the rain sensor by pressing the button
. The windscreen wipers make one
sweep.
Press the stalk switch up for the wipers to make
an extra sweep.
Turn the thumbwheel upward for higher sensitivity and downward for lower sensitivity. (An
extra sweep is made when the thumbwheel is
turned upward.)
Deactivate
Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the butor move the stalk switch down to
ton
another wiper program.
03 Your driving environment
Wipers and washing
The rain sensor is automatically deactivated
when the remote control key is removed from
the ignition switch or five minutes after the
engine has been switched off.
IMPORTANT
The windscreen wipers could start and be
damaged in an automatic car wash. Deactivate the rain sensor while the car is running
or the remote control key is in position I or
II. The symbol in the combined instrument
panel and the lamp in the button go out.
Washing the windscreen
Wiping and washing the rear window
Move the stalk switch toward the steering
wheel to start the windscreen and headlamp
washers.
The windscreen wipers will make several more
sweeps and the headlamps are washed once
the stalk switch has been released.
Heated washer nozzles*
The washer nozzles are heated automatically
in cold weather to prevent the washer fluid
freezing solid.
High-pressure headlamp washing*
Washing the headlamps and windows
High-pressure headlamp washing consumes a
large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid, the
headlamps are washed automatically at every
fifth windscreen wash cycle.
Reduced washing
If only approx. 1 litre of washer fluid remains in
the reservoir and the message that you should
fill the washer fluid is shown in the combined
instrument panel's display, then the supply of
washer fluid to the headlamps is switched off.
This is in order to prioritise cleaning the windscreen and the visibility through it.
Washing function.
03
Rear window wiper – intermittent wiping
Rear window wiper – continuous speed
Press the stalk switch forward (see the arrow
in the illustration above) to initiate rear window
washing and wiping.
NOTE
The rear window wiper is equipped with
overheating protection which means that
the motor is switched off if it overheats. The
rear window wiper works again after a cooling period (30 seconds or longer, depending
on the heat in the motor and the outside
temperature).
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
99
03 Your driving environment
Wipers and washing
Wiper – reversing
Engaging reverse gear while the windscreen
wipers are on initiates intermittent rear window
wiping2. The function stops when reverse gear
is disengaged.
03
If the rear window wiper is already on at continuous speed, no change is made.
NOTE
On cars with rain sensor, the rear window
wiper is activated with reversing, if the sensor is activated and it is raining.
2
100
This function (intermittent wiping when reversing) can be deactivated. Visit a workshop. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
03 Your driving environment
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
General
windscreen with no heat-reflecting film (see the
highlighted area in the above illustration).
Heat-reflecting windscreen*
Laminated glass
The windscreen and panorama roof
have laminated glass. It is reinforced
which provides better protection
against break-ins and improved
sound insulation in the passenger compartment. Other glass surfaces*.
Power windows
03
Water and dirt-repellent coating*
Windows are treated with a coating
that improves the view in difficult
weather conditions. Maintenance, see
page 365.
Areas where IR film is not applied.
Dimensions
IMPORTANT
Do not use a metal ice scraper to remove ice
from the windows. Use the defroster to
remove ice from the mirrors, see page 104.
A
47 mm
B
87 mm
Driver's door control panel.
Switch for electric child safety locks* and
disengaging rear power window buttons,
see page 62.
The windscreen is equipped with a heatreflecting film (IR) that reduces the solar heat
radiation into the passenger compartment.
The positioning of electronic equipment, such
as a transponder, behind a glass surface with
heat-reflecting film may affect its function and
performance.
For the optimal function of electronic equipment, it should be positioned on the part of the
Rear window controls
Front window controls
WARNING
Check that none of the rear seat passengers
is in danger of becoming trapped in any way
when closing the windows from the driver's
door.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
101
03 Your driving environment
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
WARNING
Operating
Make sure that children or other passengers
are not in danger of becoming trapped in
any way when closing the windows, in particular when the remote control key is used.
03
WARNING
If there are children in the car - remember to
always switch off the power supply to the
power windows by selecting key position 0
and then take the remote control key with
you when leaving the car. For information on
key positions - see page 79.
NOTE
One way to reduce the pulsating wind noise
when the rear windows are open is to also
open the front windows slightly.
Operating the power windows.
Operating without auto
Operating with auto
All power windows can be operated using the
control panel for the driver's door - the control
panels for the other doors can only each operate their respective power window. Only one
control panel can be operated at a time.
In order for the power windows to be used the
key position must be at least I - see page 78.
The power windows can be operated for a few
minutes after the engine has been switched off
and after the remote control key has been
removed - although not after a door has been
opened.
102
Closing of the windows is stopped and the
window is opened if anything prevents its
movement. It is possible to force the pinch protection when closing has been interrupted, e.g.
with ice, by continuously holding the button up
until the window is closed. The pinch protection is reactivated after a brief pause.
Operating without auto
Move one of the controls up/down gently. The
power windows move up/down as long as the
control is held in position.
Operating with auto
Move one of the controls up/down to the end
position and release it. The window runs automatically to its end position.
Operating with the remote control key
and central locking
To remotely operate the power windows from
the outside with the remote control key or from
inside with central locking, see pages 48 and
56.
03 Your driving environment
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
Resetting
Door mirrors
If the battery is disconnected then the function
for automatic opening must be reset so that it
can work correctly.
The mirror positions are stored in the key memory when the car has been locked with the
remote control key. When the car is unlocked
with the same remote control key the mirrors
and the driver's seat adopt the stored positions
when the driver's door is opened.
1. Gently raise the front section of the button
to raise the window to its end position and
hold it there for one second.
3. Raise the front section of the button again
for one second.
WARNING
Door mirror controls.
Angling the door mirror when parking1
Adjusting
The door mirror can be angled down for the
driver to view the side of the road when parking
for example.
1. Press the L button for the left-hand door
mirror or the R button for the right-hand
door mirror. The light in the button illuminates.
2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the
centre.
3. Press the L or R button again. The light
should no longer be illuminated.
WARNING
The mirrors are the wide angle type for optimum surveillance. Objects may appear further away than they actually are.
1
03
The function can be activated/deactivated in
the menu system MY CAR under Settings
Car settings Car key memory Personal
settings in key memory. For a description of
the menu system, see page 201.
2. Release the button briefly.
Resetting must be carried out to ensure that
pinch protection works.
Storing the position1
–
Engage reverse gear and press the L or R
button.
When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror
automatically returns to its original position
after approx. 10 seconds, or sooner by pressing the L and R button.
Automatic angling of the door mirror
when parking1
When reverse gear is engaged the door mirror
is automatically angled down so that the driver
can see the side of the road when parking for
Only in combination with power seat with memory, see page 81.
103
03 Your driving environment
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
example. When reverse gear is disengaged the
mirror automatically returns to its original position after a short time.
03
3. Repeat the above procedure as necessary.
The mirrors are now reset in neutral position.
The function can be activated/deactivated in
the menu system MY CAR under Settings
Car settings Side mirror settings Tilt
left mirror or Tilt right mirror. For a description of the menu system, see page 201.
Retractable power door mirrors*
Automatic retraction when locking1
2. Release them after
approximately 1 second. The mirrors automatically stop in the fully retracted position.
When the car is locked/unlocked with the
remote control key the door mirrors are automatically retracted/extended.
The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving
in narrow spaces:
1. Depress the L and R buttons simultaneously (key position must be at least I).
The function can be activated/deactivated in
the menu system MY CAR under Settings
Car settings Side mirror settings Fold
mirrors. For a description of the menu system,
see page 201.
Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L
and R buttons simultaneously. The mirrors
automatically stop in the fully extended position.
Resetting to neutral
The light on the door mirrors illuminates when
approach lighting or home safe lighting is
selected, see page 94.
Mirrors that have been moved out of position
by an external force must be reset electrically
to the neutral position for electric retracting/
extending to work correctly:
Home safe and approach lighting
1. Retract the mirrors with the L and R buttons.
2. Fold them out again with the L and R buttons.
1
104
Rear window and door mirror
defrosters
Only in combination with power seat with memory, see page 81.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Use the defroster to quickly remove misting
and ice from the rear window and the door mirrors.
One press of the button starts the heating. The
light in the button indicates that the function is
active. Disconnect the heating as soon as the
ice/misting is cleared in order not to load the
battery unnecessarily. However, the heating is
switched off automatically after a certain time.
The door mirrors and rear window are demisted/defrosted automatically if the car is started
in an outside temperature lower than +9 °C.
Automatic defrosting can be selected in the
menu system MY CAR under Settings
03 Your driving environment
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
Climate settings Automatic rear
defroster. Select between On or Off. For a
description of the menu system, see
page 201.
Automatic dimming*
Interior rearview mirror
The compass* can only be specified for rearview mirrors with automatic dimming, see
page 106.
Bright light from behind is automatically
dimmed by the rearview mirror. The control is
not available in mirrors with automatic dimming.
03
Control for dimming
Manual dimming
Bright light from behind could be reflected in
the rearview mirror and dazzle the driver. Use
dimming with the dimming control when lights
from behind are distracting:
1. Use dimming by moving the control in
towards the passenger compartment.
2. Return to normal position by moving the
control towards the windscreen.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
105
03 Your driving environment
Compass*
Operation
should be calibrated if the car is moved across
several magnetic zones. Proceed as follows:
1. Stop the car in a large open area free from
steel structures and high-voltage power
lines.
2. Start the car.
03
NOTE
For optimum calibration - switch off all electrical equipment (climate control system,
wipers etc.) and make sure that all doors are
closed.
Rearview mirror with compass.
The upper right-hand corner of the rearview
mirror has an integrated display that shows the
compass direction in which the front of the car
is pointing. Eight different directions are shown
with English abbreviations: N (north), NE (north
east), E (east), SE (south east), S (south), SW
(south west), W (west) and NW (north west).
3. Hold the button on the underside of the
rearview mirror depressed
approx. 6 seconds (using a paper clip for
example) until the character C is shown.
The compass is activated automatically when
the car is started or in key position II, see
page 78. To deactivate/activate the compass press in the button on the underside of the mirror using a paper clip for example.
106
G030295
Calibration
The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones.
The compass is set for the geographic area to
which the car was delivered. The compass
Magnetic zones.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
4. Hold the button on the underside of the
rearview mirror depressed
approx. 3 seconds. The number of the current magnetic zone is shown.
5. Press the button repeatedly until the
required magnetic zone (1–15) is shown.
See the map of magnetic zones for the
compass.
6. Wait until the display resumes showing the
character C.
7. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no
more than 10 km/h until a compass direction is shown in the display, indicating that
calibration is complete. Then drive a further
2 circles to fine-tune calibration.
8. Repeat the above procedure as necessary.
03 Your driving environment
Power panorama roof*
General
Operating
WARNING
The panorama roof is divided into two sections.
Only the front section can be opened - horizontally or vertically at the rear edge (ventilation
position).
Children, other passengers or objects may
be trapped by the panorama roof's moving
parts.
The panorama roof has a sun blind made of
perforated fabric and located under the glass
roof to provide extra protection from factors
such as strong sunlight.
•
Always operate the panorama roof with
caution.
•
Do not allow children to play with the
controls.
•
Remember to always switch off the
power supply to the panorama roof by
selecting key position 0 and then take
the remote control key/PCC* with you
when leaving the car. For information on
key positions - see page 79.
03
Opening, automatic
Opening, manual
Closing, manual
Closing, automatic
The panorama roof and curtain can be operated in key position I or II.
The panorama roof and curtain are operated
with a control located in the roof. The control
is activated when the key is in position I or II,
see page 78.
Automatic operation
1. To open the curtain all the way - press the
control rearward to the automatic opening
position and release.
2. To then open the panorama roof all the way
- press the control rearward again to the
automatic opening position and release.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
107
03 Your driving environment
Power panorama roof*
Close the roof/curtain by repeating the preceding procedure in reverse order - press the control forward to the automatic closing position
instead.
Close the roof/curtain by repeating the preceding procedure in reverse order - press the control forward to the manual closing position
instead.
Rapid opening/closing
03
The panorama roof and curtain can be opened/
closed simultaneously:
• To open - press the control rearward to the
automatic operation position twice and
release.
NOTE
For manual opening, the curtain must be
fully open before the panorama roof can be
opened. For the reverse procedure, the
panorama roof must be fully closed before
the curtain can be closed.
When the ventilation position is selected the
front section is raised at its rear edge. If the
curtain is fully closed when ventilation position
is selected - then it opens automatically
approx. 50 mm.
Closing using the remote control key or
central locking button
• To close - press the control forward to the
automatic operation position twice and
release.
Ventilation position
Manual operation
1. To open the curtain - press the control
rearward to the point of resistance for manual opening. The curtain moves towards
maximum opening as long as the button is
depressed.
2. To angle the panorama roof - press the
control rearward again to the point of resistance for manual opening
3. To open the panorama roof - press the
control rearward to the point of resistance
for manual opening a third time. The panorama roof moves towards maximum
opening as long as the button is kept
depressed.
108
Ventilation position, vertically at the rear edge.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Open by pressing the rear edge of the control upward.
Close by pulling the rear edge of the control down.
One long press on the lock button, see pages
47 (remote control key) and 56 (central locking
button), closes the panorama roof and all the
windows. The door mirrors are retracted* and
the doors and tailgate are locked. To interrupt
closing, press the lock button again.
WARNING
If closing the panorama roof with the remote
control key, make sure nothing could
become trapped.
03 Your driving environment
Power panorama roof*
Wind deflector
03
The panorama roof has a wind deflector that is
folded up when the panorama roof is in the
open position.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
109
03 Your driving environment
Alcolock*
General information on the alcolock
03
Functions
The alcolock's1 function is to prevent the car
from being driven by individuals under the
influence of alcohol. Before the engine can be
started the driver must take a breath test that
verifies that he/she is not under the influence
of alcohol. Alcolock calibration takes place in
accordance with each market's limit value in
force for driving legally.
Operation
Battery
Alcolock indicator lamp (4) shows battery status:
Indicator lamp
(4)
Battery status
Green flashing
Charging in progress
Green
Fully charged
Yellow
Semi-charged
Red
Discharged - fit the
charger in the holder
or connect the
power supply cable
from the glovebox.
WARNING
The Alcolock is an aid and does not exempt
the driver from responsibility. It is always the
responsibility of the driver to be sober and
to drive the car safely.
1. Nozzle for breath test.
2. Switch.
3. Transmission button.
4. Lamp for battery status.
5. Lamp for result of breath test.
6. Lamp indicates ready for breath test.
NOTE
Store the Alcolock in its holder. This will
keep the built-in battery fully charged and
the Alcolock is activated automatically
when the car is opened.
1
110
Also called Alcoguard.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Your driving environment
Alcolock*
Storage
unlocked then it must first be activated
with the switch (2).
Result after breath test
3. Fold up the nozzle (1), take a deep breath
and blow with an even pressure until a
"click" is heard after approx. 5 seconds.
The result will be one of the alternatives in
the following table Result after breath
test.
4. If no message is shown then the transmission to the car may have failed - in which
case, press the button (3) to transmit the
result to the car manually.
Handheld unit storage and charging station.
• The handheld alcolock unit is released by
depressing it slightly in its holder and
releasing it - it then springs out and can be
removed from the holder.
Indicator lamp
(5) + Display text
Specification
Green lamp + Alcoguard Approved
test
Start the engine - no
alcohol content
measured.
Yellow lamp + Alcoguard Approved
test
Engine starting possible - measured
alcohol content is
above 0.1 promille
but below the limit
value in forceA.
Red lamp + Disapproved test Wait 1
minute
Engine starting not
possible - measured
alcohol content is
above the limit value
in forceA.
5. Fold down the nozzle and refit the Alcolock
in its holder.
6. Start the engine following an approved
breath test within 5 minutes - otherwise it
must be repeated.
• Replace the handheld unit in the holder by
03
pushing it in until it engages.
• Store the handheld unit in the holder - this
provides it with the best protection and
keeps its batteries fully charged.
A
Limits vary between countries, so find out what limits apply.
See also the section entitled General information on the
Alcolock on page 110
NOTE
Before starting the engine
The Alcolock is activated automatically and is
then ready for use when the car is opened.
After a completed period of driving, the
engine can be restarted within 30 minutes
without a new breath test.
1. When the indicator lamp (6) is green the
Alcolock is ready for use.
2. Withdraw the Alcolock from its holder. If
the Alcolock is outside the car when it is
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
111
03 Your driving environment
Alcolock*
To bear in mind
Before the breath test
In order to obtain correct function and as accurate a measurement result as possible:
• Avoid eating or drinking approx.
5 minutes before the breath test.
03
• Avoid excess windscreen washing - the
alcohol in the washer fluid may result in an
incorrect measurement result.
Change of driver
In order to ensure that a new breath test is carried out in the event of a change of driver depress the switch (2) and the send button (3)
simultaneously for approx. 3 seconds. At
which point the car returns to start inhibition
mode and a new approved breath test is
required before starting the engine.
tion will then be possible, see page 112 section Emergency situation.
In extremely cold weather the heating time can
be reduced by taking the Alcolock indoors.
The message can be cleared by pressing the
send button (3) once. Otherwise it goes out on
its own after approx. 2 minutes but then reappears each time the engine is started - only
recalibration at a workshop2 can clear the message permanently.
Emergency situation
Cold or hot weather
The colder the weather the longer it takes
before the Alcolock is ready for use:
Temperature (ºC)
Maximum heating time (seconds)
+10 to +85
10
-5 to +10
60
-40 to -5
180
Calibration and service
The Alcolock must be checked and calibrated
at a workshop2 every 12 months.
30 days before recalibration is necessary the
display shows Alcoguard Calibr. required. If
calibration is not carried out within these 30
days then normal engine starting will be
blocked - only starting with the Bypass func-
2
112
At temperatures below -20 ºC or above
+60 ºC the Alcolock requires additional power
supply. The display shows Alcoguard insert
power cable. In which case, connect the
power supply cable from the glovebox and wait
until indicator lamp (6) is green.
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
In the event of an emergency situation or the
Alcolock is out of order, it is possible to bypass
the Alcolock in order to drive the car.
NOTE
All Bypass activation is logged and saved in
memory, see page 8 in the section, Recording data.
After the Bypass function has been activated
the display shows Alcoguard Bypass
enabled the whole time while driving and can
only be reset by a workshop2.
The Bypass function can be tested without the
error message being logged - in which case,
carry out all the steps without starting the car.
The error message is cleared when the car is
locked.
When the Alcolock is installed, either the
Bypass or Emergency function is selected as
the bypassing option. This setting can be
changed afterwards at a workshop2.
03 Your driving environment
Alcolock*
Activating the Bypass function
Symbols and display messages
• Depress and hold the left-hand stalk
Display text
Meaning/Action
In addition to the previously described messages, the combined instrument panel's display can also show the following:
Alcoguard Blow
harder
Blowing too weak blow harder.
Alcoguard wait
Preheating
Heating not finished
- wait for text Alcoguard Blow 5 seconds.
switch OK button and the button for hazard warning flashers simultaneously for
approx. 5 seconds - the display first shows
Bypass activated Wait 1 minute and
then Alcoguard Bypass enabled - after
which the engine can be started.
This function can be activated several times.
The error message shown during driving can
only be cleared at a workshop2.
Display text
Meaning/Action
Alcoguard Restart
possible
The engine has been
switched off for less
than 30 minutes engine starting possible without new
test.
Alcoguard Service
required
Contact a workshop2.
Alcoguard No signal
Transmission failed send manually with
button (3) or take a
new breath test.
Alcoguard Invalid
test
Test failed - take a
new breath test.
Alcoguard Blow
longer
Blowing too short blow for longer.
Alcoguard Blow
softer
Blowing too hard blow more gently.
Activating the Emergency function
• Depress and hold the left-hand stalk
switch OK button and the button for hazard warning flashers simultaneously for
approx. 5 seconds - the display shows
Alcoguard Bypass enabled and the
engine can be started.
This function can be used once, after which a
reset must be made at a workshop2.
2
03
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
113
03 Your driving environment
Starting the engine
Petrol and diesel engines
2. Hold the clutch pedal fully depressed1. (For
cars with automatic gearbox - Depress the
brake pedal.)
3. Press the START/STOP ENGINE button
and then release it.
The starter motor works until the engine starts
or until its overheating protection triggers.
03
IMPORTANT
Ignition switch with remote control key extracted/
inserted. and START/STOP ENGINE button.
If the engine fails to start after 3 attempts wait for 3 minutes before making a further
attempt. Starting capacity increases if the
battery is allowed to recover.
1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition
switch and press it in to its end position.
Note that if the car is equipped with an
alcolock then a breath test must first be
approved before the engine can be started
- see page 110.
Keyless drive*
Follow steps 2–3 for starting petrol and diesel
engines. For more information on Keyless drive
- see page 53.
NOTE
WARNING
IMPORTANT
Do not press in the remote control key incorrectly turned - Hold the end with the detachable key blade, see page 50.
NOTE
The idling speed can be noticeably higher
than normal for certain engine types during
cold starting. This is so that the emissions
system can reach normal operating temperature as quickly as possible, which minimises exhaust emissions and protects the
environment.
Never remove the remote control key from
the ignition switch after starting the engine
or when the car is being towed.
WARNING
Always remove the remote control key from
the ignition switch when leaving the car, and
make sure that the key position is 0 - in particular if there are children in the car. For
information on how this works - see
page 79.
A prerequisite for the car to start is that one
of the car's remote control keys with the
Keyless drive* function is in the passenger
compartment or cargo area.
WARNING
Never remove the remote control key from
the car while driving or during towing.
Stop the engine
To switch off the engine:
• Press START/STOP ENGINE - the engine
stops.
1
114
If the car is moving then it is enough to press the START/STOP ENGINE button to start the car.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Your driving environment
Starting the engine
If the gear selector is not in P position or if the
car is moving:
• Press twice on START/STOP ENGINE or
hold the button depressed until the engine
stops.
Steering lock
A mechanical noise can be perceived when the
steering lock unlocks or locks.
• The steering lock unlocks when the remote
control key is in the ignition switch2 and the
START/STOP ENGINE button is
depressed.
• The steering lock locks when the driver's
door is opened after the engine has been
switched off.
Key positions
For information on the remote control key's different key positions - see page 78
Remote start - ERS*
WARNING
General information on ERS
Remote start (ERS – Engine Remote Start)
means that the car's engine can be started
remotely using the remote control key. This is
so that the passenger compartment can be
warmed up/cooled down before departure.
The climate control starts with the same settings that were being used when the car was
parked.
To remote-start the engine, the following
criteria must be met:
•
•
•
The car must be supervised
There must be no people or animals
inside the car
03
The car must not be parked in a closed,
unventilated area - the exhaust gases
may seriously injure humans and animals.
An ERS-started engine is activated for a maximum of 15 minutes, then it is switched off. After
two ERS-activations the engine must be
started in the normal way before ERS can be
re-used.
The ERS option is only available on cars with
automatic gearbox.
NOTE
Follow local/national rules/regulations on
idling.
2
Cars with Keyless drive must have a remote control key inside the passenger compartment.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
115
03 Your driving environment
Starting the engine
Operation
1. Briefly press on the remote control key's
lock button (1).
2. Follow this immediately afterwards with a
long press - at least 2 seconds - on
button (2).
03
Remote control buttons for remote start.
Information3
Remote starting the engine
Maximum distance for enabling remote starting of the engine is approx. 30 metres in unobstructed space - in addition, the car must be
locked.
To remote start the engine:
3
4
5
116
Only on PCC key, see page 49.
Read about the PCC key on page 49.
Read about Approach lighting on page 48 and 94.
Active functions
If the conditions for ERS are fulfilled then the
following takes place:
The following functions are activated with a
remote started engine:
1. All direction indicators flash quickly several
times.
• Ventilation system
• Audio/video system.
2. The engine starts.
Deactivated functions
3. All direction indicators illuminate with a
constant glow for 3 seconds to verify that
the engine has started.
The following functions are deactivated with a
remote started engine:
Locking
Approach lighting
To check whether ERS has started the engine,
the user can press the Information button (3) if the engine has started, there is a light indication on the button for Approach lighting (2).
NOTE
After remote starting, the car continues to
be locked but with the alarm deactivated.
With PCC4 key
The light indication for Approach
lighting5 flashes several times when
the button is pressed and then goes
to constant glow if all criteria for ERS
have been fulfilled. However, this does not
mean that ERS has started the engine.
•
•
•
•
headlamps
Position lamps
Number plate lighting
Windscreen wiper.
the engine is switched off
The following steps switch off an ERS-started
engine:
• The remote control key's lock button (1) is
depressed
• The car is unlocked
• A door is opened
03 Your driving environment
Starting the engine
• Accelerator pedal or brake pedal is
depressed
• The gear selector is moved out of P position
Message
Specification
Message
Specification
No remote start
low battery
ERS unavailable due
to low battery voltage. Charge the battery by starting the
engine.
No remote start
low fuel level
ERS unavailable
because fuel level
too low.
No remote start
Max 2 starts
ERS unavailable
because a maximum
of 2 ERS activations
in succession are
allowed.
• There is less than approx.10 litres left in the
fuel tank
• Active ERS time passes 15 minutes.
No remote start
driver in car
ERS unavailable
because someone
was in the passenger compartment.
In situations where the ERS function fails or is
interrupted, a symbol is shown on the instrument panel, supplemented by an explanatory
message - Follow any recommendation given.
No remote start
engine warning
ERS unavailable due
to warning message
from engine. Contact a workshopA.
ERS function unavailable
No remote start
gear not in P
When an ERS-started engine is switched off,
all direction indicators illuminate with a constant glow for 3 seconds.
Symbols and messages in the display
Message
Specification
No remote start
door open
ERS unavailable
because a door/tailgate was not closed.
No remote start
car not locked
ERS unavailable
because the car was
not locked.
No remote start
engine coolant
ERS unavailable
because gear selector was not in P position.
ERS unavailable due
to error message
from cooling system, see page 336.
A
03
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Interrupted ERS function
Message
Specification
Remote start off
low battery
ERS interrupted
because battery
voltage too low.
Remote start off
low fuel level
ERS interrupted
because fuel level
too low.
Remote start off
engine warning
ERS interrupted due
to error message
from engine. Contact a workshopA.
``
117
03 Your driving environment
Starting the engine
03
A
118
Message
Specification
Remote start off
gear not in P
ERS interrupted
because gear selector is not in P position.
Remote start off
driver in car
ERS interrupted
because someone is
in the passenger
compartment.
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
03 Your driving environment
Starting the engine – external battery
Jump starting
4. Connect one of the red jump lead's clamps
to the donor battery's positive terminal (1).
IMPORTANT
Connect the start cable carefully to avoid
short circuits with other components in the
engine compartment.
5. Open the clips on the front cover of the
battery in your car and remove the cover,
see page 349.
IMPORTANT
Do not touch the crocodile clips during the
start procedure. There is a risk of sparks
forming.
12. Remove the jump leads in reverse order first the black and then the red.
> Make sure that none of the black jump
lead's clamps comes into contact with
the battery's positive terminal or the
clamp connected to the red jump lead!
6. Connect the red jump lead's other clamp
onto the car's positive terminal (2).
If the battery is flat then the car can be started
with current from another battery.
When jump starting the car, the following steps
are recommended to avoid short circuits or
other damage:
1. Insert the remote control key in key position 0, see page 78.
7. Connect one of the black jump lead's
clamps to the donor battery's negative terminal (3).
8. Connect the other clamp to a grounding
point, e.g. right-hand engine mounting at
the top, the outer screw head (4).
2. Check that the donor battery has a voltage
of 12 V.
9. Check that the jump lead clamps are
affixed securely so that there are no sparks
during the starting procedure.
3. If the donor battery is installed in another
car - switch off the donor car's engine and
make sure that the two cars do not touch
each other.
10. Start the engine of the "donor car" and
allow it to run a few minutes at a speed
slightly higher than idle approx. 1500 rpm.
11. Start the engine in the car with the discharged battery.
03
WARNING
•
The battery can generate oxyhydrogen
gas, which is highly explosive. A spark
can be formed if a jump lead is connected incorrectly, and this can be
enough for the battery to explode.
•
The battery contains sulphuric acid,
which can cause serious burns.
•
If sulphuric acid comes into contact
with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with
large quantities of water. If acid
splashes into the eyes - seek medical
attention immediately.
For more information on the car's battery - see
page 348.
119
03 Your driving environment
Gearboxes
Gear indicator1
IMPORTANT
The operating temperature of the gearbox is
checked in order to prevent damage to any
of the drive system's components. In the
event of a risk of overheating a warning
symbol illuminates on the instrument panel
combined with a text message - In which
case, follow the recommendation given.
03
Manual gearbox
Gearshift pattern 6-speed gearbox.
The 6-speed box is available in two versions reverse gear position differs between them.
Look at the actual gearshift pattern imprinted
on the gear lever.
• Depress the clutch pedal fully during each
gear change.
• Take your foot off the clutch pedal between
gear changes.
Gearshift pattern 5-speed gearbox.
WARNING
Always apply the parking brake when parking on a slope - leaving the car in gear is not
sufficient to hold the car in all situation.
1
120
Only manual gearbox for the D2 model.
An essential detail in connection with environmental driving is to drive in the right gear and
change gear in time.
The driver is assisted by an indicator - GSI
(Gear Shift Indicator) - which notifies the driver
when it is most advantageous to engage the
next higher or lower gear in order to obtain the
lowest possible fuel consumption. However,
taking into consideration characteristics such
as performance and vibration-free running, it
may be advantageous to change gear at a
higher engine speed.
Indication is made with an up or down arrow in
the combined instrument panel's right-hand
display.
03 Your driving environment
Gearboxes
Reverse gear inhibitor
NOTE
The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possibility of mistakenly attempting to engage reverse
gear during normal forward travel.
The gear selector must be in P position to
allow the car to be locked and alarmed.
• Follow the gearing pattern printed on the
IMPORTANT
gear lever and start from neutral position,
N before moving it to R position.
The car must be stationary when position
P is selected.
• Only engage reverse gear when the car is
03
stationary.
WARNING
NOTE
With the upper variant of the shifting pattern
for 6-speed gearbox (see previous illustration) - first press down the gear lever in the
N position in order to engage reverse gear.
Automatic gearbox Geartronic*
D: Automatic gear positions. +/–: Manual gear
positions.
The information display shows the position of
the gear selector using the following indications: P, R, N, D, S, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6, see
page 71.
Gear positions
Always apply the parking brake when parking on a slope - the automatic transmission's P position is not sufficient to hold the
car in all situation.
Reverse position - R
The car must be stationary when R position is
selected.
Neutral position - N
Parking position - P
Select P when starting the engine or when the
car is parked. The brake pedal must be
depressed to disengage the gear selector from
the P position.
The gearbox is mechanically blocked when the
P position is engaged. Apply the parking brake
as well, as a precaution - see page 137.
No gear is engaged and the engine can be
started. Apply the parking brake if the car is
stationary with the gear selector in N position.
Drive position - D
D is the normal driving position. Shifting up and
down takes place automatically based on the
level of acceleration and speed. The car must
be stationary when the gear selector is moved
to D position from R position.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
121
03 Your driving environment
Gearboxes
Geartronic – Manual gear positions (+/-)
The driver can also change gear manually
using the Geartronic automatic gearbox. The
car engine-brakes when the accelerator pedal
is released.
03
Manual gearshift mode is obtained by moving
the lever to the side from D position to the end
position at +/–. The information display shifts
the indication from D to one of the figures 1 –
6, which is equivalent to the gear that is
engaged just then, see page 71.
• Move the lever forwards towards + (plus)
to change up a gear and release the lever,
which returns to its rest position between
+ and –.
or
• Pull the lever back towards – (minus) to
change down a gear and release it.
The manual gearshift mode (+/–) can be
selected at any time while driving.
Geartronic automatically shifts down if the
driver allows the speed to decrease lower than
a level suitable for the selected gear, in order
to avoid jerking and stalling.
To return to automatic driving mode:
• Move the lever to the side to the end position at D.
2
122
Only models D5 and T6.
NOTE
f the gearbox has a Sport programme then
the gearbox will only become manual after
the lever has been moved forwards or backwards in its (-+/–) position. The information
display then shifts the indication from S to
show which of the gears 1-6 is engaged.
Geartronic - Sport mode (S)2
The Sport programme provides sportier characteristics and allows higher engine speed for
the gears. At the same time it responds more
quickly to acceleration. During active driving,
the use of a lower gear is prioritised, leading to
a delayed upshift.
Sport mode is obtained by moving the lever to
the side from D position to the end position at
+/–. The information display shifts the indication from D to S.
Sport mode can be selected at any time while
driving.
Geartronic - Winter mode
It can be easier to pull away on slippery roads
if 3rd gear is engaged manually.
1. Depress the brake pedal and move the
gear lever from D position to the end posi-
tion at +/– - the instrument panel display
shifts the indication from D to the figure 1.
2. Scroll up to gear 3 by pushing the lever
forward towards + (plus) twice - the display
shifts the indication from 1 to 3.
3. Release the brake and accelerate carefully.
The gearbox "winter mode" means that the car
moves off with a lower engine speed and
reduced engine power on the drive wheels.
Kick-down
When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the
way to the floor (beyond the position normally
regarded as full acceleration) a lower gear is
immediately engaged. This is known as kickdown.
If the accelerator is released from the kickdown position, the gearbox automatically
changes up.
Kick-down is used when maximum acceleration is needed, such as for overtaking.
Safety function
To prevent overrevving the engine, the gearbox
control program has a protective downshift
inhibitor which prevents the kick-down function.
03 Your driving environment
Gearboxes
Geartronic does not permit downshifting/kickdown which would result in an engine speed
high enough to damage the engine. Nothing
happens if the driver still tries to shift down in
this way at high engine speed – the original
gear remains engaged.
When kick-down is activated the car can
change one or more gears at a time depending
on engine speed. The car changes up when the
engine reaches its maximum speed in order to
prevent damage to the engine.
With the inhibitor button depressed the lever
can be moved forwards or backwards between
P, R, N and D.
Deactivate automatic gear selector
inhibitor
Automatic gear selector inhibitor
The automatic gearbox has special safety systems:
03
Parking position (P)
Stationary car with engine running:
Keep your foot on the brake pedal when moving the gear selector to another position.
Electric gear inhibitor – Shiftlock Parking
position (P)
Mechanical gear selector inhibitor
To be able to move the gear selector from P to
other gear positions, the brake pedal must be
depressed and the remote control key must be
in position II, see page 78.
G021351
Shiftlock – Neutral (N)
The gear selector can be moved forward and
back freely between N and D. Other positions
are locked with a latch that is released with the
inhibitor button on the gear selector.
If the gear selector is in N position and the car
has been stationary for at least 3 seconds (irrespective of whether the engine is running) then
the gear selector is locked.
To be able to move the gear selector from N to
other gear positions, the brake pedal must be
depressed and the remote control key must be
in position II, see page 78.
If the car cannot be driven, e.g. due to a flat
battery, the gear selector must be moved from
the P position so that the car can be moved.
Lift the rubber mat in the compartment
behind the centre console and open the
hatch.
Fully insert the key blade. Press the key
blade down and hold (For information on
the key blade, see page 50.)
Move the gear selector from the P position.
``
123
03 Your driving environment
Gearboxes
Automatic gearbox Powershift*
03
sion, this can be verified by checking the designation on the transmission's label under the
bonnet - see page 372. The designation ”MPS6” means that it is Powershift – transmission otherwise it is Geartronic automatic
transmission.
HSA
The HSA (Hill Start Assist) function means that
the pressure in the brake system remains for
several seconds while the foot is moved from
the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal before
setting off or reversing uphill.
D: Automatic gear positions. +/–: Manual gear
positions.
Powershift is a 6-stage automatic gearbox that
has double mechanical clutch discs in contrast
to a conventional automatic gearbox. A conventional automatic gearbox has a hydraulic
torque converter instead that transfers power
from engine to gearbox.
Powershift transmission operates in the same
way and has similar controls and functions as
the Geartronic automatic transmission, described in the previous section.
Powershift or Geartronic?
In the event of uncertainty as to whether or not
the car is equipped with Powershift transmis-
124
The temporary braking effect releases after
several seconds or when the driver accelerates.
To bear in mind
The transmission's double clutch has overload
protection that is activated if it becomes too
hot, e.g. if the car is held stationary with the
accelerator pedal on an uphill gradient for a
long time.
Overheated transmission causes the car to
shake and vibrate, and the warning symbol illuminates and the information display shows a
message. The transmission can also overheat
during slow driving in queues (10 km/h or
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
slower) on an uphill gradient, or with a trailer
hitched. The transmission cools down when
the car is stationary, with foot brake depressed
and the engine running at idling speed.
Overheating during slow driving in queues can
be avoided by driving in stages: Stop the car
and wait with your foot on the brake pedal until
there is a moderate distance to the traffic
ahead, drive forward a short distance, and then
wait another moment with your foot on the
brake pedal.
IMPORTANT
Use the foot brake to hold the car stationary
on an uphill gradient - do not hold the car
with the accelerator pedal. The gearbox
could then overheat.
For important information regarding Powershift
transmission and towing - see page 311.
Text message and action
In some situations the display may show a
message at the same time as a symbol is illuminated.
03 Your driving environment
Gearboxes
Symbol
Display
Driving characteristics
Action
Transm. overheat brake to hold
Difficulty in maintaining even speed at constant engine speed.
Transmission overheated. Keep the car
stationary using the foot brake.A
Transm. overheat park safely
Significant pulling in the car's traction.
Transmission overheated. Park the car
immediately in a safe manner.A
Transm. cooling let engine run
A
No drive due to overheated gearbox.
03
Transmission overheated. For fastest cooling: Run the engine at idling speed with the
gear lever in the N or P position until the
message clears.
For fastest cooling: run the engine at idling speed with the gear lever in the N or P position, until the message clears.
The table shows three steps with an increased
degree of seriousness should the transmission
become too hot. In parallel with the display text
the driver is also advised that the car's electronics are temporarily changing the driving
characteristics. Follow the instructions on the
information display where appropriate.
NOTE
The table's examples are no indication that
the car is defective but instead show that a
safety function has been activated intentionally to prevent damage to one of the
car's components.
WARNING
If a warning symbol combined with the text
Transm. overheat park safely is ignored
then the heat in the gearbox may become
so high that the power transmission
between engine and gearbox is temporarily
halted in order to prevent the clutch from
malfunctioning - the car then loses drive and
is stationary until gearbox temperature has
cooled to an acceptable level.
For more possible display messages with their
respective proposals for solutions concerning
automatic transmission, see page 198.
A display text clears automatically after the
action has been carried out or after one press
on the indicator stalk OK button.
125
03 Your driving environment
DRIVe Start/Stop*
Quieter and cleaner
General information on Start/Stop
Function and operation
03
Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Corporation's core values and it influences all of our
operations. This target-orientation has resulted
in the DRIVe vehicle series whose concept
consists of an interaction between several separate energy-saving functions, all with the
common purpose of reducing fuel consumption, which in turn contributes to reduced
exhaust emissions.
The engine is switched off - it becomes quieter and
cleaner....
Some engine and gearbox combinations come
fitted with a Start and Stop function which
engages in the event of e.g. stationary traffic or
waiting at traffic lights - the engine is then
switched off temporarily and restarts automatically when the journey is due to continue.
The Start/Stop function gives the driver the
opportunity for a more active environmentally
conscious way of driving the car by means of
being able to allow the engine to stop automatically, whenever appropriate.
Start/Stop On/Off.
Illuminates briefly on activation and for text
messages.
The engine is auto-stopped.
The Start/Stop function is activated
automatically when the engine is
started with the key. The driver is alerted to the
function by means of this symbol on the instrument panel illuminating briefly, the display text
Auto Start-Stop ON is shown and the green
lamp for the On/Off button illuminates.
All of the car's normal systems such as lighting,
radio, etc. work as normal even with an engine
that has stopped automatically, except that
some equipment may have the function temporarily reduced, e.g. the climate control sys-
126
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Your driving environment
DRIVe Start/Stop*
tem's fan speed or extremely high volume on
the audio system.
ConditionsA
Auto-stopping the engine
The following is required for the engine to autostop:
ConditionsA
A
B
M/AB
Declutch, set the gear lever in
neutral position and release the
clutch pedal - the engine is
switched off.
M
Stop the car with the foot brake
and then keep your foot on the
pedal - the engine stops automatically.
A
M/AB
With the gear lever in neutral position: Depress the clutch pedal or
press the accelerator pedal - the
engine starts. Engage a suitable
gear and continue the journey.
M
The following option is also available on a downhill gradient:
M
Release the foot pressure on the
foot brake - the engine starts
automatically and the journey can
continue.
A
B
03
The Start/Stop function is disengaged until it is
reactivated with the button or until the next
time the engine is started with the key.
Release the foot brake and let the
car move off - the engine starts
automatically when the speed
exceeds normal walking pace.
The XC60 only has Start/Stop on manual gearbox.
M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.
The AUTO START symbol on
the information display illuminates as verification and
reminder that the engine is
has stopped automatically.
Disengaged Start/Stop function is indicated by the information display's symbol
going out and the message
Auto Start-Stop OFF being
displayed for
about 5 seconds - while the
button's lamp goes out at the
same time.
Auto-starting the engine
Limitations
The engine does not auto-stop
A
Even if the Start/Stop function is activated, the
engine does not stop automatically if:
The XC60 only has Start/Stop on manual gearbox.
M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.
Deactivating the Start/Stop function
In certain situations, it may
advisable to temporarily
switch off the automatic
Start/Stop function - this is
carried out by pressing this
button once, at which point
the button's lamp goes out.
ConditionsA
M/AB
the car has not achieved
approx. 5 km/h (= fast walking
pace) first after a key start or the
last auto-stop.
M+A
the driver has opened the seatbelt's buckle.
M+A
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
127
03 Your driving environment
DRIVe Start/Stop*
03
M/AB
ConditionsA
M/AB
the capacity of the battery is
below the minimum permissible
level.
M+A
M+A
the engine does not have normal
operating temperature.
M+A
the exhaust system's particulate
filter is full - the temporarily disengaged Start/Stop function is
reactivated once an automatic
cleaning cycle has been performed (see page 298).
outside temperature is below
freezing point or above
approx. 30 °C.
M+A
the road is very steep.
M+A
ConditionsA
M/AB
M+A
Misting forms on the windows.
M+A
the environment in the passenger
compartment differs from the
preset values - indicated by the
ventilation fan running at a high
speed.
M+A
a trailer is connected electrically
to the car’s electrical system.
A
The environment in the passenger compartment deviates from
the preset values.
M+A
M+A
The outside temperature falls
below freezing point or exceeds
approx. 30 °C.
M+A
the car is reversed.
the atmospheric air pressure is
less than equivalent to 1500-2000
metres above sea level - the current air pressure varies with the
prevailing weather conditions.
battery temperature is below
freezing point or above
approx. 55 °C.
M+A
adaptive cruise control Queue
Assist is activated.
A
M+A
A
the driver makes greater steering
wheel movements.
M+A
the driver’s door has been
opened with the gear selector in
D position.
There is a temporarily high current take-off or battery capacity
drops below the lowest permissible level.
A
Repeated pumping of the brake
pedal.
M+A
the gear selector is moved out of
the D position to S positionC or
"+/-".
The car starts to roll - faster than
the equivalent normal walking
pace.
M
A
B
C
128
The engine auto-starts
ConditionsA
The XC60 only has Start/Stop on manual gearbox.
M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.
Sport mode.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
An engine that has stopped automatically may
restart in some cases without the driver having
decided that the journey should continue. In
the following cases the engine also starts automatically if the driver has not depressed the
clutch pedal:
03 Your driving environment
DRIVe Start/Stop*
ConditionsA
A
B
M/AB
The driver's belt lock is opened
with the gear selector in D or N
position.
A
Steering wheel movements.
A
The gear selector is moved from
the D position to "+/-" or R.
A
The driver's door is opened with
the gear selector in D position - a
"ping" sound and text message
inform that the Start/Stop function is active.
A
The XC60 only has Start/Stop on manual gearbox.
M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.
The engine does not auto-start
In the following cases the engine does not
auto-start after having auto-stopped:
1. Depress the clutch pedal again - the engine
starts automatically.
A gear is engaged without
declutching - a display text
prompts the driver to set the gear
lever in neutral position in order to
enable automatic starting.
M
2. In certain cases the gear lever must be set
in neutral position. The information display
then shows the text Put gear in neutral
The driver is unrestrained, the
gear selector is in P position and
the driver’s door is open - a normal engine start must take place.
A
The gear selector is moved to P
position - press the START/
STOP ENGINE button to restart
the engine.
A
More information and settings
If the driver's door is opened
before starting the engine with
the START/STOP ENGINE button, the Start/Stop function is
switched off.
WARNING
Do not open the bonnet when the engine
has stopped automatically - the engine may
suddenly start automatically. First switch off
the engine as normal using the START/
STOP ENGINE button before opening the
bonnet.
M/AB
ConditionsA
A
B
03
The MY CAR menu system in the car includes
instructions which explain parts of the DRIVe
concept along with several possible settings
and options - see page 201.
The XC60 only has Start/Stop on manual gearbox.
M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.
Involuntary engine stop with manual
gearbox
In the event that a start-up fails and the engine
stops, proceed as follows:
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
129
03 Your driving environment
DRIVe Start/Stop*
Text message
In combination with this indicator
lamp the Start/Stop function may dis-
Symbol
play text messages on the information display
for certain situations. For some of them there
is a recommended action that should be per-
formed. The following table shows some
examples.
MessageA
Info/Action
M/AB
Auto Start-Stop ON
Illuminates for about 5 seconds after Start/Stop has been
activated.
M+A
Auto Start-Stop OFF
Illuminates for about 5 seconds after Start/Stop has been
switched off.
M+A
Auto Start-Stop serv. required
Start/Stop is not operational. Contact a workshop - an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
M+A
Engine management system
An automatic function check is carried out.
M+A
Engine in Auto Start
The engine is ready to start automatically - waiting for the
brake or clutch pedal to be depressed.
M
Press Start button
The engine will not start automatically - start the engine as
normal with the START/STOP ENGINE button.
M
Depress clutch pedal to start
The engine is ready to auto-start - waiting for the clutch pedal
to be depressed.
M
Depress the foot brake to start
The engine is ready to auto-start - waiting for the brake pedal
to be depressed.
M
Press brake and clutch to start
The engine is ready to auto-start - waiting for the brake or
clutch pedal to be depressed.
M
03
AUTOSTOP
130
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Your driving environment
DRIVe Start/Stop*
Symbol
AUTOSTOP
A
B
MessageA
Info/Action
M/AB
Put gear in neutral
Gear is engaged without declutching - disengage and set the
gear lever in neutral position.
M
Engine in Auto Start
The engine is ready to start automatically - waiting for the
brake pedal to be released.
A
Select P or N to start
Start/Stop has been deactivated - move the gear selector to
N or P position and start the engine as normal with the
START/STOP ENGINE button.
A
Press Start button
The engine will not start automatically - start the engine as
normal with the START/STOP ENGINE button and the gear
selector in P or N.
A
03
The XC60 only has Start/Stop on manual gearbox.
M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.
If a message does not go out following completion of the action then a workshop should
be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop
is recommended.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
131
03 Your driving environment
All-wheel drive – AWD*
All Wheel Drive is always available
03
All Wheel Drive means that the car is driving all
four wheels at the same time.
The power is automatically distributed
between the front and rear wheels. An electronically controlled clutch system distributes
the power to the wheels that have the best grip
on the current road surface. This provides the
best traction and prevents wheel spin. Under
normal driving conditions, the majority of
power is transmitted to the front wheels.
All Wheel Drive improves driving safety in rain,
snow and icy conditions.
132
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Your driving environment
Foot brake
General
The car is equipped with two brake circuits. If
one brake circuit is damaged then this will
mean that the brakes engage at a deeper level
and harder pressure on the pedal is needed to
produce the normal braking effect.
The driver's brake pedal pressure is assisted
by a brake servo.
WARNING
The brake servo only works when the engine
is running.
If the brake is used when the engine is switched
off then the pedal will feel stiff and more force
must be used to brake the car.
In very hilly terrain or when driving with a heavy
load the brakes can be relieved by using engine
braking. Engine braking is most efficiently used
if the same gear is used downhill as up.
For more general information on heavy loads
on the car, see page 378.
Anti-lock braking system
The car is equipped with ABS (Anti-lock
Braking System) which prevents the wheels
from locking during braking. This means the
ability to steer is maintained and it is easier to
swerve to avoid a hazard for example. Vibration
may be felt in the brake pedal when this is
engaged and this is normal.
A short test of the ABS system is made automatically after the engine has been started
when the driver releases the brake pedal. A
further automatic test of the ABS system may
be made when the car reaches 10 km/h. The
test may be experienced as pulses in the brake
pedal.
Cleaning the brake discs
Coatings of dirt and water on the brake discs
may result in delayed brake function. This delay
is minimised by cleaning the brake linings.
Manual cleaning is advisable with wet road surfaces, prior to long-stay parking and after the
car has been washed. Carry this out by braking
gently during a short period while en route.
03
Emergency Brake Assistance
Emergency brake lights and automatic
hazard warning flashers
Emergency brake lights are activated to alert
vehicles behind about sudden braking. The
function means that the brake light flashes
instead of - as in normal braking - shining with
a constant glow.
Emergency brake lights are activated at
speeds above 50 km/h if the ABS system is
working and/or in the event of sudden braking.
After the car's speed has been slowed below
10 km/h the brake light returns from flashing to
the normal constant glow - while at the same
time the hazard warning flashers are activated,
and they flash until the driver changes engine
speed with the accelerator pedal or they are
deactivated with their button, see page 92.
Emergency Brake Assistance EBA (Emergency
Brake Assist) helps to increase brake force and
so reduce braking distance. EBA detects the
driver's braking style and increases brake force
as necessary. The brake force can be reinforced up to the level when the ABS system is
engaged. The EBA function is interrupted when
the pressure on the brake pedal is reduced.
NOTE
When EBA is activated the brake pedal lowers slightly more than usual, depress (hold)
the brake pedal as long as necessary. If the
brake pedal is released then all braking
ceases.
Maintenance
To keep the car as safe and reliable as possible, follow the Volvo service intervals as speci-
133
03 Your driving environment
Foot brake
fied in the Service and Warranty Booklet, see
page 332.
IMPORTANT
The wear on the brake system's components must be checked regularly.
03
Contact a workshop for information about
the procedure or engage a workshop to
carry out the inspection - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
Symbols in the combined instrument
panel
Symbol
Specification
Constant glow – Check the
brake fluid level. If the level is
low, fill with brake fluid and
check for the cause of the brake
fluid loss.
Constant glow for 2 seconds
when the engine is started –
There was a fault in the brake
system's ABS function when
the engine was last running.
134
WARNING
If
and
illuminate at the same
time, there may be a fault in the brake system.
If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is normal at this stage, drive carefully to the nearest workshop and have the brake system
checked - an authorised Volvo workshop is
recommended.
If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the
brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further
before topping up the brake fluid.
The reason for the loss of brake fluid must
be investigated.
03 Your driving environment
HDC Hill Descent Control
General
HDC can be compared to an automatic engine
brake. When you release the accelerator on
downhill gradients the car is normally braked
by means of the engine striving for low engine
idling speeds, so-called engine braking. But
the steeper the road and the more load there is
in the car, the faster the car rolls despite engine
braking. In order to then reduce speed the
driver has to assist using the footbrake.
WARNING
HDC does not work in all situations, but is
instead only intended to be supplementary
assistance.
The driver always has ultimate responsibility
that the car is driven safely.
NOTE
HDC cannot be activated in an automatic
gearbox with the gear selector in position
D.
03
Function
Operation
The function makes it possible to increase/
reduce speed on steep downhill gradients, with
a foot only on the accelerator pedal, without
using the footbrake. The sensitivity of the
accelerator pedal decreases and becomes
more precise by means of the full actuation of
the pedal being restricted to adjusting engine
speed within a limited range. The brake system
brakes itself and provides the car with a low
and even speed, so allowing the driver to fully
focus on steering.
HDC is particularly helpful on steep gradients
with an uneven road surface and slippery sections. E.g. when launching a boat on a trailer
from a ramp.
gear position 1 must be selected, which is
shown with the figure 1 in the trip computer
display, see page 122.
HDC allows the car to roll at a maximum of
10 km/h forwards with engine braking and
7 km/h backwards. However, any speed within
the gear's speed register can be selected using
the accelerator pedal. When the accelerator
pedal is released, the car is braked quickly to
10 or 7 km/h respectively, irrespective of the
hill's gradient and without the need for the footbrake.
HDC is engaged or disengaged using a switch
on the centre console. An indicator lamp in the
button illuminates when the function is
switched on. When HDC is operating the
symbol illuminates and the display
shows Hill descent control ON.
The brake lights come on automatically when
the function is operating. The driver can brake
or stop the car at any time by using the footbrake.
HDC is deactivated:
The function only operates in first gear position
and in reverse gear. For an automatic gearbox,
135
03 Your driving environment
HDC Hill Descent Control
• with the on/off button on the centre console
• if a gear higher than 1 is selected on a
manual gearbox
• if a gear higher than 1 is selected on an
03
automatic gearbox, or if the gear selector
is moved to position D.
The function can be disengaged at any time. If
it takes place on a steep downhill gradient then
the braking effect will not release directly, but
slowly instead.
NOTE
With HDC activated you may experience a
delay between acceleration pedal activation
and engine response.
136
03 Your driving environment
Parking brake
General
Applying the parking brake
the accelerator pedal is depressed the braking
is interrupted.
NOTE
In the event of emergency braking at speeds
above 10 km/h a signal sounds during the
braking procedure.
03
Parking on a hill
If the car is parked facing uphill:
• Turn the wheels away from the kerb.
Parking brake control - apply.
Function
A faint electric motor noise can be heard when
the electrical parking brake is being applied.
The noise can also be heard during the automatic function checking of the parking brake.
If the car is stationary when the parking brake
is applied then it only acts on the rear wheels.
If it is applied when the car is moving then the
normal foot brake is used, i.e. the brake acts
on all four wheels. Brake function changes over
to the rear wheels when the car is almost stationary.
Low battery voltage
If the battery voltage is too low then the parking
brake can neither be released nor applied.
Connect a donor battery if the battery voltage
is too low, see page 119.
1. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.
2. Press the control.
> The combined instrument panel symbol
starts flashing - once there is a
constant glow it is applied.
If the car is parked facing downhill:
• Turn the wheels towards the kerb.
WARNING
Always apply the parking brake when parking on a slope - leaving the car in gear, or in
P if it has automatic transmission, is not sufficient to hold the car in all situation.
3. Release the foot brake pedal and make
sure that the car is at a standstill position.
• When parking the vehicle, always engage
1st gear (for manual gearbox) or put the
gear selector in position P (for automatic
gearbox).
In an emergency the parking brake can be
applied when the vehicle is moving by depressing the control. When the control is released or
137
03 Your driving environment
Parking brake
Disengaging the parking brake
NOTE
The parking brake can also be released
manually by depressing the clutch pedal
instead of the brake pedal. Volvo recommends the use of the brake pedal.
03
Releasing automatically
1. Start the engine.
2. Engage 1st gear or reverse gear.
Parking brake control - release.
Cars with manual gearbox
Releasing manually
1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition
switch.1
Cars with automatic gearbox
2. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.
1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition
switch1.
3. Pull the control.
> The parking brake releases and the
combined instrument panel symbol
goes out.
1
138
3. Ease up the clutch and depress the accelerator.
> The parking brake releases and the
combined instrument panel symbol
goes out.
For a car with the Keyless system: Press START/STOP ENGINE.
Releasing manually
2. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.
3. Pull the control.
> The parking brake releases and the
combined instrument panel symbol
goes out.
Releasing automatically
1. Put the seatbelt on.
2. Start the engine.
3. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.
4. Move the gear selector to position D or R
and depress the accelerator.
> The parking brake releases and the
combined instrument panel symbol
goes out.
NOTE
For safety reasons, the parking brake is only
released automatically if the engine is running and the driver is wearing a seatbelt. The
parking brake is released immediately on
cars with automatic gearbox when the
accelerator pedal is depressed and the gear
selector is in position D or R.
Heavy load uphill
A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the
car to roll backward when the parking brake is
released automatically on a steep incline.
Avoid this by depressing the control while driving off. Release the control when the engine
achieves traction.
03 Your driving environment
Parking brake
Replacing the brake linings
The rear brake linings must be replaced at a
workshop due to the design of the electric
parking brake - an authorised Volvo workshop
is recommended.
Symbols and messages in the display
Symbol
Message
Meaning/Action
"Message"
Read the message on the information display.
03
A flashing symbol indicates that the parking brake is applied.
If the symbol flashes in any other situation then this means that a fault has arisen. Read the message
on the information display.
Park brake not fully
released
A fault is preventing the parking brake from being released - Try to apply and release the brake.
If the fault persists after a few attempts: Visit a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Note: A warning signal sounds if the journey is continued with this error message.
``
139
03 Your driving environment
Parking brake
Symbol
Message
Meaning/Action
Parking brake not applied
A fault is preventing the parking brake from being applied - Try to release and apply the brake.
If the fault persists after a few attempts: Visit a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
The message is also illuminated on cars with manual gearbox when the car is driven at low speed
with the door open in order to alert the driver that the parking brake may have been unintentionally
disengaged.
03
Parking brake Service
required
• If the car has to be parked before the fault
has been rectified then the wheels must be
turned as if parking on a hill and 1st gear
engaged (manual gearbox) or the gear
selector must be in position P (automatic
gearbox).
140
A fault has arisen - Try to apply and release the brake.
If the fault persists after a few attempts: Visit a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
03 Your driving environment
HomeLinkŸ *
General
•
HomeLinkŸ1 is a programmable remote control
which can remotely control up to three different
devices (e.g. garage door opener, alarm system, outdoor lighting and indoor lighting etc.)
and in doing so replace their remote controls.
For more information on HomeLinkŸ, visit:
www.homelink.com or ring
00 8000 466 354 65 (or premium rate phone
number, +49 6838 907 277).
1
Programming HomeLinkŸ
WARNING
If HomeLinkŸ is used to operate a
garage door or gate, make sure that
there is no-one in the vicinity of the door
or gate while it is moving.
•
The car should remain outside the
garage while a garage door opener is
being programmed.
•
Do not use HomeLinkŸ for any garage
door that does not have safety stop and
safety reverse.
Save the original remote controls for future
programming (e.g. when changing to another
car or for use in another vehicle). It is also recommended that the programming for the buttons is deleted when the car is sold. See the
section "Resetting the HomeLink® buttons" on
page 142.
NOTE
In certain vehicles the ignition must be
switched on or in "accessory position"
before HomeLinkŸ can be programmed or
used. If possible, fit new batteries in the
remote control that shall be replaced by
HomeLinkŸ for faster programming and
improved transmission of the radio signal.
The HomeLinkŸ buttons should be reset
before programming. When this has been
done HomeLinkŸ is set in "learn mode" and
ready for programming.
03
1. Aim the original remote control towards the
HomeLinkŸ button to be programmed and
hold it 5-14 cm from the button. Do not
obstruct the indicator lamp on
HomeLinkŸ.
2. Depress the button on the original remote
control and the button to be programmed
on HomeLinkŸ simultaneously. Do not
release the buttons until the indicator lamp
has changed over from slow to rapid flashing. Both the buttons must be released
when the indicator lamp flashes quickly.
HomeLink and the HomeLink house symbol are registered trademarks of Johnson Controls, Inc.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
141
03 Your driving environment
HomeLinkŸ *
03
3. Depress the HomeLinkŸ button being
programmed, hold it depressed for
5 seconds and then release it. Repeat if
necessary until the garage door is activated. If the door is not activated, press the
programmed HomeLinkŸ button and hold
it depressed and check the indicator lamp.
> Constant glow: The indicator lamp illuminates with a constant glow when the
button is kept depressed, this indicates
that the programming is complete.
The garage door, gate or similar should
now be activated when the programmed HomeLinkŸ button is
depressed.
Glow not constant: The indicator lamp
flashes quickly for approx. 2 seconds
and then changes over to a constant
glow. In which case, continue with the
programming steps 4-6 in order to complete the programming of a device with
rolling code (usually a garage door
opener).
4. Locate the "programming button2" on the
receiver for the garage door for example,
normally located close to the antenna's
bracket on the receiver.
2
142
5. Depress and release the receiver's "programming button". The button flashes for
approx. 30 seconds and the next step must
be carried out within this period.
6. While the receiver's "programming button"
is still flashing, press the button on
HomeLinkŸ being programmed and hold it
depressed for approx. 2 seconds and then
release it. Repeat the press/hold/release
sequence up to 3 times to conclude the
programming.
Operation
When HomeLinkŸ is fully programmed it can be
used in place of the separate original remote
controls.
Press the programmed button and hold it
depressed until the garage door, alarm system,
etc. is activated (may take several seconds).
Naturally the original remote controls can still
be used in parallel with HomeLinkŸ if required.
NOTE
If the ignition is switched off, HomeLinkŸ will
work for 30 minutes after the driver's door
has been opened.
Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
If programming problems persist, contact
HomeLinkŸ on: www.homelink.com or ring
00 8000 466 354 65 (or premium rate phone
number +49 6838 907 277).
Resetting the HomeLinkŸ buttons
It is only possible to reset all of the
HomeLinkŸ buttons at the same time, not each
button individually. However, individual buttons can be reprogrammed, see the following
section "Programming individual buttons".
1. Depress the two outer buttons on
HomeLinkŸ and do not release until the
indicator lamp starts to flash.
2. Release the buttons.
> HomeLinkŸ is now set in so-called
"learn mode" and is ready to be reprogrammed, see section "Programming
HomeLink®" on page 141.
03 Your driving environment
HomeLinkŸ *
Programming individual buttons
To reprogram an individual HomeLinkŸ button,
proceed as follows:
1. Depress the required button and do not
release.
2. When the indicator lamp on HomeLinkŸ
starts to flash, after approx. 20 seconds,
start with step 1 in section "Programming
HomeLink®" on page 141.
03
For more information or to leave comments
about HomeLinkŸ, visit: www.homelink.com or
ring 00 8000 466 354 65 (or premium rate
phone number +49 6838 907 277).
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
143
144
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
146
148
150
152
162
165
170
178
179
182
185
188
191
G000000
DSTC – Stability and traction control system.......................................
Road sign information - RSI*................................................................
Cruise control*......................................................................................
Adaptive cruise control*........................................................................
Distance Warning*.................................................................................
City Safety™.........................................................................................
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Protection*...............
Driver Alert System*..............................................................................
Driver Alert System - DAC*...................................................................
Driver Alert System - LDW*...................................................................
Park assist syst*....................................................................................
Park assist camera*..............................................................................
BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System................................................
DRIVER SUPPORT
04 Driver support
DSTC – Stability and traction control system
General information on DSTC
The stability and traction control system, DSTC
(Dynamic Stability & Traction Control) helps the
driver to avoid skidding and improves the car's
traction.
The activation of the system during braking
may be noticed as a throbbing sound. The car
may accelerate slower than expected when the
accelerator pedal is depressed.
04
engine braking when driving in low gears on
slippery road surfaces.
skidding with the rear section up to a certain
level before it intervenes and stabilises the car.
Involuntary wheel locking while driving can,
amongst other things, impair the driver's ability
to steer the car.
If the driver stops a controlled skid by releasing
the accelerator pedal then the DSTC system
intervenes and stabilises the car.
Trailer Stability Assist* - TSA
With Sport mode, maximum traction is
obtained if the car has become stuck, or when
driving on a loose surface - e.g. sand or deep
snow.
The function serves to stabilise the car and
trailer combination if it begins to snake, see
page 310.
Proceed as follows to select Sport mode:
Active Yaw Control
The function limits the driving and brake force
of the wheels individually in order to stabilise
the car.
NOTE
The function is deactivated if the driver
selects Sport mode.
Spin Control
The function prevents the driving wheels from
spinning against the road surface during acceleration.
Selection of level - Sport mode
Traction control system
The DSTC system is always activated - it cannot be deactivated.
The function is active at low speed and transfers power from the driving wheel that is spinning to the one that is not.
Engine drag control - EDC
EDC (Engine Drag Control) prevents involuntary wheel locking, e.g. after shifting down or
146
Operation
However, the driver can select the Sport mode,
which allows for a more active driving experience. In Sport mode the system detects
whether the accelerator pedal, steering wheel
movements and cornering are more active than
in normal driving and then allows controlled
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
1. Press the centre console button MY CAR
and search in the display screen's menu
system and locate My XC60 DSTC. (For
information on the menu system, see
page 200).
2. Uncheck the box and back out of the menu
system with EXIT.
> The system then allows a more sporty
driving style.
The Sport mode is active until the driver deselects it or until the engine is switched off - after
the engine is started the next time the DSTC
system is back in its normal mode again.
04 Driver support
DSTC – Stability and traction control system
Symbols and messages in the display
Symbol
Message
Specification
DSTC Temporarily OFF
DSTC system temporarily reduced due to excessive brake disc temperature. - The function is reactivated automatically when the brakes have cooled.
DSTC Service required
DSTC system disengaged.
• Stop the car in a safe place, switch off the engine and start it again.
• Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
"Message"
There is a message on the speedometer's display - Read it!
Constant glow for 2 seconds.
System check when the engine is started.
Flashing light.
DSTC system is being activated.
04
and
Sport mode is activated.
147
04 Driver support
Road sign information - RSI*
General information on RSI
WARNING
RSI does not work in all situations but is
designed merely as a supplementary aid.
The driver always bears ultimate responsibility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven
safely and that applicable road traffic rules
and regulations are followed.
Together with the symbol for
the current speed limit, a sign
showing that overtaking is
prohibited may also be displayed where appropriate.
Additional signs
Operation
04
Examples of readable speed signs1.
The Road sign information function (RSI – Road
Sign Information) helps the driver to remember
which road signs the car has passed through
information on - among other things - the current speed, the start/end of a motorway or
road, and when overtaking is prohibited.
If a sign for both a motorway/road for motorised traffic and a sign showing the maximum
permitted speed are passed, RSI decides to
show the sign symbol for maximum permitted
speed.
Examples of additional signs1.
Recorded speed information.
When RSI has recorded a road sign with an
imposed speed, the sign is displayed as a symbol on the instrument panel.
Sometimes different speed limits are signposted for the same road - an additional sign then
indicates the circumstances under which the
different speeds apply. The road section may
be particularly susceptible to accidents in rain
and/or fog, for example.
An additional sign relating to rain is displayed
only if the windscreen wipers are in use.
1
148
Road signs which are displayed in the instrument panel are dependent on the market - the illustration only shows a few examples.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Driver support
Road sign information - RSI*
The speed applicable on an
exit is indicated by means of
an additional sign containing
an arrow. The arrow is displayed under the symbol
showing the speed.
Speed signs linked to this type of additional
sign are displayed only if the driver is using the
direction indicator.
Limited distance or time of day
Some speeds are applicable
only after a specific distance
or at a certain time of day. The
driver's attention is drawn to
the situation by means of an
empty frame under the symbol showing the speed.
Setting in MY CAR
The instrument panel’s speed symbol display
can be disabled. To deactivate the RSI function:
• Uncheck the option in MY CAR Settings
Car settings Road Sign
Information and go back by pressing
EXIT, see page 201.
Speed warning
The driver can opt to receive a warning (Speed
Alert) when the applicable speed limit is exceeded by 5 km/h or more. This warning is given
by the symbol showing the applicable maximum speed temporarily flashing when this
speed is exceeded.
Here are several examples of what can disrupt
the function:
•
•
•
•
•
Faded signs
Signs positioned on bends
Rotated or damaged signs
Concealed or poorly positioned signs.
Signs completely or partly covered with
frost, snow and/or dirt.
04
To activate speed warning:
• Check speed warning in MY CAR
Settings Car settings Speed alert
and go back by pressing EXIT, see
page 201.
Limitations
The RSI function's camera sensor is limited just like the human eye. Find out more about
this on page 175.
Options in MY CAR.
Signs which indirectly provide information on a
prevailing speed limit, e.g. name signs for
towns/districts, are not recorded by the RSI
function.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
149
04 Driver support
Cruise control*
General information on CC
Operation
To activate cruise control:
The cruise control (CC – Cruise Control) helps
the driver maintain an even speed, resulting in
a more relaxed driving on motorways and long,
straight roads in regular traffic flows.
• At the required speed - press the steering
wheel button
>
WARNING
The driver always bears ultimate responsibility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven
safely.
.
Current speed is stored in the memory - the
display text (---) km/h changes to show
the selected speed, e.g. 100 km/h, without
brackets.
NOTE
G021411
04
The driver must always be observant with
regard to the traffic conditions and intervene
when the cruise control is not maintaining a
suitable speed and/or suitable distance.
or
Steering wheel keypad and display.
Cruise control cannot be engaged at
speeds below 30 km/h.
Changing the speed
Cruise control - On/Off.
To change the stored speed:
Standby mode ceases and the stored
speed is resumed.
• Press briefly on the steering wheel button,
Standby mode
Activate and adjust the speed.
Selected speed (in brackets = Standby
mode).
or
- most recent presses are stored
in memory.
A temporary increase in speed with the accelerator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not
affect the cruise control setting - the car returns
to the set speed when the accelerator pedal is
released.
Activating and setting the speed
To enable cruise control:
• Press the steering wheel button (1).
>
150
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
illuminates in the display (5)
The symbol
and the brackets around (---) km/h show
that cruise control is set in standby mode.
NOTE
If any of the Cruise Control buttons are held
down for more than approx. 1 minute, it is
blocked and disabled. To be able to reactivate Cruise Control, the car must be stopped and the engine restarted.
04 Driver support
Cruise control*
Temporary deactivation - standby mode
To temporarily disengage cruise control and
set it in standby mode:
• Press the steering wheel button
>
.
Set speed is shown in brackets in the display (5), e.g. (100) km/h.
Automatic standby mode
Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and
set in standby mode if:
•
•
•
•
•
NOTE
A significant increase in speed may arise
after the speed has been resumed with
.
Deactivate
The cruise control is switched off with the
steering wheel button (1) or by switching off the
engine - the set speed is deleted from the
memory and cannot be resumed with the
button.
wheels lose traction
04
the foot brake is used
speed falls below approx. 30 km/h
the clutch pedal is depressed
the gear selector is moved to neutral position (automatic gearbox)
• the driver maintains a speed higher than
the set speed for longer than 1 minute.
The driver must then regulate the speed.
Resume set speed
Cruise control in standby mode is re-activated
with one press on the steering wheel button
- the speed is then set to the last stored
speed.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
151
04 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control*
General information on ACC
The adaptive cruise control (ACC – Adaptive
Cruise Control) helps the driver maintain a safe
distance from the vehicle ahead. An adaptive
cruise control provides a more relaxing driving
experience on long journeys on motorways
and long straight main roads in smooth traffic
flows.
04
The driver sets the desired speed and time
interval to the car in front. When the radar
detector detects a slower vehicle in front of the
car, the speed is automatically adapted to that.
When the road is clear again the car returns to
the selected speed.
If the adaptive cruise control is switched off or
set to the standby mode and the car comes too
close to a vehicle in front, then the driver is
warned by Distance Warning (see page 162)
about the short distance.
WARNING
The driver must always be observant with
regard to the traffic conditions and intervene
when the adaptive cruise control is not
maintaining a suitable speed or suitable distance.
The adaptive cruise control cannot handle
all traffic, weather and road conditions.
Read the whole of this section for information on the limitations of the adaptive cruise
control. The driver must be familiar with this
information before using the adaptive cruise
control.
The driver always bears responsibility for
maintaining the correct distance and speed,
even when the adaptive cruise control is
being used.
Automatic gearbox
Cars with automatic gearbox have enhanced
functionality with the adaptive cruise control's
Queue Assistant, see page 156.
152
Function overview1.
Warning lamp - braking by driver required
Steering wheel keypad
Radar sensor
IMPORTANT
Maintenance of adaptive cruise control
components must only be performed at a
workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop
is recommended.
1
Function
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may differ depending on car model.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Adaptive cruise control consists of a cruise
control system and a coordinated spacing system.
04 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control*
WARNING
Adaptive cruise control is not a collision
avoidance system. The driver must intervene if the system does not detect a vehicle
in front.
The adaptive cruise control does not brake
for humans or animals, and not for small
vehicles such as bicycles and motorcycles.
Nor for oncoming, slow or stationary vehicles and objects.
Do not use the adaptive cruise control, for
example, in city traffic, in dense traffic, at
junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot of
water or slush on the road, in heavy rain/
snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads or
on slip roads.
The distance to the vehicle ahead is mainly
measured by a radar sensor. Cruise control
regulates the speed with acceleration and
braking. It is normal for the brakes to emit a low
sound when they are being used by the Adaptive cruise control.
WARNING
The brake pedal moves when the cruise
control brakes. Do not rest your foot under
the brake pedal as it could become trapped.
2
The adaptive cruise control aims to follow the
vehicle ahead in the same lane at a time interval
set by the driver. If the radar sensor cannot see
any vehicle in front then the car will instead
maintain the cruise control's set speed. This
also happens if the speed of the vehicle in front
exceeds the cruise control's set speed.
The adaptive cruise control aims to control the
speed in a smooth way. In situations that
demand sudden braking the driver must brake
himself/herself. This applies with large differences in speed, or if the vehicle in front brakes
heavily. Due to limitations in the radar sensor,
braking may come unexpectedly or not at all,
see page 158.
The adaptive cruise control can be activated to
follow another vehicle at speeds from
30 km/h2 up to 200 km/h. If the speed falls
below 30 km/h or if the engine speed becomes
too low, the cruise control is set in standby
mode at which automatic braking ceases - the
driver must then take over himself/herself to
maintain a safe distance to the vehicle ahead.
Warning lamp - braking by driver
required
Adaptive cruise control has a braking capacity
that is equivalent to more than 40% of the car's
braking capacity.
If the car needs to be braked more heavily than
cruise control capacity and the driver does not
brake, then the cruise control uses the collision
warning system's warning lamp and warning
sound (see page 170) to alert the driver that
immediate intervention is required.
NOTE
The warning lamp may be difficult to notice
in strong sunlight or when sunglasses are
being worn.
04
WARNING
Cruise control only warns of vehicles
detected by the radar sensor. Consequently
there may be no warning or it may be subject to a delay. Do not wait for a warning but
brake when it is necessary.
Steep roads and/or heavy load
Bear in mind that the adaptive cruise control is
primarily intended for use when driving on level
road surfaces. It may have difficultly in keeping
the correct distance from the vehicle ahead
when driving on steep roads, with a heavy load
or with a trailer - in which case, be extra attentive and ready to slow down.
Queue Assistant (in cars with automatic gearbox) can operate in the range of 0-200 km/h, see page 156.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
153
04 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control*
Operation
• Press the steering wheel button
illuminates in the display.
the symbol
The display's symbol (---) shows that the
cruise control is set in standby mode.
To activate the Cruise control:
• At the desired speed - press the steering
wheel button
>
04
Standby mode ceases and the stored
speed is resumed.
Time interval - Increase/decrease.
Activate and adjust the speed.
The current speed is stored in the memory
- the display's symbol (---) changes to
show the selected speed, e.g. 100, without
brackets.
Only when the symbol
(with car) is illuminated, is the
distance to the vehicle in
front regulated by the cruise control.
Selected speed (in brackets = Standby
mode).
Changing the speed
Time interval3 - On (during adjustment).
• Adjust with short presses on
To change the stored speed:
Time interval - On (after adjustment).
or
every press gives +/- 5 km/h. The last
presses made are stored in the memory.
Activating and setting the speed
To set the Cruise control:
3
154
.
changes
When the symbol
to
the radar sensor has
detected a vehicle.
Steering wheel keypad and display.
Cruise control - On/Off or Standby mode.
or
The display shows either "dash" symbol [6] or [7] - they are never shown simultaneously.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
If speed is increased using the accelerator
pedal prior to pressing the
/
button,
then it is the car's current speed when the
button is pressed that is stored in the
cruise control.
• In active mode the button
has the same
function as
but results in a lower
increase in speed: + 1 km/h.
NOTE
If any of the Cruise Control buttons are held
down for more than approx. 1 minute, it is
blocked and disabled. To be able to reactivate Cruise Control, the car must be stopped and the engine restarted.
In certain situations, cruise control cannot
be activated. Then the display shows
Cruise control Unavailable, see
page 160.
04 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control*
Set time interval
Different time intervals to the
vehicle in front can be
selected and shown in the
display as 1-5 horizontal lines
- the more lines the longer the
time interval. One line corresponds to approx. 1 second
to the vehicle in front, 5 lines
approx. 3 seconds.
The number of lines for the
selected time interval is
shown during the setting itself
and for several seconds afterwards. Then a smaller scale
version of the symbol is
shown to the right of the display. The same symbol is also shown when
Distance Warning is activated, see page 162.
wheel buttons
/
.
The adaptive cruise control allows the time
interval to vary noticeably in certain situations
in order to allow the car to follow the vehicle in
front smoothly and comfortably.
The higher the speed the longer the calculated distance in metres for a given time
interval.
Note that small intervals only allow the driver a
short time to react and take action if any
unforeseen traffic problem should arise.
Temporary deactivation - standby mode
To temporarily disengage Cruise control and
set it in standby mode:
• Press the steering wheel button
>
4
than 1 minute4
• the gear selector is moved to N position
(automatic gearbox)
the set speed for longer than 1 minute.
If Cruise Control does not appear to react
when activated, this may be because the
time distance to the car in front is preventing
an increase in speed.
At low speed, when the distances are short, the
adaptive cruise control increases the time
interval slightly.
• the foot brake is used
• the clutch pedal is depressed for longer
04
The driver must then regulate the speed.
Only use the time intervals permitted by
local traffic regulations.
• Increase or decrease with the steering
Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and
set in standby mode if:
• the driver maintains a speed higher than
NOTE
To set/change the time interval:
Standby mode due to driver intervention
.
Set speed is shown in brackets in the display, e.g. (100)
A temporary increase in speed with the accelerator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not
affect the cruise control setting - the car returns
to the last stored speed when the accelerator
pedal is released.
Automatic standby mode
The Adaptive cruise control is dependent on
other systems, e.g.. DSTC (see page 146). If
any of these systems stop working then cruise
control is automatically deactivated.
In the event of automatic deactivation a signal
will sound and the message Cruise control
Cancelled is shown in the display. The driver
must then intervene and adapt the speed and
distance to the vehicle ahead.
Disengaging and selecting a higher or lower gear does not involve standby mode.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
155
04 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control*
An automatic deactivation can be due to:
•
•
•
•
•
04
WARNING
engine speed is too low/high
speed falls below 30 km/h5
wheels lose traction
brake temperature is high
the radar sensor is covered e.g. by wet
snow or heavy rain (radar waves blocked).
Be aware that this function can be activated
in more situations other than during overtaking, e.g. when a direction indicator is
used to indicate a change of lane or exit to
another road - the car will then accelerate
briefly.
Deactivate
Cruise control in standby mode is re-activated
with one press on the steering wheel button
- the speed is then set to the last stored
speed.
Adaptive cruise control is deactivated with a
short press on the steering wheel button
in
standby mode - or with one long press in active
mode. The set speed is cleared and cannot be
button.
resumed with the
NOTE
Overtaking another vehicle
When the car is following another vehicle and
the driver indicates an imminent overtake with
the direction indicator6, the Cruise control
helps to briefly accelerate the car towards the
vehicle in front.
The function is active at speeds
above 70 km/h.
5
6
156
Extended speed range
NOTE
Resume set speed
A significant increase in speed may arise
after the speed has been resumed with
.
Note that the lowest programmable speed for
the cruise control is 30 km/h - even though the
cruise control is capable of following another
vehicle down to a standstill, a lower speed
cannot be selected.
Queue Assistant
In cars with automatic gearbox Adaptive cruise
control is supplemented with the Queue Assistant function (also referred to as "Queue
Assist").
Queue Assistant has the following functions:
• Extended speed range - also below 30 km/
h and at standstill
• Change of target
• Automatic braking ceases when stationary
• Automatic activation parking brake.
Does not apply to a car with Queue Assistant - it manages right down to stationary.
On left flash only in left-hand drive car, or right flash in right-hand drive car.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
In order to activate the cruise control the
driver's door must be closed and the driver
must be wearing the seatbelt.
With automatic gearbox the cruise control can
follow another vehicle within the range of
0-200 km/h.
NOTE
Activation of the cruise control below
30 km/h requires a vehicle in front within a
reasonable distance.
For shorter stops in connection with inching in
slow traffic or at traffic lights driving is automatically resumed if the stops do not exceed
about 3 seconds - if it takes longer before the
car in front starts moving again then the cruise
control is set in standby mode with automatic
04 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control*
braking. The driver must then re-activate the
cruise control in one of the following ways:
• Press the steering wheel button
Change of target
Automatic standby mode with change of
target
Cruise control is disengaged and set in
standby mode:
.
or
• when the speed is below 5 km/h and cruise
• Depress the accelerator pedal.
>
control is not sure whether the target
object is a stationary vehicle or some other
object, e.g. a speed bump.
The cruise control will then resume following the vehicle in front.
NOTE
Queue Assist can hold the car stationary for
a maximum of 4 minutes - then the parking
brake is applied and Cruise Control is disengaged.
•
The driver has to release the parking
brake before the cruise control can be
reactivated.
• when the speed is below 5 km/h and the
vehicle in front turns off so the cruise control no longer has a vehicle to follow.
If the target vehicle in front suddenly turns then
there may be stationary traffic in front.
When the cruise control is following another
vehicle at speeds below 30 km/h and changes
target from a moving to a stationary vehicle, the
cruise control will slow down for the stationary
vehicle.
WARNING
When the cruise control is following another
vehicle at speeds in excess of 30 km/h and
the target is changed from a moving vehicle
to a stationary vehicle, the cruise control will
ignore the stationary vehicle and instead
select the stored speed.
•
The driver must intervene him/herself
and brake.
04
Termination of automatic braking at a
standstill
In certain situations Queue Assist automatically interrupts braking when stationary. This
means that the brakes are released and the car
may start to roll - the driver must therefore
intervene and brake the car himself/herself in
order to maintain its position.
Queue Assist releases the foot brake and sets
cruise control in standby mode in the following
situations:
• the driver puts his/her foot on the brake
pedal
• the parking brake is applied
• the gear selector is moved to P, N or R
position
•
the driver sets the cruise control in standby
mode.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
157
04 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control*
Automatic activation parking brake
In some situations Queue Assist applies the
parking brake in order to keep the car stationary.
This takes place if:
• the driver opens the door or takes off his/
her seatbelt
• DSTC is changed from Normal to Sport
mode
04
• Queue Assist has held the car stationary
for more than 4 minutes
• the engine is switched off
• the brakes have overheated.
The radar sensor and its limitations
WARNING
The driver must always be observant with
regard to the traffic conditions and intervene
when the adaptive cruise control is not
maintaining a suitable speed or suitable distance.
The adaptive cruise control cannot handle
all traffic, weather and road conditions.
Read the whole of this section for information on the limitations of the adaptive cruise
control. The driver must be familiar with this
information before using the adaptive cruise
control.
The driver always bears responsibility for
maintaining the correct distance and speed,
even when the adaptive cruise control is
being used.
The radar sensor is used - apart from by Adaptive cruise control - by the following functions
as well:
• Collision Warning with Auto Brake, see
page 170
WARNING
Accessories or other objects such as auxiliary lamps must not be installed in front of
the grille.
• Distance Warning, see page 162.
The function of the radar sensor is to detect
cars or larger vehicles in the same direction, in
the same lane.
Modification of the radar sensor could result in
it being illegal to use.
WARNING
Adaptive cruise control is not a collision
avoidance system. The driver must intervene if the system does not detect a vehicle
in front.
The adaptive cruise control does not brake
for humans or animals, and not for small
vehicles such as bicycles and motorcycles.
Nor for oncoming, slow or stationary vehicles and objects.
Do not use the adaptive cruise control, for
example, in city traffic, in dense traffic, at
junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot of
water or slush on the road, in heavy rain/
snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads or
on slip roads.
The capacity of the radar sensor to detect vehicles in front is reduced significantly:
• if the radar sensor becomes blocked and
cannot detect other vehicles e.g. in heavy
rain or slush, or if other objects have collected in front of the radar sensor.
NOTE
Keep the area in front of the radar sensor
clean - see "Maintenance" on page 173.
• if the speed of vehicles in front is significantly different from your own speed.
158
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control*
Examples where the cruise control does
not work optimally
The radar sensor has a limited field of vision. In
some situations another vehicle is not
detected, or the detection is made later than
expected.
Sometimes the radar sensor is late at
detecting vehicles at close distances, e.g.
a vehicle that drives in between the car and
vehicles in front.
Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or
vehicles not driving in the centre of the lane
can remain undetected.
In bends the radar sensor may detect the
wrong vehicle or lose a detected vehicle
from view.
04
Fault tracing and action
If the display shows the message Radar
blocked See manual this means that the
radar signals from the radar sensor are blocked
and that vehicles in front of the car could not
be detected.
This means that in addition to the Adaptive
Cruise Control, Distance Warning and Collision
Warning with Auto Brake functions are not
operating either.
The following table presents possible causes
for a message being shown along with the
appropriate action.
ACC field of vision.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
159
04 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control*
Cause
Action
The radar surface in the grille is dirty or covered with ice or snow.
Clean the radar surface in the grille from dirt, ice and snow.
Heavy rain or snow blocking the radar signals.
No action. Sometimes the radar does not work during heavy rain or
snowfall.
Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the radar signals.
No action. Sometimes the radar does not work on a very wet or snowy
road surface.
The radar surface has been cleaned but the message remains.
Wait. It could take several minutes for the radar to sense that it is no
longer blocked.
04
Symbols and messages in the display
Symbol
Message
Specification
Standby mode or active mode without detected vehicle.
Active mode with detected vehicle to which cruise control adapts the speed.
Time interval activated, during adjustment.
Time interval activated, after adjustment.
160
DSTC Normal to enable
Cruise
Adaptive cruise control cannot be activated until the Stability and Traction Control system (DSTC) has
been set in Normal mode - see page 146.
Cruise control Cancelled
Adaptive cruise control has been deactivated - the driver has to regulate the speed.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control*
Symbol
Message
Specification
Cruise control Unavailable
Adaptive cruise control cannot be activated.
This could be due to:
• brake temperature is high
• the radar sensor is blocked by e.g. wet snow or rain.
Radar blocked See manual
Adaptive cruise control temporarily disengaged.
• The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event that heavy
rain or if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor.
04
Read about the limitations of the radar sensor, see page 158.
Cruise control Service
required
Adaptive cruise control disengaged.
• Contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Press Brake To hold +
acoustic alarm
The car is stationary and the cruise control will release the foot brake to allow the parking brake to
take over and hold the car, but a fault in the parking brake means the car will shortly begin to roll.
(Only with Queue Assistant)
• The driver must brake himself/herself. The message remains and the alarm sounds until the driver
depresses the brake pedal or uses the accelerator pedal.
Below 30 km/h Only following
Shown with attempts to activate the cruise control at speeds below 30 km/h without a vehicle in front
within the activation distance (approx. 30 metres).
(Only with Queue Assistant)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
161
04 Driver support
Distance Warning*
General
Distance Warning (Distance Alert) is a function
that informs the driver about the time interval
to vehicles in front.
Distance Warning is active at speeds above
30 km/h and only reacts to vehicles driving in
front of the car, in the same direction. No distance information is provided for oncoming,
slow or stationary vehicles.
NOTE
Distance warning is deactivated during the
time the adaptive cruise control is active.
WARNING
Distance warning only reacts if the distance
to the vehicle ahead is shorter than the preset value - the speed of the driver's vehicle
is not affected.
Some combinations of the selected equipment
leave no vacant space for a button in the centre
console - in which case the function is handled
by the car's menu system MY CAR under
Settings Car settings Warning
distance. For a description of the menu system - see page 200.
Set time interval
04
Operation
Controls and display for time interval.
Orange warning lamp1.
An orange warning lamp in the windscreen illuminates with a constant glow if the distance to
the vehicle in front is shorter than the set time
interval.
1
2
162
Time interval - Increase/decrease. Press
up to increase, down to decrease.
Time interval2 - On (during adjustment).
Press the button in the centre console to switch
the function on or off. The function is switched
on if one lamp is illuminated in the button.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
The display shows either "dash" symbol [2] or [3] - they are never shown simultaneously.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Time interval2 - On (after adjustment).
04 Driver support
Distance Warning*
Different time intervals to the
vehicle in front can be
selected and shown in the
display as 1-5 horizontal lines
- the more lines the longer the
time interval. One line corresponds to
approximately 1 second to the vehicle in front,
5 lines approximately 3 seconds.
The number of lines for the
selected time interval is
shown during the setting itself
and for several seconds afterwards. Then a smaller scale
version of the symbol is
shown to the right of the display. The same symbol is also shown when
adaptive cruise control is activated.
Limitations
NOTE
The higher the speed, the longer the calculated distance in metres for a specific time
interval.
The set time interval is also used by the
adaptive cruise control function, see
page 154.
The function uses the same radar sensor as
adaptive cruise control and the collision warning system. For more information on the radar
sensor and its limitations, see page 158.
NOTE
Only use the time interval that is allowed in
accordance with local traffic regulations.
Strong sunlight, reflections or strong variations in light intensity, as well as wearing
sunglasses, could mean that the warning
light in the windscreen cannot be seen.
04
Poor weather or winding roads could affect
the radar sensor's capacity to detect vehicles in front.
The size of other vehicles could also affect
detection capacity, e.g. motorcycles. This
could mean that the warning lamp illuminates at a shorter distance than the setting
or that the warning is temporarily absent.
Extremely high speeds can also cause the
lamp to illuminate at a shorter distance than
that set due to limitations in sensor range.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
163
04 Driver support
Distance Warning*
Symbols and messages in the display
Symbol
Message
Specification
Set time interval, during adjustment.
Set time interval, after adjustment.
Radar blocked See manual
Distance Warning temporarily disengaged.
The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles, e.g. in the event of heavy rain or if slush
has collected in front of the radar sensor.
04
Read about the limitations of the radar sensor, see page 158.
Collision warn. Service
required
164
Distance Warning and Collision Warning with Auto Brake fully or partially disengaged.
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Driver support
City Safety™
General
City Safety™ is a function for helping the driver
to avoid a collision when driving in queues,
amongst other things, when changes in the
traffic ahead, combined with a lapse in attention, could lead to an incident.
The function is active at speeds
under50 km/h and it helps the driver by automatically braking the car in the event of imminent risk of collision with vehicles in front,
should the driver not react in time by braking
and/or steering away.
City Safety™ is activated in situations where
the driver should have started braking earlier,
which is why it cannot help the driver in every
situation.
If the car is also equipped with a Collision
Warning function with Auto Brake*, these two
systems complement each other. For more
information on Collision Warning function with
Auto Brake, see page 170.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance and replacement of City
Safety™ components must only be performed by a workshop - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
WARNING
City Safety™ does not react to vehicles
driving in a different direction from the car,
to small vehicles, motorcycles and bicycles
or to humans and animals.
City Safety™ must not be used as an excuse
for the driver to change his/her driving style. If
the driver solely relies on City Safety™ to do
the braking, there will be a collision sooner or
later.
City Safety™ can prevent collision at a
speed difference of less than 15 km/h - at a
higher speed difference, it is only possible
to reduce collision speed. In order to obtain
full brake function, the driver must depress
the brake pedal.
1
04
Laser sensor transmitter and receiver window1.
City Safety™ does not engage in all driving
situations or traffic, weather or road conditions.
City Safety™ is designed to be activated as
late as possible in order to avoid unnecessary
intervention.
The driver or passengers normally only notice
City Safety™ if a situation arises where the car
is extremely close to being in a collision.
Function
Never wait for City Safety™ to engage. The
driver always bears responsibility for maintaining the proper distance and speed.
City Safety™ detects the traffic in front of the
car with a laser sensor fitted in the top edge of
the windscreen. If there is an imminent risk of
collision, City Safety™ will automatically brake
the car, which may be experienced as sudden
braking.
If the speed difference is 4-15 km/h in relation
to the vehicle in front then City Safety™ can
completely prevent a collision.
City Safety™ activates a short, sharp braking
and stops the car in normal circumstances, just
behind the vehicle in front. For most drivers this
is well outside normal driving style and may be
experienced as being uncomfortable.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
165
04 Driver support
City Safety™
If the difference in speed between the vehicles
is greater than 15 km/h then City Safety™ may
not prevent the collision on its own. To obtain
full brake force, the driver must depress the
brake pedal. This could then make it possible
to prevent a collision, even at speed differences above 15 km/h.
• Using MY CAR on the centre console dis-
When the function is activated and brakes, the
instrument panel display shows a message to
the effect that the function is/has been active.
However, the function will be enabled the
next time the engine is started, regardless
of whether the system was enabled or disabled when the engine was switched off.
04
play screen with its menu system, search
and locate Settings Car settings
Driver support systems City Safety.
Select the Off option. For more information
on the menu system MY CAR, see
page 200.
NOTE
The brake lights come on when City
Safety™ brakes the car.
Operation
NOTE
The City Safety™ function is always enabled after the engine has been started via
key position I and II (see page 78 on key
positions).
On and Off
In certain situations, it may advisable to disable
City Safety™, e.g. where leafy branches could
sweep over the bonnet and/or windscreen.
After starting the engine City Safety™ can be
deactivated as follows:
166
WARNING
The laser sensor also transmits laser light
when City Safety™ is disabled manually.
To enable City Safety™ again:
• Follow the same procedure as for disabling, but select the On option.
Limitations
The sensor in City Safety™ is designed to
detect cars and other large vehicles in front of
the car irrespective of whether it is day or night.
However, the sensor has limitations and has
poorer functionality - or none at all - in e.g.
heavy snowfall or rain, dense fog, dust storms
or snow flurries. Mist, dirt, ice or snow on the
windscreen may disrupt the function.
Low-hanging objects, e.g. a flag/pennant for
projecting load, or accessories such as auxiliary lamps and bull bars that are higher than the
bonnet limit the function.
The laser light from the sensor in City
Safety™ measures how the light is reflected.
The sensor cannot detect objects with low
reflection capacity. The rear sections of the
vehicle generally reflect the light sufficiently
thanks to the number plate and rear light reflectors.
On slippery road surfaces the braking distance
is extended, which may reduce the capacity of
City Safety™ to avoid a collision. In such situations the ABS and DSTC systems will provide best possible braking force with maintained stability.
When your own car is reversing, City Safety™
is temporarily deactivated.
City Safety™ is not activated at low speeds under 4 km/h, which is why the system does
not intervene in situations where a vehicle in
front is being approached very slowly, e.g.
when parking.
Driver commands are always prioritised, which
is why City Safety™ does not intervene in situations where the driver is steering or accelerating in a clear manner, even if a collision is
unavoidable.
04 Driver support
City Safety™
When City Safety™ has prevented a collision
with a stationary object the car remains stationary for a maximum of 1.5 seconds. If the car
is braked for a vehicle in front that is moving,
then speed is reduced to the same speed as
that maintained by the vehicle in front.
On a car with manual gearbox the engine stops
when City Safety™ has stopped the car, unless
the driver manages to depress the clutch pedal
beforehand.
NOTE
•
Keep the windscreen surface in front of
the laser sensor free from ice, snow and
dirt (see the illustration for sensor location, page 165).
•
Do not affix or mount anything on the
windscreen in front of the laser sensor
•
Remove ice and snow from the bonnet
- snow and ice must not exceed a height
of 5 cm.
Fault tracing and action
If the message Windscreen Sensors
blocked is shown on the instrument panel dis-
The Windscreen Sensors blocked message
is not shown for all situations in which the laser
sensor is blocked. The driver must therefore be
diligent about keeping the windscreen and
area in front of the laser sensor clean.
The following table presents possible causes
for the message being shown, along with suggestions for appropriate action.
Cause
Action
The windscreen surface in front of the
laser sensor is dirty
or covered with ice
or snow.
Clean the windscreen surface in
front of the sensor
from dirt, ice and
snow.
The laser sensor
field of vision is
blocked.
Remove the blocking object.
IMPORTANT
If there are cracks, scratches or stone chips
in the windscreen in front of either of the
laser sensor's "windows" and they cover a
surface of approx. 0.5 x 3.0 mm (or larger),
then a workshop must be contacted for
repair or replacement of the windscreen
(see the illustration for sensor location, page
165) - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Failure to take action may result in reduced
performance for City Safety™.
04
To avoid the risk of reducing City Safety™
performance the following also applies:
•
Before replacing a windscreen, contact
an authorised Volvo workshop to verify
that the correct windscreen is ordered
and fitted. Using the wrong windscreen
may result in the City Safety function
failing to operate or operating incorrectly.
•
The same type or Volvo-approved
windscreen wipers must be fitted during
replacement.
play, it indicates that the laser sensor is
blocked and cannot detect vehicles in front of
the car. This means that City Safety™ is not
operational.
167
04 Driver support
City Safety™
Laser sensor
The City Safety™ function includes a sensor
which transmits laser light. Contact a qualified
workshop in the event of a fault or if the laser
sensor needs servicing - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
WARNING
04
168
Never look into the laser sensor (which
emits spreading invisible laser radiation) at
a distance of 100 mm or closer with magnifying optics such as a magnifying glass,
microscope, lens or similar optical instruments - this would involve a risk of eye injury
(the illustration on page 165 shows sensor
location).
For more information on the laser sensor, see
page 9.
Symbols and messages in the display
In conjunction with automatic braking by the
City Safety™ system, one or more symbols
may illuminate on the instrument panel and a
message may appear on its display.
A text message can be acknowledged by
briefly pressing the OK button on the direction
indicator stalk.
04 Driver support
City Safety™
Symbol
Message
Meaning/Action
Auto braking by City Safety
City Safety™ is braking or has automatically braked.
Windscreen Sensors
blocked
The laser sensor is temporarily non-operational because something is blocking it.
• Remove the object blocking the sensor and/or clean the windscreen in front of the sensor.
Read about the limitations of the laser sensor, see page 166.
City Safety Service
required
04
City Safety™ is not operational.
• Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
169
04 Driver support
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Protection*
04
General
Two system levels
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to assist the driver
when there is a risk of colliding with a pedestrian or vehicle in front that is stationary or
moving in the same direction.
Depending on how the car equipped, the Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian
Detection function may appear in two variants:
Level 1 and Level 2.
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian
Detection is activated in situations where the
driver should have started braking earlier,
which is why it cannot help the driver in every
situation.
The driver is merely warned of occurring obstacles by means of visual and acoustic signals no automatic braking intervenes, the driver
must himself brake.
Level 2
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian
Detection is designed to be activated as late as
possible in order to avoid unnecessary intervention.
The driver is warned of occurring obstacles by
means of visual and acoustic signals - the car
is braked automatically if the driver himself
does not act within a reasonable time.
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian
Detection may prevent a collision or reduce the
collision speed.
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian
Detection must not be used as an excuse for
the driver to change his/her driving style. If the
driver solely relies on Collision Warning with
Auto Brake to do the braking, there will be a
collision sooner or later.
1
2
170
Function
Level 1
IMPORTANT
Maintenance of components included in
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection must only be carried out in a
workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop
is recommended.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
With system Level 2 only.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Function overview1.
Audio-visual warning signal in the event of
a collision risk.
Radar sensor2
Camera sensor
Collision Warning with Auto Brake executes
three steps in the following order:
1. Collision warning
2. Brake support2
3. Auto Brake2
04 Driver support
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Protection*
The collision warning system and City
Safety™ complement each other. For more
information on City Safety™, see page 165.
1 - Collision warning
The driver is first warned of a potentially imminent collision.
The collision warning system detects pedestrians, stationary vehicles as well as vehicles
driving in the same direction in front of the car.
If there is a risk of collision with a pedestrian or
a vehicle, the driver's attention is attracted with
a flashing red warning signal (no. [1] in the illustration on page 170) and an acoustic signal.
2 - Brake support2
3 - Auto Brake2
WARNING
The automatic brake function is activated last.
If in this situation the driver has not yet started
to take evasive action and the risk of collision
is imminent then the automatic braking function is deployed - this takes place irrespective
of whether or not the driver brakes. Braking
then takes place with full brake force in order
to reduce collision speed, or with limited brake
force if it is sufficient to avoid a collision.
The collision warning system does not
engage in all driving situations or traffic,
weather or road conditions. The collision
warning system does not react to vehicles
driving in another direction to the car or to
animals.
Warning only activated in the event of a high
risk for collision. This section "Function"
and the section "Limitations" inform about
limitations that the driver must be aware of
before using the Collision Warning system
with Auto Brake.
Warnings and brake interventions for
pedestrians are switched off at vehicle
speeds exceeding 80 km/h.
If the risk of collision has increased further after
the collision warning then the brake support is
activated.
Warnings and brake interventions for
pedestrians do not work in darkness and
tunnels - not even when streetlights are lit.
This means that the brake system is prepared
for rapid braking by applying the brakes lightly,
which may feel like a slight jolt.
The auto-brake function can prevent a collision or reduce collision speed. To ensure
full brake performance, the driver should
always depress the brake pedal - even when
the car auto-brakes.
If the brake pedal is depressed sufficiently
quickly then full brake function is implemented.
Brake support also reinforces the driver's braking if the system considers that the braking is
not sufficient to avoid a collision.
2
04
Never wait for a collision warning. The driver
is always responsible that the correct distance and speed are maintained - even
when the collision warning system with
auto-brake is used.
With system Level 2 only.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
171
04 Driver support
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Protection*
Detection of pedestrians
• In order for a pedestrian to be detected he/
she must appear full-length and have a
height of at least 80 cm.
• The system cannot detect a pedestrian
carrying larger items.
Operation
Settings are made from MY CAR via the centre
console display screen and menu system. For
information on how the menu system is used,
see page 200.
• The camera sensor's ability to see pedestrians at dusk and dawn is limited - just like
the human eye.
• The camera sensor's capacity to detect
pedestrians is deactivated when driving in
darkness and tunnels - even when streetlights are lit.
04
Optimal examples of what the system regards as
pedestrians with clear body contours.
Optimal performance of the system requires
that the system function that detects pedestrians receives as unambiguous information as
possible about the contours of the body - this
implies the opportunity to identify the head,
arms, shoulders, legs, upper and lower body
combined with a normal human pattern of
movement.
WARNING
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection is an assistance tool.
This function cannot detect all pedestrians
in all situations and it cannot see e.g. partially obscured pedestrians, people in clothing that hides the contours of the body or
pedestrians shorter than 80 cm.
•
If large parts of the body are not visible to the
camera then the system cannot detect a
pedestrian.
172
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The driver is always responsible that the
vehicle is driven properly and with a
safety distance adapted to the speed.
NOTE
The Brake Support and Auto Brake functions are always enabled - they cannot be
deactivated.
On and Off
To select whether the collision warning system
should be switched on or off:
• Use the menu system MY CAR via the
centre console display to search for
Settings Car settings Driver
support systems Collision Warning there, select On or Off.
An activated function is tested every time the
engine is started by briefly illuminating the separate lights for the warning lamp (no. [1] in the
illustration on page 170).
When starting the engine, the setting that was
selected when the engine was switched off is
obtained automatically.
04 Driver support
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Protection*
Activating/deactivating warning signals
The warning lamp (no. [1] in the illustration on
page 170) is activated automatically when the
engine is started if Collision Warning is enabled.
The warning sound can be activated/deactivated separately:
• Select On or Off in the menu system MY
CAR under Settings Car settings
Driver support systems Collision
Warning Warning sound.
Set warning distance
The warning distance regulates the distance at
which the visual and acoustic warnings are
deployed.
• Select one of the options from Long,
Normal or Short in the menu system MY
CAR under Settings Car settings
Driver support systems Collision
Warning Warning distance.
The warning distance determines the system's
sensitivity. Warning distance Long provides an
earlier warning. First test with Long and if this
setting produces too many warnings, which
could be perceived as irritating in certain sit-
uations, then change to warning distance
Normal.
WARNING
No automatic system can guarantee
100 % correct function in all situations.
Therefore, never test the Auto Brake system
by driving at people or vehicles - this may
cause severe damage and injury and risk
lives.
Only use warning distance Short in exceptional cases, e.g. for dynamic driving.
NOTE
When the adaptive cruise control is in use
the warning lamp and warning sound will be
used by the cruise control even if the collision warning system is switched off.
The collision warning system warns the
driver in the event of a risk of a collision, but
the function cannot shorten driver reaction
time.
In order for the collision warning system to
be effective, always drive with the Distance
Alert set at time interval 4 – 5. see
page 162.
Checking settings
The settings required can be controlled on the
centre console display screen. Search with the
menu system MY CAR under Settings Car
settings Driver support systems
Collision Warning, see page 200.
04
Maintenance
NOTE
Even if the warning distance has been set to
Long warnings could be perceived as being
late in certain situations, e.g. when there are
large differences in speed or if vehicles in
front brake heavily.
Camera and radar sensor3.
3
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
173
04 Driver support
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Protection*
For the sensors to work correctly, they must be
kept clear of dirt, ice and snow, and be cleaned
regularly with water and car shampoo.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors will
reduce their function and may prevent
measurement.
04
NOTE
The visual warning signal can be temporarily
disengaged in the event of high passenger
compartment temperature caused by
strong sunlight for example. If this occurs
then the warning sound is activated even if
it is deactivated in the menu system.
•
Limitations
Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Pedestrian Detection is active from approx. 4 km/h.
The visual warning signal (no. [1] in the illustration on page 170) may be difficult to notice in
the event of strong sunlight, reflections, when
sunglasses are being worn or if the driver is not
looking straight ahead. The warning sound
should therefore always be activated.
On slippery road surfaces the braking distance
is extended, which may reduce the capacity to
avoid a collision. In such situations the ABS
and DSTC systems will provide best possible
braking force with maintained stability.
174
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Warnings may not appear if the distance to the vehicle in front is small or if
steering wheel and pedal movements
are large, e.g. a very active driving style.
WARNING
Warnings and brake interventions could be
implemented late or not at all if the traffic
situation or external influences mean that
the radar or camera sensor cannot detect a
pedestrian or a vehicle in front correctly.
The sensor system has a limited range for
pedestrians and the system therefore provides effective warnings and brake interventions at vehicle speeds up to 50 km/h.
For stationary or slow-moving vehicles,
warnings and brake interventions are effective at vehicle speeds up to 70 km/h.
Warnings for stationary or slow-moving
vehicles could be disengaged due to darkness or poor visibility.
Warnings and brake interventions for
pedestrians are switched off at vehicle
speeds exceeding 80 km/h.
The collision warning system uses the same
radar sensors as adaptive cruise control. For
more information on the radar sensor and its
limitations, see page 175.
If warnings are perceived as being too frequent
or disturbing then the warning distance can be
reduced. This then leads to the system providing a warning at a later stage, which reduces
the total number of warnings; see the section
"Set warning distance" on page 173.
04 Driver support
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Protection*
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is temporarily deactivated with reverse gear engaged.
• Driver Alert Control – see page 179
• Lane Departure Warning – see page 182.
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is not activated at low speeds - under 4 km/h, which is
why the system does not intervene in situations
where the car is approaching a vehicle in front
very slowly, e.g. when parking.
Keep the windscreen surface in front of the
camera sensor clean from ice, snow, mist
and dirt.
In situations where the driver demonstrates
active, aware driving behaviour, a collision
warning may be postponed slightly in order to
keep unnecessary warnings to a minimum.
Do not attach or fit anything to the windscreen in front of the camera sensor, as this
could reduce or prevent the function of one
or more camera-dependent systems.
When Auto Brake has prevented a collision
with a stationary object the car remains stationary for a maximum of 1.5 seconds. If the car
is braked for a vehicle in front that is moving,
then speed is reduced to the same speed as
that maintained by the vehicle in front.
On a car with manual gearbox the engine stops
when Auto Brake has stopped the car, unless
the driver manages to depress the clutch pedal
beforehand.
Camera sensor limitations
The car’s camera sensor is also used - as well
as by Collision Warning with Auto Brake - by
the functions:
• Automatic main/dipped beam dimming see page 88
• Road sign information - see page 148
after the engine is started in order to protect
camera functionality.
Fault tracing and action
NOTE
The camera sensors have limitations similar to
the human eye, i.e. they "see" worse in darkness, heavy snowfall or rain and in thick fog for
example. Under such conditions the functions
of camera-dependent systems could be significantly reduced or temporarily disengaged.
If the display shows the message Windscreen
Sensors blocked then this means that the
camera sensor is blocked and cannot detect
pedestrians, vehicles or road markings in front
of the car.
At the same time, this means that - besides
Collision Warning with Auto Brake - the Automatic main/dipped beam dimming, Road sign
information, Driver Alert Control and Lane
Departure Warning functions will not have full
functionality either.
04
The following table presents possible causes
for a message being shown along with the
appropriate action.
Strong oncoming light, reflections in the carriageway, snow or ice on the road surface, dirty
road surfaces or unclear lane markings could
also significantly reduce camera sensor function when it is used to scan the carriageway
and detect pedestrians and other vehicles.
The field of vision of the camera sensor is limited, which is why pedestrians and vehicles
cannot be detected in some situations, or they
are detected later than anticipated.
During very high temperatures the camera is
temporarily switched off for about 15 minutes
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
175
04 Driver support
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Protection*
04
Cause
Action
Cause
Action
Cause
Action
The windscreen surface in front of the
camera is dirty or
covered with ice or
snow.
Clean the windscreen surface in
front of the camera
from dirt, ice and
snow.
The windscreen surface in front of the
camera has been
cleaned but the
message remains.
Wait. It may take
several minutes for
the camera to measure the visibility.
Dirt has appeared
between the inside
of the windscreen
and the camera.
Thick fog, heavy rain
or snow means that
the camera does not
work sufficiently
well.
No action. At times
the camera does not
work during heavy
rain or snowfall.
Visit a workshop to
have the windscreen
inside the camera
cover cleaned - an
authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
Symbols and messages in the display
Symbol
Message
Specification
Collis'n
warning
OFF
Collision warning system switched off.
Shown when the engine is started.
The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the OK button.
176
Collision
warn.
Unavailable
The collision warning system cannot be activated.
Auto braking was
activated
Auto Brake has been active.
Shown when the driver attempts to activate the function.
The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the OK button.
The message clears after one press of the OK button.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Driver support
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Protection*
Symbol
Message
Specification
Windscreen
Sensors
blocked
The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.
Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
• Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.
Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 175.
Radar
blocked
See manual
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is temporarily disengaged.
The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event of heavy rain or if slush has
collected in front of the radar sensor.
04
Read about the limitations of the radar sensor, see page 158.
Collision
warn.
Service
required
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is fully or partially disengaged.
• Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
177
04 Driver support
Driver Alert System*
General information on Driver Alert
System
The Driver Alert System is intended to assist
drivers whose driving ability is deteriorating or
who are inadvertently leaving the lane they are
driving on.
The Driver Alert System consists of different
functions which can either be switched on at
the same time or individually:
04
• Driver Alert Control – DAC, see page 179.
• Lane Departure Warning – LDW, see
page 182.
A switched-on function is set in standby mode
and is not activated automatically until speed
exceeds 65 km/h.
The function is deactivated again when speed
decreases to below 60 km/h.
Both functions use a camera which is dependent on the lane having side markings painted
on each side.
WARNING
The Driver Alert System does not work in all
situations but is instead only intended to be
of supplementary assistance.
The driver always has ultimate responsibility
that the car is driven safely.
178
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Driver support
Driver Alert System - DAC*
General information on DAC
The objective for DAC is to detect slowly deteriorating driving ability and it is primarily
intended for major roads. The function is not
intended for city traffic.
In some cases driving ability is not affected
despite driver fatigue. In which case there may
not be any warning issued for the driver. For
this reason it is always important to stop and
take a break in the event of any signs of driver
fatigue, irrespective of whether or not DAC
issues a warning.
Operation
Some settings are made from the centre console display screen and its menu system. For
information on how the menu system is used,
see page 200.
The current status of Driver Alert can be
checked on the trip computer display with the
thumbwheel on the left-hand stalk switch.
04
NOTE
The DAC (Driver Alert Control) function is
intended to attract the driver's attention when
he/she starts to drive less consistently, e.g. if
he/she becomes distracted or starts to fall
asleep.
A camera detects the side markings painted on
the carriageway and compares the section of
the road with the driver's steering wheel movements. The driver is alerted if the vehicle does
not follow the carriageway evenly.
NOTE
The camera sensor has certain limitations,
see page 175.
The function must not be used to extend a
driving stint. Always plan breaks at regular
intervals and ensure that you are fully
rested.
Limitation
In some cases the system may issue a warning
despite driving ability not deteriorating, for
example:
• if the driver tests the LDW function.
• in strong side winds.
• on rutted road surfaces.
Thumbwheel. Turn until the display shows
Driver
Alert . On the second row the options
Driver Alert Standby <65 km/h, Driver
Alert
Unavailable or level mark
shown.
can be
OK confirms or clears a warning in the
memory.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
179
04 Driver support
Driver Alert System - DAC*
On/Off
To set Driver Alert in standby mode:
• Search on the centre console's display
screen with its MY CAR menu system and
locate Car settings Driver support
systems Driver Alert and tick the box.
• No tick in the box: Function disengaged.
Function
04
The display shows a level mark with 1-5 bars,
where a low number of bars indicates inconsistent driving style. Many bars indicates stable
driving.
If the vehicle is driven inconsistently then the
driver is alerted by an acoustic signal as well as
the text message Driver Alert Time for a
break. The warning is repeated after a time if
driving ability does not improve.
Driver Alert is activated when speed
exceeds 65 km/h and remains active
as long as the speed is over
60 km/h.
WARNING
An alarm should be taken very seriously, as
a sleepy driver is often not aware of his/her
own condition.
In the event of an alarm or a feeling of tiredness; stop the car in a safe manner as soon
as possible and rest.
Studies have shown that it is equally as dangerous to drive while tired as it is under the
influence of alcohol.
Symbols and messages in the display
Symbol
Message
Specification
Driver Alert OFF
The function is disengaged.
Driver Alert Standby <65
km/h
The function is set in standby mode due to speed being lower than 65 km/h.
Driver Alert Unavailable
The carriageway does not have clear side markings or the camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.
Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 175.
Driver Alert
The function analyses the driver's driving style.
The number of bars can vary in the range 1-5, where a low number of bars indicates inconsistent
driving ability. A high number of bars indicates stable driving.
180
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Driver support
Driver Alert System - DAC*
Symbol
Message
Specification
Driver Alert Time for a
break
The vehicle has been driven inconsistently - the driver is alerted by an acoustic warning signal + text.
Windscreen Sensors
blocked
The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.
Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
• Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.
Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 175.
Driver Alert Sys Service
required
04
The system is disengaged.
• Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
181
04 Driver support
Driver Alert System - LDW*
General information on - LDW
Operation and function
If the camera can no longer detect the carriageway's side markings the display shows
Lane Depart Warn Unavailable.
If speed decreases to below 60 km/h then the
function resumes standby mode and the display shows Lane Depart Warn Standby <65
km/h.
If the vehicle crosses the left or right-hand side
marking of the carriageway without due cause
then the driver is alerted by an acoustic signal.
04
No warning is given in the following situations:
The LDW (Lane Departure Warning) function is
intended to reduce the risk of so-called singlevehicle accidents – accidents where, in certain
situations, the vehicle leaves the carriageway
and is in danger of driving either into a ditch or
into oncoming traffic.
LDW consists of a camera that detects the side
markings painted on the carriageway. The
driver is alerted by an acoustic signal if the
vehicle crosses a side marking.
1
182
The function is switched on or off by means of
a switch on the centre console. An indicator
lamp in the button illuminates when the function is switched on.
• Direction indicators activated
• The driver has his/her foot on the brake
pedal1
• In the event of the accelerator pedal being
depressed rapidly1
The trip computer display shows Lane Depart
Warn Standby <65 km/h when the function is
in standby mode due to speed being below 65
km/h.
• In the event of rapid steering wheel move-
The LDW function is activated automatically
from standby mode after the camera has scanned in the carriageway's side markings and
speed exceeds 65 km/h. The trip computer
display then shows Lane Depart Warn
Available.
The camera sensor also has certain limitations.
For more information, see page 175.
A warning is still given when Increased sensitivity is selected, see page 184.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
ments1
• In the event of a sudden turn so that the car
rolls.
04 Driver support
Driver Alert System - LDW*
NOTE
The driver is only warned once each time the
wheels cross a line. So there is no acoustic
alarm when there is a line between the car's
wheels.
Symbols and messages in the display
Symbol
Message
Specification
Lane departure warning
ON/Lane departure warning OFF
The function is switched on/off.
04
Shown at switch-on/off.
The text disappears after 5 seconds.
Lane Depart Warn Standby
<65 km/h
The function is set in standby mode due to speed being lower than 65 km/h.
Lane Depart Warn Unavailable
The carriageway does not have clear side markings or the camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.
Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 175.
Lane Depart Warn Available
The function scans the carriageway's side markings.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
183
04 Driver support
Driver Alert System - LDW*
Symbol
Message
Specification
Windscreen Sensors
blocked
The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.
Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
• Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.
Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 175.
Driver Alert Sys Service
required
The system is disengaged.
• Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
04
started. Otherwise the same value as when
the engine was switched off is obtained.
Personal preferences
Settings are made from the centre console's
display screen via the menu system in MY
CAR. From there, search and locate Settings
Car settings Driver support systems
Lane Departure Warning. For information
on how the menu system is used - see
page 200.
• Increased sensitivity - The sensitivity
Select from the options:
• On at start-up - The function enters
standby mode every time the engine is
184
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
increases, an alarm is triggered earlier and
fewer limitations apply.
04 Driver support
Park assist syst*
General
Function
Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking.
An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the
centre console's display screen indicate the
distance to the detected obstacle.
Parking assistance sound level can be
adjusted during the ongoing acoustic signal
using the centre console's VOL knob or in the
car's menu system MY CAR - see page 200.
Parking assistance is available in two variants:
04
• Rear only
• Both front and rear.
NOTE
When a towbar is configured with the car's
electrical system, the protrusion of the towbar is included when the function measures
the parking space.
WARNING
•
Parking assistance does not relinquish
the driver's own responsibility during
parking.
•
The sensors have blind spots where
obstacles cannot be detected.
•
Be aware of e.g. people or animals near
the car.
Display screen view - showing an obstacle left
front and right rear.
The system is automatically activated when the
engine is started - the switch's On/Off lamp is
illuminated. If parking assistance is switched
off with the button, the lamp goes out.
The centre console's display screen shows an
overview of the relationship between the car
and detected obstacle.
Marked sectors show which of the four sensor(s) detected an obstacle. The closer to the
car symbol a selected sector box is, the shorter
the distance between the car and a detected
obstacle.
The frequency of the signal increases the
shorter the distance to an obstacle, in front of
or behind the car. Other sound from the audio
system is muted automatically.
When the distance is within 30 cm the tone is
constant and the active sensor's field nearest
the car is filled in. If the detected obstacle is
within the distance for the constant tone both
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
185
04 Driver support
Park assist syst*
behind and in front of the car, then the tone
sounds alternately from the loudspeakers.
Rear parking assistance
Front parking assistance
The distance covered to the rear of the car is
about 1.5 metres. The acoustic signal for
obstacles behind comes from one of the rear
loudspeakers.
The distance covered in front of the car is about
0.8 metres. The acoustic signal for obstacles in
front comes from one of the front loudspeakers.
Rear parking assistance is activated when
reverse gear is engaged.
Front parking assistance is active up to
15 km/h. The lamp in the button is illuminated
in order to indicate that the system is activated.
When the speed is below 10 km/h the system
is reactivated.
IMPORTANT
Certain objects e.g. chains, thin glossy
poles or low barriers may be in the "signal
shadow" and are then temporarily not
detected by the sensors - the pulsating tone
may then unexpectedly stop instead of
changing over to the expected constant
tone.
04
•
In which case, pay extra attention and
manoeuvre/reposition the car particularly slowly or stop the current parking
manoeuvre - there may be a high risk of
damage to vehicles or other objects
since the sensors are unable to function
optimally.
The system must be deactivated when reversing with a trailer or bike carrier on the towbar
or similar - otherwise they would trigger the
sensors.
NOTE
Rear parking assistance is deactivated
automatically when towing a trailer if Volvo
genuine trailer wiring is used.
186
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
NOTE
Front parking assistance is deactivated
when the parking brake is applied or P mode
is selected in a car with an automatic gearbox.
04 Driver support
Park assist syst*
IMPORTANT
Cleaning the sensors
NOTE
When fitting auxiliary lamps: Remember that
they must not obscure the sensors – the
auxiliary lamps could then be detected as
obstacles.
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may
cause incorrect warning signals.
Fault indicator
G031402
If the information symbol illuminates
with constant glow and the information display shows Park assist syst Service
required then parking assistance is disengaged.
04
Sensor location, front.
IMPORTANT
In certain conditions the parking assistance
system may produce incorrect warning signals that are caused by external audio
sources that emit the same ultrasonic frequencies that the system works with.
Examples of such sources include horns,
wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and
exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.
Sensor location, rear.
The sensors must be cleaned regularly to
ensure that they work properly. Clean them
with water and car shampoo.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
187
04 Driver support
Park assist camera*
General
Function and operation
The parking camera is an assist system and is
activated when reverse gear is engaged (can
be changed in the settings menu, see
page 200).
The camera image is shown on the centre console's screen.
NOTE
04
When a towbar is configured with the car's
electrical system, the protrusion of the towbar is included when the function measures
the parking space.
WARNING
•
The parking camera serves as an aid. It
does not relieve the driver of responsibility when reversing.
•
The camera has blind spots, where
obstacles cannot be detected.
•
Be aware of people and animals in the
vicinity of the car.
CAM button location.
The camera shows what is behind the car and
if something appears from the sides.
The camera shows a wide area behind the car
and part of the bumper and any towbar.
If the car is also equipped with parking assistance sensors* then their information is displayed graphically as coloured fields in order to
illustrate the distance to detected obstacles,
see page 185.
The camera is active approx. 5 seconds after
reverse gear has been disengaged or until the
car's speed exceeds 10 km/h.
Objects on the screen may appear to tilt slightly
- this is normal.
NOTE
Objects on the display screen may be closer
to the car than they appear to be on the
screen.
If another view is active the parking camera
system takes over automatically and the camera image is displayed on the screen.
188
When reverse gear is engaged two unbroken
lines are shown graphically which illustrate
where the car's rear wheels will roll with the
current steering wheel angle, this facilitates
tight parking, reversing into tight spaces and
for hitching a trailer. The car’s approximate
external dimensions are illustrated by means of
two dashed lines. These help lines can be
switched off in the settings menu.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Camera location next to the opening handle.
04 Driver support
Park assist camera*
Light conditions
The camera image is adjusted automatically
according to prevailing light conditions.
Because of this, the image may vary slightly in
brightness and quality. Poor light conditions
can result in a slightly reduced image quality.
which shows the driver the path the car will
take, even when turning.
NOTE
•
When reversing with a trailer which is
not connected electrically to the car, the
lines on the display show the route the
car will take - not the trailer.
•
The screen shows no lines when a trailer
is connected electrically to the car's
electrical system.
•
The parking camera is deactivated
automatically when towing a trailer if a
Volvo genuine trailer cable is used.
NOTE
Keep the camera lens clear of dirt, snow and
ice to ensure optimum function. This is particularly important in poor light.
Park assist lines
IMPORTANT
The lines on the screen are projected as if they
were at ground level behind the car and are
directly related to steering wheel movement,
04
The system's lines.
Boundary line, 30 cm zone backwards
from the car
Boundary line, free reversing zone
Bear in mind that the screen only shows the
area behind the car - pay attention to the
sides and front of the car when manoeuvring
during reversing.
Examples of how the park assist lines can be displayed for the driver.
Boundary lines
"Wheel tracks"
The unbroken line (1) frames in a zone that is
within about 30 cm from the bumper.
The dashed line (2) frames in a zone up to
about 1.5 m back from the bumper. It is also
the limit of the car's most protruding parts,
such as door mirrors and corners - also during
turning.
The wide "wheel tracks" (3) between the side
lines indicate where the wheels will roll and can
extend about 3.2 m back from the bumper if no
obstacle is in the way.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
189
04 Driver support
Park assist camera*
Cars with reversing sensors*
Colour / paint
Distance
(metres)
Yellow
1.5–
Orange
0.3–1.5
Red
0–0.3
Settings
Press OK/MENU when a camera view is
shown. Make the settings as desired.
04
Miscellaneous
Coloured areas (x 4, one per sensor) show distance.
• The default setting is that the camera is
If the car is also equipped with parking assistance sensors (see page 185) the distance indication will be more precise and the coloured
areas show which of the 4 sensors is/are registering an obstacle.
• One press on CAM activates the camera
The colour of the areas changes with decreasing distance to the obstacle - from yellow to
orange to red.
190
activated when reverse gear is engaged.
even if reverse gear is not engaged.
• Change between normal and zoomed
image by turning TUNE or by pressing
CAM.
• If the car has more cameras* installed then
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
the camera in use is changed by turning
TUNE.
Limitations
NOTE
A bike carrier or other accessory mounted
on the rear of the car could obscure the
camera's view.
Pay attention to the possibility that, even if it
only looks like a relatively small part of the
image is obscured, it could be a relatively large
sector that is hidden from view. Obstacles
could thereby go undetected until they are very
close to the car.
To bear in mind
• Keep the camera lens free from dirt, ice
and snow.
• Clean the camera lens regularly with lukewarm water and car shampoo - take care
not to scratch the lens.
04 Driver support
BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System
General information on BLIS
WARNING
G021426
The system is a supplement to, not a
replacement for, a safe driving style and use
of the rearview mirrors. It can never replace
the driver's attention and responsibility. The
responsibility for changing lanes safely
always rests with the driver.
Rearview mirror with BLIS function1.
BLIS camera
Indicator lamp
BLIS symbol
BLIS is an information system based on camera technology that under certain conditions
can help the driver to notice vehicles moving in
the same direction as the host vehicle in the socalled "blind spot".
1
If necessary, the system can be switched off
temporarily, see the section "Activate/deactivate".
Blind spots
The system is designed to work most effectively when driving in dense traffic on multi-lane
highways.
04
When a camera (1) has detected a vehicle
inside the blind spot zone the indicator lamp (2)
illuminates with a constant glow.
NOTE
The lamp illuminates on the side of the car
where the system has detected the vehicle.
If the car is overtaken on both sides at the
same time then both lamps illuminate.
A = approx. 9.5 m and B = approx. 3.0 m.
BLIS advises the driver with a message if a fault
arises in the system. If for example the system's cameras are obscured then the BLIS
indicator lamp flashes and a message is shown
on the information display. In such cases,
check and clean the lenses.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
191
04 Driver support
BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System
Activate/deactivate
When BLIS is deactivated, the lamp in the button goes out and a message is shown in the
instrument panel display.
When BLIS is activated the light in the button
illuminates, a new text message is shown on
the display and the indicator lamps in the door
panels flash 3 times. Press the OK button to
delete the text message. (For a description of
messages - see page 198).
04
When BLIS operates
Button for activating/deactivating.
BLIS is activated when the engine is started.
The indicator lamps in the door panels flash
three times when BLIS is activated.
The system can be deactivated/activated after
starting the engine with one press on the
BLIS button.
Some combinations of the selected equipment
leave no vacant space for a button in the centre
console - in which case the function is handled
by the car's menu system MY CAR under
Settings Car settings BLIS. (For a
description of the menu system - see
page 200).
192
The system operates when the car is driven at
a speed above 10 km/h.
Overtaking
The system is designed to react if:
• you overtake another vehicle at a speed of
up to 10 km/h faster than the other vehicle
• you are overtaken by a vehicle travelling up
to 70 km/h faster than you are travelling.
WARNING
BLIS does not work in sharp bends.
BLIS does not work when the car is reversing.
A wide trailer coupled to the car can conceal
other vehicles in adjacent lanes. It can prevent the vehicle in the screened area from
being detected by BLIS.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Daylight and darkness
In daylight the system reacts to the shape of
the surrounding vehicles. The system is
designed to detect motor vehicles such as
cars, trucks, buses and motorcycles.
In darkness the system reacts to the headlamps of surrounding vehicles. If the headlamps of surrounding vehicles are not switched
on then the system does not detect the vehicles. This means for example that the system
does not react to a trailer without headlamps
which is towed behind a car or truck.
WARNING
The system does not react to cyclists or
moped riders.
The BLIS cameras have limitations similar to
those of the human eye, i.e. they do not
"see" as well e.g. in heavy snowfall, against
strong light or in thick fog.
04 Driver support
BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System
Cleaning
Message
In order to work most effectively the BLIS camera lenses must be clean. The lenses can be
cleaned with a soft cloth or damp sponge.
Clean the lenses carefully so that they are not
scratched.
Blind spot syst.
Reduced function
IMPORTANT
Messages on the display
Specification
Blind-spot info
system ON
The BLIS system is
activated.
Blind spot syst.
Service required
Blind spot syst. disengaged - contact a
workshop.
Blind spot syst.
Camera blocked
The BLIS camera is
blocked by dirt,
snow or ice - clean
the lenses.
Reduced function in
the data transmission between the
BLIS system's camera and the car's
electrical system.
The camera resets
itself when the data
transmission
between the BLIS
system's camera
and the car's electrical system returns to
normal.
The lenses are electrically heated to melt ice
or snow. If necessary, brush snow away
from the lenses.
Message
Limitations
Specification
Blind-spot info
system OFF
The BLIS system is
deactivated.
In some situations the BLIS indicator lamp may
illuminate despite there being no other vehicle
within the blind spot.
NOTE
If the BLIS indicator lamp illuminates on isolated occasions despite there being no
other vehicle within the blind spot then this
does not mean that a fault has arisen in the
system.
04
In the event of a fault in the BLIS system the
display shows the text Blind spot syst.
Service required.
The following illustrations show examples of
situations where the BLIS indicator lamp may
illuminate even if there is no other vehicle within
the blind spot.
IMPORTANT
Repair of the BLIS system components
must only be performed by a workshop - an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Reflection from shiny wet road surface.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
193
04 Driver support
BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System
04
Own shadow on large light smooth surface, e.g.
noise barrier or concrete road surface.
Low stationary sunlight shining into the camera.
194
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Driver support
04
195
Menus and messages...........................................................................
Menu source MY CAR..........................................................................
Climate control......................................................................................
Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*
Additional heater*..................................................................................
Trip computer........................................................................................
Adapting driving characteristics...........................................................
Comfort inside the passenger compartment........................................
196
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
198
200
208
218
221
222
224
225
COMFORT AND DRIVING PLEASURE
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menus and messages
Combined instrument panel
be acknowledged with OK for the menus to be
shown.
Message
Menu overview
Some of the following menu options require the
function and hardware to be installed in the car.
---- km to empty tank
--.- l/100km average
--.- l/100km instantaneous
--- km/h average speed
--- km/h current speed1
Information display and controls for menus.
OK – access to message list and message
confirmation.
05
Thumbwheel – browse between menu
options.
RESET – reset the active function. Used in
certain cases to select/activate a function,
see the explanation under each respective
function.
The menus shown on the information displays
in the combined instrument panel are controlled with the left-hand stalk switch. The
menus shown depend on key position, see
page 78. If a message appears then this must
1
2
3
198
Engine oil level Wait...*
Text message in the information display.
Tyre pressure Calibration*
When a warning, information or indicator symbol illuminates, a corresponding message
appears on the information display. An error
message is stored in a memory list until the
fault has been rectified.
Park heat timer --:--
---*2
Direct start Park heat ON*3
Additional heat auto ON*
Lane Depart Warn *
Driver Alert *
Only certain markets.
Programming is only possible when the engine is switched off.
Cannot be selected when the additional heater is operating.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Press OK to acknowledge and browse
between the messages.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menus and messages
NOTE
If a warning message appears while you are
using the trip computer, the message must
be read (press OK) before the previous
activity can be resumed.
Message
Specification
Stop safelyA
Stop and switch off the
engine. Serious risk of
damage - consult a
workshopB.
Stop engineA
Service urgentA
Service
requiredA
Message
Specification
Message
Specification
Time for regular
maintenance
Time for regular service
- contact a workshopB.
The timing is determined by the number of
kilometres driven, number of months since the
last service, engine running time and oil grade.
Transmission
hot Reduce
speed
Drive more smoothly or
stop the car in a safe
manner. Disengage the
gear and run the engine
at idling speed until the
message clearsC.
Transmission
hot Stop safely
Critical fault. Stop the
car immediately in a
safe manner and contact a workshopB.
Temporarily
OFFA
A function has been
temporarily switched
off and is reset automatically while driving
or after starting again.
Low battery
Power save
mode
The audio system is
switched off to save
energy. Charge the battery.
Maintenance
overdue
Stop and switch off the
engine. Serious risk of
damage - consult a
workshopB.
Contact a workshopB to
check the car immediately.
Contact a workshopB to
check the car as soon
as possible.
See manualA
Read the owner's manual.
Book time for
maintenance
Time to book regular
service - contact a
workshopB.
If the service intervals
are not followed then
the warranty does not
cover any damaged
parts - contact a workshopB.
Transmission
oil Change needed
Contact a workshopB to
check the car as soon
as possible.
Transmission
performance
low
The gearbox cannot
handle full capacity.
Drive carefully until the
message clearsC.
If shown repeatedly contact a workshopB.
A
B
C
05
Part of message, shown together with information on where
the problem has arisen.
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
For more messages concerning automatic transmission, see
page 124.
199
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menu source MY CAR
General information on MY CAR
Many of the car's functions are handled
in this menu source, such as setting the
clock, door mirrors and locks.
Operation
Centre console controls
Navigation in the menus is carried out using
buttons on the centre console or with the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
input characters are deleted
most recent selections are undone
leads up in the menu system
A long press leads to the highest menu level
(Main source view), from where all of the car's
functions/menu sources can be accessed see also page 234.
Centre console controls for menu navigation.
Press MY CAR to open the menus under
MY CAR.
Press OK MENU to select/tick in the highlighted menu option or to store the
selected function in the memory.
Turn the TUNE knob to scroll up/down
among the menu options.
EXIT
EXIT functions
Depending on the function the cursor is on
when EXIT is pressed, and on the menu level,
one of the following occurs:
200
phone call is rejected
current function is interrupted
Short and long presses can also produce varying results.
Certain functions are standard, others are
optional - the range also varies depending on
the market.
05
•
•
•
•
•
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menu source MY CAR
Steering wheel keypad*
The following is an example of how a function
can be accessed and adjusted using the steering wheel keypad:
MY CAR
The following options are available in menu
source MY CAR:
1. Press the centre console button MY CAR.
2. Scroll to the desired menu, e.g. Settings,
with the thumbwheel (1) and then press the
thumbwheel - a submenu opens.
3. Scroll to the desired menu, e.g. Car
settings and press the thumbwheel - a
submenu opens.
The keypad may vary depending on market.
Turn the thumbwheel knob to scroll up/
down among the menu options.
Press the thumbwheel to select/tick in the
highlighted menu option or to store the
selected function in the memory.
EXIT (see heading "EXIT functions" page
200).
Search paths
Current menu level is shown at the top right of
the centre console display screen. Search
paths to the menu system functions are described in this manual in the following form:
Settings Car settings Lock settings
Doors unlock Driver door, then all.
4. Scroll to Lock settings and press the
thumbwheel - a new submenu opens.
5. Scroll to Doors unlock and press the
thumbwheel - a submenu of selectable
functions opens.
05
6. Choose between the options All doors
and Driver door, then all and press the
thumbwheel - a cross is marked in the
option's empty box.
•
•
•
•
My XC60
DRIVe*
Support systems
Settings
7. Exit the programming by backing out of the
menus incrementally with short presses on
EXIT (2) or with one long press.
The procedure is the same as with the centre
console's buttons - see page 200: OK MENU
(2), EXIT (4) and the TUNE knob (3).
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
201
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menu source MY CAR
My XC60
Shown here are the 4 first menu levels under
MY CAR Settings. Some menus have further submenus - these are then described in
detail in their respective sections.
Driver support system
When selecting whether a function should be
activated/On or deactivated/Off a square is
displayed:
On: Selected square.
Off: Empty square.
• Select On/Off with OK - then back out of
the menu with EXIT.
MY CAR
05
My XC60
MY CAR
The display screen shows a grouping of all of
the car's driver support systems - these can be
activated or deactivated here.
The display screen shows a summary of the
current status of the car's driver support systems.
My DRIVe*
Setup - menus
Parts of Volvo's DRIVe concept are described
here, amongst other things.
The menus are structured as follows:
• Start/Stop
• Eco driving guide
For more information - see page 126.
Menu level 1
p. x
Menu level 2
Menu level 4
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Car key memory
On
Off
Menu level 3
202
Car settings
Support systems
p. 81
and
103
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menu source MY CAR
Lock settings
Automatic door locking
p. 48,
55 and
57
On
p. 46
Light settings
Triple indicator
Door lock confirmation
light
On
Off
On
Off
Off
Doors unlock
Temporary LH traffic
Unlock confirmation light
All doors
Off
Off
Keyless entry
Approach light duration
All doors
p. 94
On
On
Driver door, then
all
p. 92
or
p. 48
and 94
Temporary RH traffic
Any door
Off
On
Doors on same
side
30 sec
Off
Both front doors
90 sec
60 sec
Active bending lights
05
p. 90
On
Reduced Guard
Activate once
p. 60
and 64
Fold mirrors
Off
30 sec
Ask when exiting
Side mirror settings
Home safe light duration
p. 94
60 sec
p. 103
90 sec
Auxiliary lights
p. 91
On
Off
Tilt left mirror
Tilt right mirror
``
203
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menu source MY CAR
Steering wheel force
p. 224
Lane Departure Warning
p. 182
Low
On
On
Medium
Off
Off
High
On at start-up
Driver Alert
On
Reset car settings
System options
On
Off
Collision Warning
p. 146
On
Off
Long
12 h
City Safety
Normal
On
Short
Off
p. 9
and
165
Warning sound
On
Off
p. 191
BLIS
On
Off
204
The instrument panel clock is set
here.
Time format
Off
Warning distance
p. 75
Time
p. 170
DSTC
On
p. 179
Off
Increased sensitivity
Driver support systems
p. 162
On
Off
All menus in Car settings are
given original factory settings.
05
Distance Alert
24 h
p. 75
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menu source MY CAR
Screen saver
p. 200
Temperature unit
On
Celsius
Off
Fahrenheit
The TV screen's current content
fades out after a period of inactivity and is replaced by a blank
screen if this option is selected.
Selects the unit for the display of
outside temperature and setting
of the climate control system.
Volume levels
The current screen content
returns if any of the TV screen's
buttons or controls are actuated.
Voice output volume
Voice command list
Phone commands
Phone
Phone call contact
Phone dial number
Navigation commands
Front park assist volume
Navigation
Language
Rear park assist volume
Selects language for menu texts.
Phone ringing volume
Navigation
repeat instruction
Show help text
Reset system options
On
All menus in System options are
given original factory settings.
Off
Explanatory text for the display
screen's current content is shown
with this option selected.
Distance and fuel units
MPG (UK)
MPG (US)
km/l
Voice settings
Voice tutorial
p. 222
This menu option + OK provides
spoken information about how
the system works.
05
Navigation go to
address
General commands
Help
Cancel
Voice tutorial
The menu options under Phone
commands show several examples of available voice commands
- only with a BluetoothŸ-enabled
mobile phone installed. For more
l/100km
``
205
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menu source MY CAR
and detailed information - see
page 261.
The menu options under Navigation commands show several
examples of available voice commands - only with Volvo's navigation system RTI* installed.
Voice user setting
Default setting
User 1
User 2
05
Here there is the option to create
a second user profile - an advantage if more than one person shall
use the car/system regularly.
Default setting gives factory settings.
Voice training
User 1
User 2
With Voice training the voice
recognition system is taught to
recognise the driver's voice and
pronunciation. A number of phrases are presented on the screen
for the driver to read aloud. When
the system has learnt how the
driver talks, the presentation of
the phrases stops. Following
which e.g. User 1 can be
selected in Voice user setting in
order that the system shall listen
to the right user.
Voice output volume
A volume control appears on the
screen - at which point, proceed
as follows:
1. Adjust the volume with the
thumbwheel.
2. Test-listen using OK.
3. Use EXIT to store the setting
and the menu is switched off.
206
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Voice POI list
Edit list
The number of facilities is extensive and varies depending on
market. Maximum 30 favourite
facilities can be stored in this list.
Menu option Voice POI list is
only shown if Volvo's navigation
system RTI* is installed. For more
information on Facilities and
Voice recognition - see the Navigation system's owner's manual.
Audio settings
Climate settings
p. 233
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menu source MY CAR
Automatic blower adjustment
p. 208
Normal
High
Low
Recirculation timer
On
Number of keys
p. 46
VIN number
p. 372
DivX® VOD code
p. 254
Bluetooth software version in
car
p. 260
Off
Map and software version*
Automatic rear defroster
Only in cars with Volvo GPS navigator - see separate manual.
On
Off
Interior air quality system
05
On
Off
Reset climate settings
All menus in Climate settings
are given original factory settings.
Favourites (FAV)
p. 238
Volvo On Call
Described in a separate manual.
Information
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
207
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
General
Climate control
The car is equipped with electronic climate
control. The climate control system cools or
heats as well as dehumidifies the air in the passenger compartment.
NOTE
The air conditioning system (AC) can be
switched off, but to ensure the best possible
climate comfort in the passenger compartment and to prevent the windows from misting, it should always be on.
05
• The sun sensor is located on the top side
of the dashboard.
• The temperature sensor for the passenger
compartment is located below the climate
control panel.
• The outside temperature sensor is located
on the door mirror.
• The humidity sensor* is located by the interior rearview mirror.
The system includes a sun sensor which
detects on which side the sun is shining into
the passenger compartment. This means1 that
the temperature can differ between the right
and left-hand air vents despite the controls
being set for the same temperature on both
sides.
1
Temporary shut-off of the air
conditioning
When the engine requires full power, e.g. for full
acceleration or driving uphill with a trailer, the
air conditioning can be temporarily switched
off. There may then be a temporary increase in
temperature in the passenger compartment.
Condensation
In warm weather, condensation from the air
conditioning may drip under the car. This is
normal.
NOTE
Do not cover or block the sensors with
clothing or other objects.
Actual temperature
The temperature you select corresponds to the
physical experience with reference to factors
such as air speed, humidity and solar radiation
etc. in and around the car.
208
Sensor location
Ice and snow
Remove ice and snow from the climate control
system air intake (the grille between the bonnet
and the windscreen).
Side windows and panorama roof
To ensure that the air conditioning works optimally the side windows, and panorama roof if
appropriate, should be closed.
Misting windows
Remove misting on the insides of the windows
by primarily using the defroster function.
To reduce the risk of misting, keep the windows clean and use window cleaner.
Only applies to ECC.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Total airing function
The function opens/closes all side windows
simultaneously and can be used for example to
quickly air the car during hot weather, see
page 57.
Passenger compartment filter
All air entering the car's passenger compartment is cleaned with a filter. This must be
replaced at regular intervals. Follow the Volvo
Service Programme for the recommended
replacement intervals. If the car is used in a
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
severely contaminated environment, it may be
necessary to replace the filter more often.
NOTE
There are different types of passenger compartment filter. Make sure that the correct
filter is fitted.
• Fan speed in automatic mode*, see
NOTE
page 214.
To keep the CZIP standard in cars with CZIP
the IAQS filter must be changed after
15 000 km or once per year depending on
whichever occurs first. However, up to
75 000 km over 5 years. In cars without CZIP
and where the customer does not want to
keep the CZIP standard the IAQS filter must
be changed at a regular service.
Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)*
This option keeps the passenger compartment
clear of allergy and asthma inducing substances. For more information on CZIP, see the
brochure included with the purchase of the car.
The following is included:
• An enhanced fan function that means that
the fan starts when the car is opened with
the remote control key. The fan fills the
passenger compartment with fresh air. The
function starts when required and is disengaged automatically after a time or when
one of the passenger compartment doors
is opened. The amount of time the fan runs
is reduced gradually due to reduced need
up until the car is 4 years old.
• The air quality system IAQS is a fully automatic system that cleans the air in the passenger compartment from contaminants
such as particles, hydrocarbons, nitrous
oxides and ground-level ozone.
Use of tested materials in the interior
equipment.
The materials have been developed in order to
minimise the quantity of dust in the passenger
compartment and they contribute to making
the passenger compartment easier to keep
clean. The carpets in both the passenger compartment and the cargo area are removable
and easy to remove and clean. Use cleaning
agents and car care products recommended
by Volvo, see page 366.
• Recirculation timer for passenger compartment air, see page 215.
• Automatic rear window defrosting, see
page 104.
• Air quality system IAQS*, see page 215
The climate control system's functions can be
reset to the default settings via the menu system in MY CAR and this is carried out under:
Settings Climate settings Reset
climate settings.
Air distribution
05
Menu settings
It is possible to activate/deactivate or change
the default settings for four of the climate control system's functions via the centre console.
For general information about menu navigation, see page 201:
The incoming air is divided between a number
of different vents in the passenger compartment.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
209
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
Lateral airflow
Air distribution is fully automatic in AUTO
mode*.
If necessary it can be controlled manually, see
page 217.
Air vents in the dashboard
Vertical airflow
Aim the outer vents at the side windows to
remove misting.
Air vents in the door pillars
Aim the vents at the windows to remove misting in cold weather.
Aim the vents into the passenger compartment
to maintain a comfortable climate in the rear
seat in hot weather.
NOTE
Remember that small children may be sensitive to air flows and draughts.
05
Open
Closed
Closed
Open
Lateral airflow
Vertical airflow
210
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
Electronic climate control, ECC*
05
Temperature control, left-hand side
Air distribution - air vent instrument panel
Temperature control, right-hand side
Electrically heated front seat, left-hand
side
Air distribution - defroster windscreen
Recirculation
Rear window and door mirror defrosters,
see page 104
AUTO
Max. defroster
Fan
Air distribution - ventilation floor
Electrically heated front seat, right-hand
side
AC – – Air conditioning on/off
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
211
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
Electronic Temperature Control, ETC
05
Fan
Recirculation
Electrically heated front seat, left-hand
side
Electrically heated front seat, right-hand
side
AC – – Air conditioning on/off
Temperature control
Max. defroster
Air distribution - ventilation floor
Air distribution - air vent instrument panel
Air distribution - defroster windscreen
Rear window and door mirror defrosters,
see page 104
212
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
Operating the controls
Heated seats*
Front seats
Press the button three times for the lowest heat
level – one orange lamp illuminates in the TV
screen.
Press the button four times to switch off the
heat – no lamps illuminate.
WARNING
The heated seat should not be used by people who find it difficult to perceive temperature increase because of sensory loss or for
any reason have difficulty in managing to
use the control of the heated seat. Otherwise, burn injuries may arise.
Rear seat2
Current heat level is shown in the centre console
TV screen.
One press on the button gives
the highest heat level - three
orange lamps illuminate in the
centre console TV screen (see
figure above).
Press the button twice for a
lower heat level – two orange lamps illuminate
in the TV screen.
2
Press the button once for the highest heat level
– three lamps illuminate.
Press the button twice for a lower heat level –
two lamps illuminate.
Press the button three times for the lowest heat
level – one lamp illuminates.
Press the button four times to switch off the
heat – no lamps illuminate.
Fan
NOTE
If the fan is fully switched off then the air
conditioning is not engaged - which can
cause a risk of misting on the windows.
05
Fan knob for ECC*
Turn the knob to increase or
decrease fan speed. If AUTO
is selected then fan speed is
regulated automatically. The
previously set fan speed is
disengaged.
Not included if 2-stage booster cushion is selected.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
213
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
Fan knob for ETC
Turn the knob to increase or
decrease fan speed.
figure shows the air distribution that is
selected. For more information on air distribution, see page 217.
Air distribution
when AUTO is pressed. The TV screen shows
AUTO CLIMATE.
Fan speed in automatic mode can be set in the
menu system MY CAR under: Settings
Climate settings Automatic blower
adjustment. Choose between Low, Normal
or High:
• Low - Automatic fan control. Low airflow
is prioritised.
• Normal - Automatic fan control.
• High - Automatic fan control. A more
intense airflow is prioritised.
05
The selected air distribution is shown in the centre
console TV screen.
AUTO1
The Auto function automatically regulates temperature,
air conditioning, fan speed,
recirculation, and air distribution.
Air distribution - defroster windscreen
Air distribution - air vent instrument panel
Air distribution - ventilation floor
The figure consists of three buttons. When
pressing the buttons the corresponding figure
is illuminated in the TV screen (see figure
below) and an arrow in front of each part of the
1
214
If you select one or more manual functions, the
other functions continue to be controlled automatically. All manual settings are disengaged
Only applies to ECC.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
For a description of the menu system, see
page 201.
Temperature control
The temperature can be
adjusted with the knob. For
ECC* the temperature for the
driver's side and the passenger side can be set separately.
When the car is started, the most recent setting
is resumed.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
NOTE
Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by
selecting a higher/lower temperature than
the actual temperature required.
The following also takes place in order to provide maximum dehumidification in the passenger compartment:
• the air conditioning is automatically
IMPORTANT
If the air in the car recirculates for too long,
there is a risk of misting on the insides of the
windows.
engaged
AC – Air conditioning on/off
When the lamp in the AC button illuminates, the air conditioning is controlled by the
system's automatic function.
This way, incoming air is
cooled and dehumidified.
When the lamp in the AC button is switched off
the air conditioning is disconnected. Other
functions are still controlled automatically.
When the max. defroster function is activated
the air conditioning is switched on automatically, so that the air is dehumidified at the maximum setting.
Max. defroster
Used to quickly remove misting and ice from the windscreen and side windows. Air
flowing to the windows. The
light in the defroster button
illuminates when the function
is active.
• recirculation and the air quality system are
automatically disengaged.
NOTE
The noise level increases as the fan is operating at max.
When the defroster is switched off the climate
control returns to the previous settings.
Timer
With the timer function activated the system
will exit manually activated recirculation mode
according to a time that depends on the outside temperature. This reduces the risk of ice,
misting and bad air. Activate/deactivate the
function in the menu system MY CAR under
Settings Climate settings
Recirculation timer. For a description of the
menu system, see page 201.
05
Recirculation
NOTE
Recirculation
When recirculation is
engaged the orange lamp in
the button illuminates. The
function is selected to shut
out bad air, exhaust gases
etc. from the passenger compartment. The air in the passenger compartment is recirculated, i.e. no
outside air is taken into the car when this function is activated.
When max. defroster is selected, recirculation is always deactivated.
Air quality system IAQS*
The air quality system separates gases and
particles to reduce the levels of odours and
pollution in the passenger compartment. If the
outside air is contaminated then the air intake
is closed and the air is recirculated.
Activate/deactivate the function in the menu
system MY CAR under Settings Climate
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
215
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
settings Interior air quality system. For a
description of the menu system, see
page 201.
NOTE
Cars with Eco Start/Stop DRIVe*
With an auto-stopped engine certain equipment has its function temporarily reduced, e.g.
climate control fan speed. For more information, see page 126.
The air quality sensor should always be
engaged in order to obtain the best air in the
passenger compartment.
Recirculation is limited in cold weather to
avoid misting.
05
216
If the insides of the windows start misting
up, disengage the air quality sensor, and the
defroster functions for the windscreen, the
side and the rear windows should also be
used to demist the windows.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
Air distribution table
Air distribution
Use
Air distribution
Use
Air to windows. Some air
flows from the air vents.
The air is not recirculated.
Air conditioning is always
engaged.
to remove ice and misting
quickly.
Air to the floor and windows. Some air flows
from the dashboard air
vents.
to ensure comfortable
conditions and good
demisting in cold or
humid weather.
Air to windscreen, via
defroster vent, and side
windows. Some air flows
from the air vents.
to prevent misting and
icing in a cold and humid
climate, (not at too low
fan speed to enable this).
Air to floor and from
dashboard air vents.
in sunny weather with
cool outside temperatures.
Airflow to windows and
from dashboard air vents.
to ensure good comfort in
warm, dry weather.
Air to floor. Some air
flows to the dashboard
air vents and windows.
to direct heat or cold to
the floor.
Airflow to the head and
chest from the dashboard
air vents.
to ensure efficient cooling
in warm weather.
Airflow to windows,
from dashboard air
vents and to the floor.
to provide cooler air
along the floor or warmer
air higher up in cold
weather or hot, dry
weather.
05
217
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*
Fuel-driven heater
Refuelling
If the battery has insufficient charge or the fuel
level is too low, the parking heater will be
switched off automatically and a message
appears on the information display. Acknowledge the message by pressing the indicator
stalk OK button once, see page 219.
General information about the parking
heater
The parking heater heats the engine and passenger compartment and can be started
directly or with the timer.
Two different times can be selected using the
timer. Here, time refers to the time when the car
is heated and ready. The car's electronic system calculates when heating should be started
based on the outside temperature.
05
The heater cannot start if the outside temperature exceeds 15 °C. At –5 °C or lower the
maximum running time of the parking heater is
50 minutes.
WARNING
The car must be outdoors when the parking
heater is used.
NOTE
When the parking heater is active there may
be smoke from the right-hand wheel housing, which is perfectly normal.
218
Battery and fuel
IMPORTANT
Repeated use of the parking heater combined with short journeys may discharge the
battery and impair starting.
Warning label on fuel filler flap.
WARNING
Fuel which spills out can be ignited. Switch
off the fuel-driven heater before starting to
refuel.
Check the information display to see that
the parking heater is switched off. When it
is running, the information display shows
Park heat ON.
Parking on a hill
If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of
the car should point downhill to ensure that
there is a supply of fuel to the parking heater.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The car should be driven for the same time
as the heater is used to ensure that the car's
battery is recharged adequately to replace
the energy consumed by the heater when it
is used on a regular basis.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*
NOTE
Symbol
- Figure 2 in the symbol means the
second climate control system in the car,
where the normal climate control system is
the first. The figure 2 has nothing to do with
TIMER 1 or TIMER 2.
Thumbwheel
G025102
OK button
For more information on the information display and OK, see page 198.
Symbols and display messages
When one of the timer's settings or
Direct start is activated, the information symbol in the combined instrument
panel illuminates while the information display
shows an explanatory text and a further illuminated symbol. The table shows symbols and
display texts that appear.
G025102
RESET - resets/selects
Specification
Fuel
heater
ON
The heater is
switched on and
running.
Timer is
set for
Fuel
heater
The heater's timer
is activated after
the remote control
key has been
removed from the
ignition switch and
leaving the car the engine and
passenger compartment are
heated at the set
time.
G025102
Display
G025102
Symbol
G025102
G025102
Operation
Display
Specification
Heater
stopped
Batt. save
mode
The heater has
been stopped by
the car's electronics in order to facilitate starting the
engine.
Heater
unavail.
Low fuel
level
Setting the heater
is not possible due
to fuel level being
too low
(approx. 7 litres) this is in order to
facilitate starting
the engine as well
as approx. 50 km
driving.
Park
heater
Service
required
05
Heater not working. Contact a
workshop for
repair. Volvo recommends that you
contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
219
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*
A display text clears automatically after a time
or after one press on the indicator stalk OK
button.
Direct start and immediate stop
1. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Direct start
Park heat.
2. Press RESET to select between ON and
OFF.
ON: Parking heater switched on manually or
with programmed timer.
05
Setting the timer
The time when the car shall be used and heated
is specified with the timer.
Select between TIMER 1 and TIMER 2.
NOTE
The timer can only be programmed when
the remote control key is in key position I,
see page 78 - programming must therefore
be carried out before starting the engine.
OFF: Parking heater switched off.
1. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Park heat
timer 1.
Following the direct start of the heater it will be
activated for 50 minutes.
2. Briefly press RESET to move to the flashing hours setting.
Heating of the passenger compartment will
begin as soon as the engine coolant has
reached the correct temperature.
3. Select the required hour using the thumbwheel.
NOTE
The car can be started and driven while the
parking heater is running.
4. Briefly press RESET to move to the flashing minutes setting.
5. Select the required minute using the
thumbwheel.
6. Briefly press RESET to confirm the setting.
7. Press RESET to activate the timer.
After setting Park heat timer 1 a second start
time can be programmed with Park heat timer
2 by scrolling to it with the thumbwheel.
220
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Set the alternative time in the same way as
Park heat timer 1.
Deactivating a timer-started heater
A timer-started heater can be switched off
manually before the set time has elapsed. Proceed as follows:
1. Press OK.
2. Use the thumbwheel to scroll to the text
Park heat timer 1 or 2.
> The text ON flashes on the display.
3. Press RESET.
> The text OFF is shown with a constant
glow and the heater is switched OFF.
A timer-started heater can be switched off in
accordance with the instructions in the section
"Direct start and immediate stop", see
page 220.
Clock/timer
The heater's time is connected to the car's
clock.
NOTE
All timer programming will be cleared if the
car's clock is reset.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Additional heater*
General information about the
additional heater
Passenger compartment heater*
If the additional heater is supplemented with
timer function then it can be used as a fueldriven passenger compartment heater, see
page 218.
In cold climate zones1 an additional heater may
be required to obtain the correct operating
temperature in the engine and to obtain sufficient heating in the passenger compartment.
Electric additional heater
Cars with certain petrol engines2 have an electric additional heater integrated into the car's
climate control system.
Fuel-driven additional heater
A fuel-driven additional heater is fitted in cars
with diesel engines.
The heater starts automatically when extra
heat is required when the engine is running.
The heater is switched off automatically when
the correct temperature is reached or when the
engine is switched off.
NOTE
When the additional heater is active there
may be smoke from the right-hand wheel
housing which is perfectly normal.
Auto mode or shutdown
The additional heater's automatic start
sequence can be switched off if required.
In a semi-cold1 climate zone diesel-driven cars
have an electric additional heater instead of a
fuel-driven version.
OK button
Thumbwheel
RESET button
1. Before starting the engine: Select key position I, see page 78.
2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Additional
heat auto.
The heater cannot be controlled manually but
is instead activated automatically after the
engine has been started in outside temperatures below 14 °C and is switched off after the
set passenger compartment temperature has
been reached.
05
3. Press RESET to select between ON and
OFF.
NOTE
The menu options are only visible in key
position I - any adjustments must therefore
be made before starting the engine.
1
2
An authorised Volvo dealer has information regarding the geographical areas concerned.
An authorised Volvo dealer has information regarding the engines concerned.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
221
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Trip computer
General
Functions
NOTE
If a warning message appears when the trip
computer is used then the message must
first be acknowledged before the trip computer can be reactivated. Acknowledge the
warning message by pressing OK.
To change unit for distance and speed - go to
MY CAR Settings System options
Distance and fuel units, see page 200.
Information display and controls.
05
OK - confirms.
Thumbwheel – browse between menus
and options in the trip computer list.
RESET – resets.
The trip computer's menu is in a variable loop.
One of the menu options is a blank display - it
also marks the beginning/end of the loop.
Average speed
Average speed is calculated from the last
resetting. Reset using RESET.
Instantaneous
Current fuel consumption is calculated every
second. The information on the display is
updated every couple of seconds. When the
car is stationary, "----" appears on the display.
Average
Average fuel consumption is calculated from
the last resetting. Reset using RESET.
NOTE
There may be a slight error in the reading if
a fuel-driven supplementary and/or parking
heater* has been used.
Km to empty tank
The calculation is based on the average fuel
consumption over the last 30 km and the
remaining driveable fuel quantity. The display
shows the approximate distance that can be
driven with the fuel quantity remaining in the
tank.
An economic driving style generally results in a
longer driving distance. For more information
on how fuel consumption can be influenced,
see page 11.
No guaranteed range remains when the display
shows "---- km to empty tank". Refuel as
soon as possible.
NOTE
There may be a slight error in the reading if
the driving style has been changed.
Resetting
1. Select --- km/h average speed or --.- l/
100km average.
222
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Trip computer
2. Press and hold RESET for
approx. 1 second to reset the selected
function. If RESET is kept depressed for at
least 3 three seconds then Average speed
and Average are reset simultaneously.
Current speed*1
The instrument panel display changes to show
current speed in mph (miles per hour) if the
speedometer is graduated in km/h. If the
speedometer is graduated in mph then the display changes to km/h.
05
1
Only certain markets.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
223
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Adapting driving characteristics
Active chassis - Four-C*
Operation
Active chassis, Four-C (Continously Controlled
Chassis Concept), regulates the characteristics of the shock absorbers so that the car's
driving characteristics can be adjusted. There
are three settings: Comfort, Sport and
Advanced.
For a description of the menu system, see
page 200. This menu cannot be accessed
while the car is in motion.
Comfort
This setting means that the car is perceived as
being more comfortable on rough and uneven
road surfaces. Shock absorption is soft and the
movement of the body is smooth and gentle.
Sport
05
Use the buttons in the centre console to
change setting. The setting in use when the
engine is switched off is activated next time the
engine is started.
Advanced
Steering force increases with the speed of the
car to give the driver enhanced sensitivity. The
steering is firmer and more immediate on
motorways. Steering is light and requires no
extra effort when parking and at low speed.
The shock absorbers are optimised for maximum roadholding and rolling in bends is further
minimised.
224
Chassis settings.
This setting means that the car is perceived as
being more sporty and is recommended for
more active driving. Steering response is faster
than in the Comfort mode. Shock absorption is
harder and the body follows the road in order
to reduce rolling during cornering.
This setting is only recommended on very even
and smooth road surfaces.
Steering wheel force and select Low,
Medium or High.
Speed related power steering*
The driver can choose between three different
levels of steering force for road responsiveness
or steering sensitivity. Go to the menu system
MY CAR and locate Settings Car settings
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Comfort inside the passenger compartment
Storage spaces
05
``
225
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Comfort inside the passenger compartment
Storage compartment in door panel
Tunnel console
Storage pocket* on front edge of front seat
cushions
out the lighter and light a cigarette on the
heated coils.
Glovebox
Ticket clip
Glovebox
Storage compartment, cup holder
Jacket holder
Cup holder* in armrest, rear seat
Storage pocket
Storage compartment (e.g. for CDs) and
USB*/AUX input under the armrest.
Jacket holder
05
The jacket holder is only designed for light
clothing.
WARNING
Keep loose objects such as mobile phones,
cameras, remote controls for accessories,
etc. in the glove compartment or other compartments. Otherwise they may injure people in the car in the event of sudden braking
or a collision.
Includes cup holder for driver and passenger. (If ashtray and cigarette lighter are
specified then there is a cigarette lighter in
the 12 V socket for the front seat, see
page 227, and a detachable ashtray in the
cup holder.)
Avoid storing coins, keys or similar metal
objects in the cup holder as such objects could
accidentally trigger the alarm*, see page 63.
Cigarette lighter and ashtray*
The ashtray in the tunnel console is detached
by lifting the tray straight up.
Activate the lighter by pushing in the button.
The button pops out when the lighter is hot. Pull
226
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The owner's manual and maps can be kept
here for example. There are also holders for
pens on the inside of the lid. The glovebox can
be locked using the key blade, see pages 50
and 57.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Comfort inside the passenger compartment
Inlay mats*
12 V socket
socket to supply current, the remote control
key must be in at least key position I, see
page 78.
Volvo supplies specially manufactured inlay
mats.
WARNING
WARNING
Always leave the plug in the socket when
the socket is not in use.
Before setting off check that the inlaid mat
in the driver area is firmly affixed and
secured in the pins in order to avoid getting
caught adjacent to and under the pedals.
G031435
NOTE
Vanity mirror
12 V socket, front seat.
Optional equipment and accessories - e.g.
TV screens, music players and mobile
phones - which are connected to one of the
passenger compartment's 12V electrical
sockets, could be activated by the climate
control system, even when the remote control key has been removed or when the car
is locked, for example, when the parking
heater is activated at a preset time.
05
G021440
For this reason remove the plugs from the
electrical sockets for optional equipment or
accessories when not in use because the
battery could be drained in the event of such
an occurrence!
Vanity mirror with lighting.
The lamp for the vanity mirror, on the driver's
side* and passenger side respectively, is
switched on automatically when the cover is
raised.
12 V socket in tunnel console, rear seat.
The electrical socket can be used for various
accessories designed for 12 V, e.g. TV screens,
music players and mobile phones. For the
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
227
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Comfort inside the passenger compartment
IMPORTANT
Max. socket is 10 A (120 W) if one socket is
used at a time. If both sockets in the tunnel
console are used simultaneously, 7.5 A (90
W) per socket is applicable.
If the compressor for emergency puncture
repair is connected to one of the two sockets, no other current consumer must be
connected to the other one.
NOTE
05
The compressor for temporary emergency
puncture repair has been tested and
approved by Volvo. For information on the
use of Volvo's recommended temporary
emergency puncture repair (TMK), see
page 325.
Electrical socket in cargo area*
For more information, see page 300.
228
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
05
229
General information on infotainment.....................................................
Radio.....................................................................................................
Media player.........................................................................................
External audio source via AUX/USB* input...........................................
232
244
251
255
Media BluetoothŸ* ................................................................................ 258
BluetoothŸ handsfree*..........................................................................
Voice recognition* mobile phone..........................................................
TV*.........................................................................................................
Remote control* ...................................................................................
RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system* ..............................................
230
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
261
270
274
278
280
INFOTAINMENT SYSTEM
06 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment
General
The infotainment system consists of radio,
media player, TV* and the facility to communicate with mobile phone*. Information is presented on a 5 or 7-inch* colour screen in the
upper section of the centre console. Functions
can be controlled via buttons in the steering
wheel, in the centre console under the colour
screen or via a remote control*. A mobile phone
can also be controlled with voice recognition in
certain cases.
If the Infotainment System is active when the
engine is switched off then it is automatically
activated the next time the key is inserted into
key position I or higher, and it continues with
the same source (e.g. radio) as before the
engine was switched off (the driver's door must
be closed on cars with Keyless systems*).
06
The infotainment system can be used for 15
minutes at a time without the remote control
key being in the ignition switch by pressing the
On/Off button.
NOTE
Remove the remote control key from the
ignition switch if the infotainment system is
used when the engine is switched off. This
is to avoid discharging the battery unnecessarily.
Dolby, Pro Logic
The Audyssey MultEQ system has been used
in the development and tuning of the sound to
ensure a world-class sound experience.
Made under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
When the car is being started the infotainment
system is switched off temporarily and continues when the engine has started.
1
232
Audyssey MultEQ1
Only applies to Premium Sound Multimedia.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
06 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment
Overview
Operating the system
SOUND - press for access to audio settings
(bass, treble, etc.). For more information, see
page 239.
VOL – turn to raise or lower the volume.
ON/OFF/MUTE - short press starts the
system and long press (until the screen is off)
switches off. Note that the whole of the Sensus
system (including navigation * and phone functions*) starts/switches off at the same time.
Briefly press to mute the sound (MUTE) or
restore the sound if it had been switched off.
Main sources - press to select the main
source (e.g. RADIO, MEDIA). Last active
source is shown (e.g. FM1). If you are in
MEDIA or TEL and press the main source button then a shortcut menu is shown with commonly used menu options.
A/V-AUX input*
Steering wheel keypad (with*/without
thumbwheel).
TV screen. The TV screen is available in
two sizes: 5 and 7-inch. The manual shows
a 7-inch TV screen.
OK/MENU - Press to accept options in
menus. Leads to menu view in selected source
(e.g. RADIO or MEDIA). Arrow to the right of
the screen is shown when there are underlying
menus.
Centre console control panel
Rear control panel with headphones
socket*
AUX2 and USB3 inputs for external audio
sources (e.g. iPodŸ)
2
3
Steering wheel keypad as alternative to controls in
the centre console.
06
TUNE - turn to scroll among disc tracks/
folders, radio and TV* stations, phone contacts* or navigate through options on the TV
screen.
Only applies to Performance
Does not apply to Performance
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
233
06 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment
EXIT - short press leads upwards in the
menu system, interrupts current function, interrupts/rejects phone calls or erases entered
characters. Long press leads to normal view,
or if you are in normal view to the highest menu
level, see Main source view page 234.
Keypad with thumbwheel*
INFO - If more information than can be
shown on the screen is available, press the
INFO button to see the remaining information.
Preset buttons, input of numbers and letters.
06
FAV – shortcut to a favourite setting. The
button can be programmed for a commonly
used function in AM, FM, etc. For more information, see page 238.
Short presses scroll between disc tracks
or preset radio stations4. A long press
fast-winds disc tracks or searches for the
next available radio station.
Steering wheel keypad
Volume - press to raise or lower the audio
volume.
The steering wheel keypad can be used as an
alternative to the buttons in the centre console.
The keypad is available in three different versions depending on the options and the equipment level of the car.
4
5
6
234
Does not apply to DAB.
Applies to cars without navigation.
Only cars with navigation.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
EXIT - short press leads upwards in the
menu system, interrupts current function,
interrupts/rejects phone calls or erases
entered characters. Long press leads to
normal view, or if you are in normal view to
the highest menu level, see Main source
view page 234.
OK/MENU/TUNE - Press to accept
options in menus. Leads to the menu view
in the selected source (e.g. RADIO or
MEDIA). Arrow to the right of the screen is
shown when there are underlying menus.
Turn to scroll among disc tracks/folders,
radio and TV* stations, phone contacts* or
navigate through options on the TV screen.
Without voice recognition5 - press to
switch off the radio/media audio (MUTE) or
restore the audio if it has been switched off.
With voice recognition6 - Voice recognition (for BluetoothŸ-connected mobile
phone and navigation system*).
Main source view
A long press on EXIT on the steering wheel
keypad* leads to normal view. If you are in normal view and give a long press on EXIT then it
is possible to access the same main source
buttons that are in the centre console:
NAV - Volvo's navigation system
(RTI)*, is described in a separate
owner's manual.
RADIO - AM, FM, DAB*
06 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment
MEDIA - CD, DVD, AUX, USB*,
BluetoothŸ*, TV*.
TEL – BluetoothŸ handsfree*
fast-winds disc tracks or searches for the
next available radio station.
Volume - press to raise or lower the audio
volume.
MY CAR - Car settings, see
page 200.
CAM - Park Assist Camera*, see
page 188
Keypad without thumbwheel
06
Short presses scroll between disc tracks
or preset radio stations7. A long press
7
Does not apply to DAB.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
235
06 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment
Menus
06
The example shows navigation to different functions when a disc is played back. (1) Main source button, (2) Normal view, (3) Shortcut view, (4) Quick view, (5)
Menu view
236
06 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment
Select main source by pressing a main source
button (1) (RADIO, MEDIA, TEL). To navigate
in the source's menus, use the controls for
TUNE, OK/MENU or EXIT.
Use TUNE to scroll in the menu, select the
highlighted menu bar with OK/MENU or go
back with EXIT. In some cases it is possible to
access a shortcut menu by pressing the active
source's main source button (1).
For Menu overview, see page 240.
NOTE
If the car is equipped with a steering wheel
keypad with a thumbwheel*, these can be
used instead of the controls in the centre
console (TUNE, OK/MENU, EXIT), see
page 234.
Views in the TV screen
For each main source there are four basic
types of views:
• Quick view (4) - fast mode when TUNE is
turned, e.g. for changing disc tracks, radio
station, etc.
• Menu view (5) - for menu navigation
(accessed by pressing OK/MENU).
The views have different appearances depending on the source, in-car equipment, settings,
etc.
Pop-up menu8 video and TV*
Press OK/MENU when a video file is being
played back or TV* is being shown in order to
access the pop-up menu.
Rear control panel with headphones
socket*
Headphones with an impedance of
16-32 ohm and sensitivity of 102 dB or higher
are recommended for best sound reproduction.
VOLUME – Volume, left and right.
Scroll/search forward and backward.
MODE - Select between AM, FM1, FM2,
DAB1*, DAB2*, Disc, USB*, iPod*,
Bluetooth*, AUX, TV* and On/Off. For
connection via USB* or AUX, see
page 255 or via BluetoothŸ*, see
page 259.
06
Headphones sockets (3.5 mm).
• Normal view (2) - normal mode for the
source
• Shortcut menu (3) - shows commonly
used menu options in the main sources
TEL and MEDIA (accessed by pressing the
active source's main source button (1)).
8
Activate/deactivate
The control panel is activated with MODE.
Deactivation is possible via a long press on
MODE or when the engine is switched off.
Only applies when playing back videos or displaying TV*.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
237
06 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment
Scroll/search forward and backward
FAV - store a preset
Pressing (2) scrolls between disc tracks/audio
files or seeks the next available radio station.
It is also possible to select and store a favourite
for MY CAR, CAM* and NAV*. Favourites can
also be selected and stored under MY CAR.
For more information on the menu system MY
CAR, see page 200.
Limitations
NOTE
The audio source (e.g. FM1, AM, Disc etc.)
being played back through the speakers
cannot be controlled from the rear control
panel.
To store a function in the FAV button:
1. Select a main source (e.g. RADIO,
MEDIA).
NOTE
In order that an audio source can be
selected with MODE and listened to it is
required that the audio source is available
and connected in the car.
06
The FAV button can be used to store functions
that are used frequently so that the function
can be started simply by pressing FAV. You
can select a favourite (e.g. Equalizer) for each
function as follows:
In RADIO mode:
• AM
• FM1/FM2
• DAB1*/DAB2*
In MEDIA mode:
• DISC
• USB*
• iPod*
238
• Bluetooth*
• AUX
• TV*
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
2. Select a wavelength or source (AM, Disc,
etc.).
3. Press and hold the FAV button until the
"favourites menu" is shown.
4. Turn TUNE to select an option from the list
and press OK/MENU to save.
> When the main source (e.g. RADIO,
MEDIA) is active the stored function is
available via a short press on FAV.
06 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment
General audio settings
Press SOUND to access the audio settings
menu (Bass, Treble, etc.). Scroll forward with
SOUND or OK/MENU to your selection (e.g.
Treble).
• Subwoofer*9 - Bass speaker level.
• DPL II centre level3 channel centre
level9 - Volume for centre speaker.
• DPL II surround level9, 10 – Level for surround.
Adjust the setting by turning TUNE and save
the setting with OK/MENU.
Advanced audio settings
Continue pressing SOUND or OK/MENU to
access other options:
Equalizer11
• Surround9 - Can be set to the On/Off position. When On is selected, the system
selects the setting for optimal sound reproduction. Normally DPLII and
then
appear in the TV screen. If the recording is
made with Dolby Digital technology then
playback will take place with this setting,
then appears in the TV screen.
When Off is selected, 3-channel stereo is
available.
• Bass - Bass level.
• Treble - Treble level.
• Fader – Balance between the front and
rear speakers.
• Balance – Balance between the left and
right-hand speakers.
Sound stage9
The volume level can be adjusted separately
for different wavelengths.
1. Press OK/MENU to access Audio
settings and select Equalizer.
The sound experience can be optimised for the
driver's seat, both front seats or the rear seat.
If there are passengers in both the front and
rear seats then the option recommended is;
both front seats. The options can be selected
under Audio settings Sound stage.
For general information on menu navigation,
see page 236 and menu overview, see
page 240.
Audio volume and automatic volume
control
3. Adjust the audio settings by turning
TUNE and confirm with OK/MENU. Continue in the same way with other wavelengths you want to change.
The audio system compensates for disrupting
noises in the passenger compartment by
increasing the volume in relation to the speed
of the car. The compensation level can be set
to low, medium, high or off. Select the level
under Audio settings Volume
compensation.
4. When you have finished with audio settings, press EXIT to confirm and return to
normal view.
For general information on menu navigation,
see page 236 and menu overview, see
page 240.
For general information on menu navigation,
see page 236 and menu overview, see
page 240.
If an external audio source (e.g. an MP3 player
or iPodŸ) is connected to the AUX input then
2. Select wavelength by turning TUNE and
confirm with OK/MENU.
06
External audio source audio volume
9 Only Premium Sound Multimedia.
10 Only when Surround is activated.
11 Not Performance.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
239
06 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment
the audio source that is connected can have a
different volume than the audio system's internal volume (e.g. radio). Correct this by adjusting the volume of the input:
Optimum sound reproduction
Menu overview
The audio system is pre-calibrated for optimum sound reproduction by means of digital
signal processing.
Menus RADIO
1. Press the MEDIA button and turn TUNE to
AUX and wait a few seconds or press OK/
MENU.
This calibration takes into account loudspeakers, amplifiers, passenger compartment
acoustics, listener position etc. for each combination of car model and audio system.
2. Press OK/MENU and then turn TUNE to
AUX input volume. Confirm with OK/
MENU.
3. Turn TUNE to adjust the volume for the
AUX input.
NOTE
06
If the external audio source's volume is too
high or too low, the quality of the sound may
deteriorate. The audio quality may also be
impaired if the player is charged while the
infotainment system is in AUX mode. In
which case, avoid charging the player via
the 12 V socket.
There is a also a dynamic calibration that takes
into account the position of the volume control,
radio reception and vehicle speed.
The controls explained in these operating
instructions, e.g. Bass, Treble and Equalizer,
are only intended for the user to be able to
adapt the sound reproduction according to
personal taste.
Main menu AM
AM menu
Show presets12
Scan
Audio settings13
Sound stage14
Equalizer15
Volume compensation
Reset all audio settings
Main menu FM1/FM2
FM menu
TP
Show radio text
Show presets12
Scan
News settings
12 Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
13 The menu options for audio settings are the same for all audio sources.
14 Only applies to Premium Sound Multimedia.
15 Does not apply to Performance.
240
06 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment
Advanced settings
REG
Alternative frequency
Show PTY text
Main menu DVD12 Video
Reset all DAB settings
DVD Video Menu
Audio settings16
Play/Pause/Continue
EON
Set TP favourite
PTY settings
Reset all FM settings
Audio settings16
Menus MEDIA
Stop
Main menu CD Audio
Subtitles
Disc menu
Audio tracks
Random
Main menu CD/DVD12 Data
Ensemble learn
Disc menu
PTY filtering
Turn off PTY filtering
Show
Scan
Advanced settings
DAB linking
DAB band
Sub channels
16 For submenus, see "Main menu AM".
12 Only applies to High Performance Multimedia
15 Does not apply to Performance.
Angle
Audio settings16
DAB menu
presets12
Advanced settings
Scan
Main menu DAB1*/DAB2*
Show radio text
DVD disc menu
Play/Pause
DivX® VOD code
Audio settings16
Main menu iPod15
iPod menu
Stop
Random
Random
Scan
Repeat folder
Audio settings16
06
Change subtitles
Change audio track
Scan
Audio settings16
Main menu USB15
USB menu
Play/Pause
and Premium Sound Multimedia.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
241
06 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment
Stop
Main menu AUX
Random
AUX menu
Repeat folder
AUX input volume
Select USB device
Audio settings16
Change subtitles
Change audio track
All calls
TV menu
Missed calls
settings16
Select country
Answered calls
Reorganise presets
Dialled calls
Autostore
Call duration
Scan
Bluetooth menu
Phone book
Audio settings16
Random
Change device
Pop-up menu17 video and TV*
Remove Bluetooth device
Press OK/MENU when a video file is being
played back or TV* is being shown in order to
access the pop-up menu.
Scan
Phone menu
All calls
Main menu Media Bluetooth15
06
Main menu BluetoothŸ handsfree15
Main menu TV*
Scan
Audio
Menus TEL
Bluetooth software version in car
Image settings
Audio settings16
Source
menu18
DVD disc
menu19
Search
New contact
Speed dials
Receive vCard
Memory status
Clear phone book
Change phone
Remove Bluetooth device
DVD disc TOP menu19
16 For submenus, see "Main menu AM".
15 Does not apply to Performance.
17 Only applies when playing back videos or displaying TV*.
18 What is shown in the pop-up menu for the source menu depends
19 Only applies to DVD video discs.
242
on what is being played back or displayed, it can be e.g. CD/DVD data menu or USB menu.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
06 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment
Phone settings
Discoverable
Sounds and volume
Download phone book
Bluetooth software version in
car
Call options
Auto answer
Voicemail number
Disconnect phone
06
243
06 Infotainment system
Radio
General
NOTE
If the car is equipped with a steering wheel
keypad* and/or remote control* then in
many cases these can be used instead of
the buttons in the centre console. For a
description of the steering wheel keypad,
see page 234. For a description of the
remote control, see page 278.
Station list1
The radio automatically compiles a list of the
strongest FM stations whose signals it is currently receiving. This enables you to find a station when you drive into an area where you do
not know the radio stations and their frequencies.
Station presets (0-9)
Radio AM/FM
To go to the list and select a station:
Select the desired frequency/station or
navigate in the radio menu by turning
TUNE.
Tuning
1. Select the desired wavelength (FM1 or
FM2).
Confirm your selection or go to the radio
menu by pressing OK/MENU.
Hold in the button for next/previous available station. Short press for preset.
244
2. Hold in
/
in the centre console (or
in the steering wheel keypad*). The radio
searches for the next/previous available
station.
The menus inRADIO are controlled from the
centre console and the steering wheel keypad*. For general information on menu navigation, see page 236 and menu overview, see
page 240.
RADIO button for selecting the wavelength
(AM, FM1, FM2, DAB1*, DAB2*).
1
1. Press RADIO, turn TUNE until the desired
wavelength (AM, FM1 etc.) is shown, press
OK/MENU.
Menus
Centre console, controls for radio functions.
06
Automatic tuning
NOTE
The reception is dependent both on how
good the signal strength and signal quality
are. The transmission may be disturbed by
various factors such as tall buildings or the
transmitter being far away. Coverage level
can also vary depending on where in the
country you are located.
Does not apply to Performance.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
2. Turn TUNE one step in either direction.
This displays the list of all stations in the
area. The currently tuned station is indicated with enlarged text in the list.
3. Turn TUNE again in either direction to
select a station from the list.
4. Confirm your selection with OK/MENU.
06 Infotainment system
Radio
NOTE
•
The list only shows the frequencies of
stations that are currently being
received, not a complete list of all radio
frequencies on the selected wavelength.
•
If the signal from the currently received
station is weak, this may prevent the
radio from updating the station list. If
button
this occurs, press the
(while the station list is shown in the display screen) in order to change to manual tuning and set a frequency. If the
station list is no longer shown, turn
TUNE one step in either direction to
to
show the list again, and press
switch.
in the area when you turn TUNE (see the section "Station list", page 244). When the station
list is shown, press the
button in the centre console to change to manual tuning. This
allows you to select a frequency from the list of
all available radio frequencies in the selected
wavelength. In other words, if turn TUNE one
step in a manual search the frequency is
changed from e.g. 93.3 to 93.4 MHz, etc.
To manually select a station:
1. Press the RADIO button, turn TUNE until
the desired wavelength (AM, FM1 etc.) is
shown, press OK/MENU.
2. Turn TUNE to select a frequency.
NOTE
The preset from the factory is that the radio
automatically searches for the stations in
the area where you are driving (see previous
section "Station list" above).
But if you have changed over to manual tuning (by pressing the
button in the centre console when the station list was
shown), then the radio remains set in the
function for manual tuning the next time you
switch on the radio. To change back to the
function for "Station list", turn TUNE one
step (to show the complete list of stations)
and press the button
.
Note that if you press
when the station list is not shown then INFO is activated.
For more information on this function, see
page 233.
The list disappears from the TV screen after a
few seconds.
Preset
If the station list is no longer shown, turn
TUNE one step in either direction and press the
button in the centre console to change
to manual tuning (or to return from manual tuning to the function for "Station list").
The stored presets are selected using the preset buttons.
Manual tuning
The preset from the factory is that the radio
shows the station list of the strongest stations
06
10 presets can be stored per wavelength (AM,
FM1 etc.).
1. Tune into a station (see "Tuning", page
244).
2. Hold in one of the preset buttons for a few
seconds, the sound disappears during this
245
06 Infotainment system
Radio
time and returns when the station is stored.
The preset button can now be used.
A list of pre-selected channels can be shown2
in the TV screen. The function is activated/
deactivated in FM/AM mode under FM menu
Show presets or AM menu Show
presets.
RDS functions
RDS (Radio Data System) links FM transmitters
into a network. An FM transmitter in such a
network sends information that gives an RDS
radio the following functions:
• Automatically switches to a stronger transmitter if reception in the area is poor.
• Searches for programme type, such as
•
06
Alarm
Receives text information on current radio
programme.
This function is used to warn of serious accidents and catastrophes. The alarm cannot be
temporarily interrupted or deactivated. The
message ALARM! appears on the TV screen
when an alarm message is transmitted.
NOTE
If a required programme type is located the
radio can switch stations interrupting the audio
source currently in use. For example, if the CD
246
The programme functions alarm (ALARM!),
traffic information (TP), news (NEWS), and programme types (PTY) interrupt one another in
order of priority, where alarm has the highest
priority and programme types has the lowest.
For additional settings of programming interruptions (EON Distant and EON Local), see
the section "Enhanced Other Networks –
EON" below. Press EXIT to return to the interrupted audio source, press the OK/MENU to
clear the message.
traffic information or news.
Some radio stations do not use RDS or only
some if its functionality.
2
3
player is in use, it is paused. The interrupting
transmission is played at a preset volume, see
page 248. The radio returns to the previous
audio source and volume when the set programme type is no longer broadcast.
Traffic information – TP
This function allows traffic information sent
within a set station's RDS network to break
through. The TP symbol indicates that the
function is activated. If the preset station can
Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
Factory settings.
send traffic information then this is shown by
TP glowing brightly in the TV screen, otherwise
TP will be grey.
–
Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM
menu TP.
Enhanced Other Networks – EON
This function is useful in urban areas with many
regional radio stations. It allows the distance
between the car and the radio station transmitter to determine when programme functions
should interrupt the current audio source.
–
Activate/deactivate in FM mode by selecting one of the options under FM menu
Advanced settings EON:
• Local – interrupts only if the radio station
transmitter is close.
• Distant3 – interrupts if the station transmitter is far away, even if there is a lot of
static.
TP from selected station/all stations
The radio can only interrupt for traffic information from the selected station or all stations
within the RDS network.
–
Go in FM mode to FM menu Advanced
settings Set TP favourite to change.
06 Infotainment system
Radio
News
This function allows news broadcasts sent
within a set station's RDS network to break
through. The NEWS symbol indicates that the
function is active.
–
Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM
menu News settings News.
News from selected station/all stations
The radio can only interrupt for news from the
selected station or all stations in the RDS network.
–
Go in FM mode to FM menu News
settings Set news favourite to change.
Programme types – PTY
The PTY function can be used to select one or
more programme types, such as pop music
and serious classic. The PTY symbol indicates
that the function is active. This function allows
programme types broadcast within a set station's RDS network to break through.
1. Activate in FM mode by first selecting the
programme types under FM menu
Advanced settings PTY settings
Select PTY.
4
2. Then the PTY function must be activated
under FM menu Advanced settings
PTY settings Receive traffic
bulletins from other networks.
–
To continue searching for another broadcast of the selected programme types,
press on
or
.
Display of programme type
An indicator is shown in the TV screen when
PTY is activated.
The programme type of the current station can
be shown on the TV screen.
Deactivation of the PTY function is performed
in FM mode under FM menu Advanced
settings PTY settings Receive traffic
bulletins from other networks. Selected programme types (PTY) are not reset.
–
Resetting and removing PTY are performed
under FM menu Advanced settings
PTY settings Select PTY Clear all.
Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM
menu Advanced settings PTY
settings Show PTY text.
Radio text4
Some RDS stations transmit information on
programme content, artists, etc. This information can be shown on the TV screen.
–
PTY search
Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM
menu Show radio text.
This function searches the entire wavelength
for the selected programme type.
Automatic frequency update – AF
1. In FM mode select one or more PTY under
FM menu Advanced settings PTY
settings Select PTY.
The function selects the strongest transmitter
for the set station. In order to find a strong
transmitter the function may, in exceptional
cases, need to search the entire FM wavelength.
2. Go to FM menu Advanced settings
PTY settings Seek PTY.
To finish searching, press EXIT.
–
06
Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM
menu Advanced settings
Alternative frequency.
Only cars with 7-inch screen
``
247
06 Infotainment system
Radio
Regional radio programmes – REG
This function causes the radio to continue with
a regional transmitter even if its signal strength
is low. The symbol REG shows that the function is active.
–
–
To start scanning go in FM/AM mode to
FM menu Scan or AM menu Scan.
NOTE
Scanning stops if a station is saved.
Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM
menu Advanced settings REG.
Radio system - DAB*
Resetting RDS functions
All radio settings can be reset to the original
factory settings.
–
The reset is carried out in FM mode under
FM menu Advanced settings
Reset all FM settings.
Volume control, programme types
06
The interrupting programme types, e.g.
NEWS or TP, are heard at the volume selected
for each respective programme type. If the volume level is adjusted during the programme
interruption, the new level is saved until the
next programme interruption.
General
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) is a digital
broadcasting system for radio. This system
supports DAB, DAB+ and DMB.
NOTE
Coverage for DAB is not available in all locations. If there is no coverage then the message No reception is shown in the display
screen.
Service and Ensemble
• Service - Channel, radio channel (only
audio services are supported by the system).
Scan wavelength
The function automatically searches for available channels and takes into account any programme type filtering. When a station is found,
it is played for approx. 10 seconds before
scanning is resumed. When a station is playing
back it can be saved as a preset in the usual
way, see the section Preset, page 245.
248
• Ensemble - A collection of radio channels
on the same frequency.
Storing channel groups (Ensemble learn)
When the vehicle is moved to a new broadcasting area, programming of existing channel
groups in the area may be necessary.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Programming of channel groups creates an
updated list of all available channel groups.
The list is not updated automatically.
Programming is carried out in the menu system
in DAB mode under DAB menu Ensemble
learn. Programming can also take place as follows:
1. Turn TUNE one step in either direction.
> Ensemble learn is shown in the list of
available channel groups.
2. Press OK/MENU.
> New programming is started.
Programming can be cancelled with EXIT.
Navigation in channel group list
(Ensemble)
To navigate in and access the channel group
list turn TUNE. The name of the Ensemble is
shown in the upper part of the TV screen. When
switching to the new Ensemble the name
changes to the new one.
• Service - Shows channels irrespective of
the channel group to which they are allocated. The list can also be filtered using the
selection of programme type (PTY
filtering), see below.
06 Infotainment system
Radio
Scanning
The function automatically searches the current wavelength for strong stations. When a
station is found, it is played for approx. 10 seconds before scanning is resumed. When a station is playing back it is saved as a preset in the
usual way. For more information on presets,
see "Preset" below.
–
Go in DAB mode to DAB menu
start scanning.
Scan to
NOTE
Scanning stops if a station is saved.
Scanning can also be selected in DAB-PTY
mode. In which case only channels of the preselected programme type are played.
Programme type (PTY)
Various types of radio programmes can be
selected using the programme type function.
There are a number of different programme
types which also include different programme
categories. After selecting a programme type,
navigation only takes place within the channels
that are broadcasting that type.
5
Programme type is selected in DAB mode
under DAB menu PTY filtering. Exit this
mode as follows:
–
Press EXIT.
> An indicator is shown in the TV screen
when PTY is activated.
In certain cases DAB radio will exit PTY mode
when DAB to DAB linking (see below) is implemented.
A list of pre-selected channels can be shown5
in the TV screen. The function is activated/
deactivated in DAB mode under DAB menu
Show presets.
NOTE
The audio system's DAB system does not
support all functions available in the DAB
standard.
Preset
Radio text
10 station presets can be stored per wavelength. DAB has 2 memories for presets:
DAB1 and DAB2. Storage of presets is made
by means of a long press on the desired preset
button, for more information see page 245. The
stored presets are selected using the preset
buttons.
Some radio stations transmit information on
programme content, artists, etc. This information is shown on the TV screen.
A preset contains one channel but no subchannels. If a subchannel is being played and
a preset is saved then only the main channel is
registered. This is because subchannels are
temporary. At the next attempt to retrieve the
preset, the channel which contained the subchannel will be played. The preset is not
dependent on the channel list.
The function is deactivated/activated in DAB
mode under DAB menu Show radio text.
NOTE
06
Only one of the functions "Show radio
text" and "Show presets" can be activated at a time. If one of them is activated
when the other is already activated, then the
previously activated function is deactivated
automatically. Both functions can be deactivated.
Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
249
06 Infotainment system
Radio
Advanced settings
Subchannel
Resetting the DAB settings
DAB to DAB link
Secondary components are usually named
subchannels. These are temporary and can
contain e.g. translations of the main programme into other languages.
All DAB settings can be reset to the original
factory settings.
DAB to DAB linking means that the DAB radio
can go from one channel with poor or no reception to the same channel in another channel
group with better reception. There may be a
certain delay when changing channel group.
There may be a period of silence between the
current channel no longer being available to the
new channel becoming available.
The function can be activated/deactivated in
DAB mode under DAB menu Advanced
settings DAB linking.
Wavelength
DAB can be transmitted on two6 wavelengths:
• Band III - covers most areas.
• LBand - available only in a few areas.
06
Press
to access the subchannels.
Subchannels can only be accessed on the
selected main channel and not on any other
channel without selecting it.
Display of subchannels can be deactivated/
activated in DAB mode under DAB menu
Advanced settings Sub channels
By selecting for example Band III on its own,
channel programming takes place more
quickly than if both Band III and LBand have
been selected. It is not certain that all channel
groups will be found. Wavelength selection
does not affect the stored memories.
Programme type text
Wavelengths can be deactivated/activated in
DAB mode under DAB menu Advanced
settings DAB band.
The function is activated/deactivated in DAB
mode under DAB menu Advanced
settings Show PTY text.
6
250
If one or more subchannels are broadcast then
symbol is shown to the left of the chanthe
nel name in the TV screen. A subchannel is
indicated by the - symbol appearing to the left
of the channel name in the TV screen.
Not all areas/countries use both wavelengths.
Some radio stations broadcast information
about programme type and programme category, for information on Programme types –
PTY, see page 247. This information is shown
on the TV screen.
–
The reset is carried out in DAB mode under
DAB menu Advanced settings
Reset all DAB settings.
06 Infotainment system
Media player
CD/DVD1 functions
Confirm your selection or go to the menu
for the selected media source by pressing
OK/MENU.
Fast forward/reverse and change disc
track or chapter2.
The media player supports and can play the
following main types of discs and files:
• Pre-recorded CD discs (CD Audio).
• Burned CD discs with audio and/or video
files1.
Centre console control panel.
Disc insert and eject slot
MEDIA button, activates last active media
source. If you are already in a media source
and press the MEDIA button then a shortcut menu is shown for commonly used
menu options.
Disc eject
Input of numbers and letters.
Select the disc tracks/folders, or navigate
through menu options by turning TUNE.
• Pre-recorded DVD video discs1.
• Burned DVD discs1 with audio and/or video
files.
For more information about the supported formats, see page 254.
NOTE
If the car is equipped with a steering wheel
keypad* and/or remote control* then in
many cases these can be used instead of
the buttons in the centre console. For a
description of the steering wheel keypad,
see page 234. For a description of the
remote control, see page 278.
Menus
The menus inMEDIA are controlled from the
centre console and the steering wheel keypad*. For general information on menu navigation, see page 236 and menu overview, see
page 240.
Starting playback of a disc
Press the MEDIA button, turn TUNE until
Disc is shown, press OK/MENU. If there is a
disc in the media player then the disc starts
playing back automatically, otherwise Insert
disc is shown in the TV screen. Then insert a
disc, with text side up. The disc starts to play
back automatically.
If a disc with audio/video files is inserted into
the player then the disc's folder structure
needs to be loaded. Depending on the quality
of the disc and the quantity of information there
may be a certain delay before playback starts.
06
Disc eject
A disc remains in the ejected position for
about 12 seconds, after which it is inserted
back into the player for safety reasons.
Pause
When the volume is reduced entirely or MUTE
is pressed, the media player is paused. When
the volume is increased or MUTE is pressed
1
2
Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
Only applies to DVD discs.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
251
06 Infotainment system
Media player
again, the media player starts. It is also possible to pause via the menu system3, press OK/
MENU, select Play/Pause.
Audio/video files can also be changed by
pressing
/
on the centre console or the
steering wheel keypad*.
Playback and navigation
, video files1
Audio files have the symbol
have the symbol
and folders have the
symbol
.
CD audio discs
Turn TUNE to access the disc's playlist and
navigate in the list. Use OK/MENU to confirm
the selection of the disc track and start playback. Press EXIT to cancel and exit the playlist.
A long press on EXIT leads to the playlist's root
level.
Disc tracks can also be changed by pressing
on
/
on the centre console or the
steering wheel keypad*.
Burned discs audio/video files1
06
Turn TUNE to access the disc's playlist/folder
structure and navigate in the list/structure. Use
OK/MENU to confirm either selection of subfolder or start of playback of the selected
audio/video file. Press EXIT to either stop and
exit the playlist or go up (back) in the folder
structure. A long press on EXIT leads to the
playlist's root level.
3
1
4
252
When playback of a file is complete the playback of the other files (of the same type) in that
particular folder continues. Change4 of folder
takes place automatically when all the files in
the current folder have been played back. The
system automatically detects and changes
setting when a disc containing only audio files
or only video files is loaded into the media
player and then plays back these files. However, the system does not change setting if a
disc containing a mixture of audio and video
files is loaded into the media player, but instead
the player continues to play back the previous
file type.
Does not apply to CD Audio
Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
If Repeat folder is activated then this does not take place.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
NOTE
A video film is only shown when the car is
stationary. When the car is moving at a
speed of over about 8 km/h no picture is
shown and No visual media available
while driving appears on the display
screen, although the audio is heard during
this time. The picture is shown again as
soon as the car's speed falls below about 6
km/h.
NOTE
Some audio files that are copy-protected by
record companies or privately copied audio
files cannot be loaded by the player.
DVD video discs1
For playback of DVD video discs, see
page 253.
Fast forward/reverse
Hold in the buttons
/
to fast forward/
rewind. Audio files are fast forwarded/rewound
at one speed, while video files are fast forwarded/rewound at several speeds. Repeatedly
/
to increase the fast
press the buttons
06 Infotainment system
Media player
forward/rewind speed for video files. Release
the button to return to viewing at normal speed.
Scan5
This function plays the first ten seconds of
each disc track/audio file. To scan:
1. Press OK/MENU
2. Turn TUNE to Scan
> The first 10 seconds of each disc track
or audio file are played.
3. Cancel the scan with EXIT, the disc track
or audio file being played back will continue playing.
Random5
This function plays the tracks in random order.
To listen to the tracks in random order:
Repeat folder6
NOTE
This function makes it possible to play files in
a folder over and over again. When the last file
has been played out, playback of the first file
starts again.
1. Press OK/MENU
2. Turn TUNE to Repeat folder
3. Press OK/MENU to activate/deactivate
the function.
Playback of DVD video discs1
A video film is only shown when the car is
stationary. When the car is moving at a
speed of over about 8 km/h no picture is
shown and No visual media available
while driving appears on the display
screen, although the audio is heard during
this time. The picture is shown again as
soon as the car's speed falls below about 6
km/h.
Navigation in the DVD video disc's menu
Playback
When playing back a DVD video disc a disc
menu may appear on the display screen. The
disc menu gives access to additional functions
and settings, such as selecting subtitles, language and scene selection.
1. Press OK/MENU
06
2. Turn TUNE to Random
3. Press OK/MENU to activate/deactivate
the function.
Disc tracks/audio files can be changed by
/
on the centre console or the
pressing
steering wheel keypad*.
5
6
1
Navigation in the DVD video disc's menu is
performed using the number keys in the centre
console as illustrated above.
Does not apply to DVD video discs.
Only applies to audio/video files on burned discs or USB.
Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
253
06 Infotainment system
Media player
Changing chapter or title
DivXŸ Video On Demand
Compatible file formats
Turn TUNE to access the list of chapters and
navigate through them (if the film is being
played back then it is paused). Press OK/
MENU to select the chapter, this also leads
back to the original position (if the film was
being played back then it is restarted). Press
EXIT to access the title list.
The media player can be registered in order to
play DivX VOD type files from burned discs or
USB. The code for registration can be found in
the menu system MY CAR Settings
Information DivX® VOD code. For general
information on menus, see under MY CAR, see
page 200.
The media player can play back a variety of file
types and is compatible with the formats in the
following table.
Titles are selected in the title list by turning
TUNE and the selection is confirmed with OK/
MENU, this also leads back to the chapter list.
Press OK/MENU to activate the selection and
return to the start position. Use EXIT to cancel
the selection and this leads back to the original
position (without any selection being made).
The chapter can also be changed by pressing
/
on the centre console or the
on
steering wheel keypad*.
06
Advanced settings7
Angle
If the DVD video disc supports it, the function
can be used to choose from which camera
position a particular scene should be shown.
Go in disc mode to Disc menu Advanced
settings Angle.
7
254
NOTE
Dual format, double-sided discs (DVD Plus,
CD-DVD format) are thicker than regular CD
discs and therefore playback cannot be
guaranteed and malfunction may arise.
For more information visit www.divx.com/vod.
Picture settings7
If a CD contains a mixture of MP3 and CDDA
tracks, all MP3s will be ignored.
You can adjust the settings (when the car is
stationary) for brightness and contrast.
1. Press OK/MENU and select Image
settings, confirm with OK/MENU.
Audio formatA
CD audio, mp3,
wma
2. Turn TUNE to the adjustment option and
confirm with OK/MENU.
Audio formatB
CD audio, mp3,
wma, aac, m4a
3. Adjust the setting by turning TUNE and
confirm with OK/MENU.
Video formatC
CD video,
DVD video, divx, avi,
asf
To return to the settings list, press the OK/
MENU or EXIT.
The picture settings can be reset to factory
settings with the Reset option.
Applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
A
B
C
Applies to Performance.
Does not apply to Performance.
Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium
Sound Multimedia.
06 Infotainment system
External audio source via AUX/USB* input
General
NOTE
If the car is equipped with a steering wheel
keypad* and/or remote control* then in
many cases these can be used instead of
the buttons in the centre console. For a
description of the steering wheel keypad,
see page 234. For a description of the
remote control, see page 278.
structure and number of files there may be
some delay before loading is finished.
NOTE
The system supports most iPodŸ models
produced in 2005 or later.
NOTE
An iPodŸ or MP3 player with rechargeable batteries is recharged (when the ignition is on or
the engine is running) if the device is plugged
into the USB connection.
Connection points for external audio sources.
An external audio source, e.g. an iPodŸ or MP3
player, can be connected to the audio system
via any of the connections in the centre console. An audio source connected to the USB
input can then be handled1 with the car's audio
controls. A device connected via the AUX input
cannot be controlled via the car.
To connect the audio source:
1. Press MEDIA, turn TUNE to the desired
audio source USB, iPod or AUX, press
OK/MENU.
> If USB is selected then Connect USB is
shown in the TV screen.
2. Connect your audio source to one of the
connections in the centre console's storage compartment (see previous illustration).
To prevent damage to the USB connection,
this is shut off if the USB connection is
short-circuited or if a connected USB unit is
taking too much power (this may happen if
the unit connected does not meet the USB
standard). The USB connection is reactivated automatically the next time the ignition
is turned on, unless the fault persists.
Menus
The menus inMEDIA are controlled from the
centre console and the steering wheel keypad*. For general information on menu navigation, see page 236 and menu overview, see
page 240.
06
The text Reading USB is shown in the TV
screen when the system is loading the storage
media's file structure. Depending on the file
1
Only applies to the media source connected via the USB connection.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
255
06 Infotainment system
External audio source via AUX/USB* input
Playback and navigation2
Turn TUNE to access the playlist/folder structure and navigate in the list/structure. Use OK/
MENU to either confirm selection of subfolder
or start of playback of the selected audio/video
file. Press EXIT to either stop and exit the playlist or go up (back) in the folder structure. A long
press on EXIT leads to the playlist's root level.
Audio/video files can also be changed by
/
on the centre console or the
pressing
steering wheel keypad*.
Audio files have the symbol
, video files3
have the symbol
and folders have the
.
symbol
06
When playback of a file is complete the playback of the other files (of the same type) in that
particular folder continues. Change4 of folder
takes place automatically when all the files in
the current folder have been played back. The
system automatically detects and changes
setting when a device containing only audio
files or only video files is connected to the USB
port and then it plays back these files. However, the system does not change setting if a
2
3
4
5
6
256
device containing a mixture of audio and video
files is connected to the USB port, but instead
the player continues to play back the previous
file type.
Fast forward/reverse2
See page 252.
Scan2
See page 253.
Repeat folder5
See page 253.
Pause
When the volume is reduced entirely or MUTE
is pressed, the media player is paused. When
the volume is increased or MUTE is pressed
again, the media player starts. It is also possible to pause via the menu system6, press OK/
MENU, select Play/Pause.
Random2
See page 253.
Audio sources
Search function2
USB memory
The keypad on the control panel in the centre
console can be used to find a filename in the
current folder.
To facilitate the use of a USB memory stick,
only store music files on it. It takes a lot longer
for the system to load storage media that contains anything other than compatible music
files.
The search function is accessed either by turning TUNE (to access the folder structure) or by
pressing one of the letter keys. As a letter or
character in a search string is entered you get
closer to your search target.
Start playback of a file by pressing OK/
MENU.
Only applies to USB and iPodŸ.
Applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
If Repeat folder is activated then this does not take place.
Only applies to USB.
Does not apply to iPodŸ
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
06 Infotainment system
External audio source via AUX/USB* input
NOTE
The system supports mobile media compliant with USB 2.0 and the FAT32 file system
and can handle 1000 folders with a maximum of 254 subfolders/files in every folder.
The top level, which can handle up to 1000
subfolders/files, is an exception to this.
iPodŸ
An iPodŸ is charged and supplied with power
by the USB connection* via the player's connection cable.
NOTE
The system only supports the playback of
audio files from iPodŸ.
NOTE
When using a longer model USB memory
stick the use of a USB adapter cable is recommended. This is to avoid mechanical
wear to the USB input and the connected
USB memory stick.
NOTE
When an iPodŸ is used as audio source, the
car's infotainment system has a menu
structure that is similar to the iPodŸ player's
own menu structure.
USB hub
It is possible to connect a USB hub to the USB
connection and thereby connect multiple USB
devices simultaneously. Selection of USB
device is made in USB mode under USB menu
Select USB device.
Compatible file formats via the USB
connection
Audio and video files in the following table are
supported by the system for playback via the
USB connection.
06
MP3 player
Many MP3 players have their own file systems
that are not supported by the audio system. For
use in the system, an MP3 player must be set
in USB Removable device/Mass Storage
Device mode.
A
Audio format
mp3, wma, aac,
m4a
Video formatA
divx, avi, asf
Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium
Sound Multimedia.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
257
06 Infotainment system
Media BluetoothŸ*
General
The car's media player is equipped with
BluetoothŸ1 and can wirelessly play streaming
audio files from external devices with
BluetoothŸ, such as mobile phones and PDAs.
Navigation and control of the sound can be
carried out via the centre console buttons or via
the steering wheel keypad*. In some external
devices it is also possible to change tracks
from the device.
To play back the audio the car's media player
must first be set in Bluetooth mode.
NOTE
The car's media player can only play the
audio files via the BluetoothŸ function.
Menus
The menus in MEDIA are controlled from the
centre console and the steering wheel keypad*. For general information on menu navigation, see page 236 and menu overview, see
page 240.
258
EXIT - leads up in the menu system, stops
the function in progress.
Short presses are used to scroll between
audio files. Long presses are used to fast
forward and rewind audio files.
If the car is equipped with a steering wheel
keypad* and/or remote control* then in
many cases these can be used instead of
the buttons in the centre console. For a
description of the steering wheel keypad,
see page 234. For a description of the
remote control, see page 278.
Centre console control panel.
VOL – volume
MEDIA button. Last active source (e.g.
iPodŸ) is activated automatically. If a
1
Confirm your selection or go to the menu
by pressing OK/MENU.
NOTE
The BluetoothŸ media player must support
the Audio/Video Remote Control Profile
(AVRCP) and Advanced Audio Distribution
Profile (A2DP). The player should use
AVRCP version 1.3, A2DP 1.2. Otherwise
some functions may not work.
Not all mobile phones and external media
players available in the market are fully compatible with the BluetoothŸ function in the
car's media player. Volvo recommends that
you contact an authorised Volvo dealer or
visit www.volvocars.com for information on
compatible phones and external media
players.
Navigate in the menu by turning TUNE.
Overview
NOTE
06
source is activated and you press MEDIA
then a shortcut menu is shown with commonly used menu options.
Applies to High Performance, High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
06 Infotainment system
Media BluetoothŸ*
Getting started
Connect an external BluetoothŸ device
A maximum of ten external devices can be registered. The connection is made in the same
way as for the phone, see Connect an external
Bluetooth® device, page 262.
Automatic connection
When the BluetoothŸ function is active and the
last external device connected is in range it is
connected automatically. When the infotainment system searches for the last device connected its name is shown in the TV screen. To
connect to another device, press EXIT. Connect a new external device, see "Change to
another external device" below.
2. Check that the external device is searchable/visible via BluetoothŸ, see the manual
for the external device.
3. Press OK/MENU.
4. Turn TUNE to Change device, and confirm with OK/MENU.
> After a while, the external device's name
is shown in the TV screen. If several
external devices have been paired then
these are also shown.
5. Select the device to be connected by turning TUNE and confirm with OK/MENU.
> Connection of the external device takes
place.
Change to another external device
/
on the
Change audio file by pressing
centre console or the steering wheel keypad*.
It is possible to change a connected device
with another device if there are several devices
in the car. However, the device must first have
been paired, see "Connect an external Bluetooth® device" above. To change to another
device:
Automatic disconnection takes place if the
external device moves out of the infotainment
system's range. For more information on connection, see page 259.
1. Press MEDIA, turn TUNE until Bluetooth
is shown, press OK/MENU.
Disconnecting the device
Remove the connected device
1. Press Bluetooth mode on OK/MENU.
3. Select the device to be removed by turning
TUNE, and confirm with OK/MENU.
> A prompt asking whether or not you
want to remove the connection is shown
in the TV screen.
4. Press OK/MENU to confirm.
EXIT cancels.
Random2
This function plays back the audio files on the
external device in random order. Activate/
deactivate the random function in Bluetooth
mode under Bluetooth menu Random.
Change audio file by pressing
/
on the
centre console or the steering wheel keypad*.
Scanning of audio files in external
device2
06
This function play backs the first ten seconds
of each audio file. Activate/deactivate the function in Bluetooth mode under Bluetooth menu
Scan.
Cancel scanning with EXIT.
2. Turn TUNE to Remove Bluetooth
device and confirm with OK/MENU.
2
Not supported by all mobile phones.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
259
06 Infotainment system
Media BluetoothŸ*
Version information BluetoothŸ
The car's current BluetoothŸ version can be
seen in Bluetooth mode under Bluetooth
menu Bluetooth software version in car.
06
260
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
06 Infotainment system
BluetoothŸ handsfree*
General
Overview
Phone functions, controls overview
System overview
Centre console control panel.
A mobile phone equipped with BluetoothŸ can
be connected wirelessly to the Infotainment
system1. The infotainment system then works
handsfree, with the option to control a range of
the mobile phone's functions remotely. The
microphone used is located by the driver's sun
visor (2). The mobile phone can be operated by
its own keys irrespective of whether or not it is
connected.
NOTE
Only a selection of mobile phones are fully
compatible with the handsfree function.
Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo dealer or
visit www.volvocars.com for information on
compatible phones.
Menus
Mobile phone
Number and letter buttons
Microphone
TEL button activates/searches last connected phone. If a phone is already connected, and TEL is pressed, a shortcut
menu is shown with commonly used menu
options for the phone.
Steering wheel keypad
Centre console control panel
The menus in TEL are controlled from the centre console and the steering wheel keypad*.
For general information on menu navigation,
see page 236 and menu overview, see
page 240.
1
06
TUNE - Turn in normal view to the right to
access the phone book, and to the left for
the call register for all calls; also used for
navigation among the options on the TV
screen.
Applies to High Performance, High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
261
06 Infotainment system
BluetoothŸ handsfree*
Accept incoming calls, confirm your selection or go to the Phone menu by pressing
OK/MENU.
EXIT - Cancels/rejects phone calls, deletes
input characters, leads up in the menu system and cancels the current function.
NOTE
If the car is equipped with a steering wheel
keypad* and/or remote control* then in
many cases these can be used instead of
the buttons in the centre console. For a
description of the steering wheel keypad,
see page 234. For a description of the
remote control, see page 278.
Remember
06
Activate
A short press on TEL activates/searches last
connected phone. If a phone is already connected, and TEL is pressed, a shortcut menu
is shown with commonly used menu options
symbol indicates that
for the phone. The
a phone is connected.
Connect an external BluetoothŸ device
A maximum of ten external devices can be registered. Registration is performed once per
device. After registration the device no longer
needs to be activated as visible/searchable.
262
It is possible to have two BluetoothŸ devices
connected simultaneously. One phone and
one media device, which it is possible to switch
between, see page 263 or see page 259. It is
also possible to use the phone while streaming
audio files from a connected device.
Connecting an external device takes place in
different ways depending on whether or not the
device has been connected previously.
To connect a device for the first time, follow the
connection alternatives below.
There are two possible ways of connecting
devices, either search for the external device
from the car, or search for the car from the
external device. If one option does not work
then try with the other.
Alternative 1 - search for the external device
via the car's menu system
1. Make the external device searchable/visible via BluetoothŸ, see the external device's manual or www.volvocars.com.
2. Press TEL.
> The car searches for previously connected devices.
3. Activate BluetoothŸ in the car. Press OK/
MENU, select Add phone or Change
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
phone if another phone is already connected.
If one or more devices have already been
connected then these are also shown.
Select the device you want to connect and
press OK/MENU.
> The menu option is shown on the TV
screen.
4. Check that the external device's
BluetoothŸ function is switched on and
press OK/MENU.
> The car searches for external devices in
the vicinity. The search takes approximately 30 seconds. The external devices detected are specified with their
respective BluetoothŸ name in the TV
screen. The handsfree function's
BluetoothŸ name is shown in the external device as My Volvo Car.
5. Turn TUNE to select one of the external
devices shown on the car's TV screen and
confirm with OK/MENU.
6. Enter the series of numbers (PIN code) that
is shown on the car's TV screen via the
mobile phone's keypad and press the
mobile phone's button to confirm the
selection.
The external device is now connected to the
car and can be controlled from the car.
06 Infotainment system
BluetoothŸ handsfree*
If connecting the phone is not successful:
Press EXIT and connect in accordance with
Alternative 2.
If connecting the media device is not successful: Connect in accordance with Alternative 2.
Alternative 2 - search for the car via the external device
1. Press TEL.
If an external device is already connected,
disconnect it.
> The car searches for previously connected devices.
2. Make the car searchable/visible via
BluetoothŸ. Press OK/MENU, select
Phone settings Discoverable.
3. Search for the car with the external device's BluetoothŸ function, see the manual
for the external device.
4. Select My Volvo Car in the list of devices
detected in your external device.
5. Enter a PIN code of your choice in the
external device via the external device's
keypad when prompted for a PIN. Then
enter the same PIN code via the car's keypad.
6. Choose to connect to My Volvo Car from
the external device.
When the connection is established, the external device's BluetoothŸ name is shown in the
car's TV screen. Now the external device can
be controlled from the car.
Automatic connection
When the handsfree function is active and the
last mobile phone connected is in range it is
connected automatically. If the last connected
mobile phone is not available then the system
will try to connect a mobile phone that was
paired earlier. When the audio system
searches for the last phone connected its name
is shown in the TV screen.
Manual connection
If you want to change the connected mobile
phone, go in phone mode to Phone menu
Change phone.
Change to another external device
It is possible to change a connected device
with another device if there are several devices
in the car. However, the device must first have
been registered to the car, see Connect an
external Bluetooth® device. To change to
another device:
1. Check that the external device is searchable/visible via BluetoothŸ, see the manual
for the external device.
2. Press TEL and then select Change
phone.
> The car searches for previously connected devices. The external devices
detected are specified with their respective BluetoothŸ name in the TV screen.
3. Select the device to be connected by turning TUNE and confirm with OK/MENU.
> Connection of the external device takes
place.
To call
1. Make sure that the
symbol appears
at the top of the TV screen and that the
handsfree function is in phone mode.
2. Dial either the desired number or speed
dial number, see page 268. Or in normal
view turn TUNE to the right to access the
phone book, and to the left for the call register for all calls. For information on the
phone book, see page 265.
06
3. Press OK/MENU.
The call is interrupted with EXIT.
Disconnecting the mobile phone
Automatic disconnection takes place if the
mobile phone moves out of the audio system's
range. The connection to the mobile phone can
be manually broken in phone mode under
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
263
06 Infotainment system
BluetoothŸ handsfree*
Phone menu Disconnect phone. For more
information on connection, see page 262.
Making and receiving calls
The handsfree function is deactivated when
the engine is switched off and the door is
opened2.
–
When the mobile phone has been disconnected an ongoing call can be continued by
using the mobile phone's built-in microphone
and speaker.
Refuse or end with EXIT.
NOTE
Even when your mobile phone has been
manually disconnected, some mobile
phones may automatically couple up to the
last handsfree unit connected, e.g. when a
new call begins.
Remove the device
06
A connected mobile phone can be deregistered and removed. This is performed in phone
mode under Phone menu Remove
Bluetooth device.
Incoming call
Press OK/MENU to answer the call, even
if the audio system is in e.g. RADIO or
MEDIA mode.
Automatic answer
The automatic answer function means that
calls are accepted automatically.
–
Activate/deactivate in phone mode under
Phone menu Call options Auto
answer.
Press OK/MENU during an ongoing call to
access the following functions:
• Mute - audio system microphone is
In phone mode it is possible to see all the call
lists under Phone menu All calls:
•
•
•
•
•
All calls
Missed calls
Answered calls
Dialled calls
Call duration
NOTE
Certain mobile phones show a list of the last
dialled numbers in reverse order.
muted.
• Mobile phone - the call is transferred from
handsfree to the mobile phone. For some
mobile phones the connection is interrupted. This is normal. The handsfree function
asks if you want to reconnect.
using the number keys (current call set in
standby).
264
The call lists are copied to the handsfree function at each new connection and are then
updated during the connection. In normal view,
turn to the left with TUNE to see the call register
for All calls .
In call menu
• Dial number - option to call a third party
2
Call lists
Only Keyless Drive.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Voice mailbox
In normal view a speed dial number for the
voice mailbox can be programmed in and then
accessed later via a long press on 1.
Voice mailbox number is changed in phone
mode under Phone menu Call options
Voicemail number Change number. If
06 Infotainment system
BluetoothŸ handsfree*
there is no number stored then this menu can
be reached with one long press on 1.
Audio settings
Phone call volume
The phone call volume can only be changed
during a call. Use the steering wheel keypad*
or turn the VOL control.
Audio system volume
Providing there is no ongoing call taking place,
the audio system volume is controlled as usual
by turning VOL.
If an audio source is active during an incoming
call then it can be muted automatically. Activate/deactivate in phone mode under Phone
menu Phone settings Sounds and
volume Mute radio/media.
Ring volume
In phone mode go to Phone menu Phone
settings Sounds and volume Ring
volume and adjust by turning VOL. Press OK/
MENU to hear the audio volume. Press EXIT
to save.
3
Ring signals
The handsfree function has integrated ring signals that can be selected in phone mode under
Phone menu Phone settings Sounds
and volume Ring signals Ring signal 1
etc.
NOTE
For some mobile phones, the ringtone on
the phone connected will not be switched
off when one of the inbuilt signals for the
handsfree system is used.
this phone book was downloaded is connected.
• The car also has a built-in phone book. This
contains all the contacts stored in the car
irrespective of which phone was connected when saving them. These contacts
are visible for all users, regardless of the
mobile phone that is connected to the car.
If a contact is saved in the car then the
symbol
is shown in front of the contact in the phone book.
NOTE
In order to select the connected phone's ring
signal3, go in phone mode to Phone menu
Phone settings Sounds and volume
Ring signals Mobile phone ring signal.
Phone book
There are two phone books. These are merged
into one in the car and are displayed as a single
phone book in the car.
• The car downloads the mobile phone's
phone book and only displays this phone
book when the mobile phone from which
Changes made from the car to a record in
the mobile phone's telephone book will
result in a new record in the car's telephone
book, i.e. changes will not be saved to the
phone. From the car, this will now look like
you have double records, with different
icons. Note also that when a shortcut number is saved or a change to a contact is
made, this will result in a new record in the
car's phone book.
06
All use of the phone book requires that the
symbol appears at the top of the TV
screen and that the handsfree function is in
phone mode.
Not supported by all mobile phones.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
265
06 Infotainment system
BluetoothŸ handsfree*
The audio system stores a copy of the phone
book from each paired mobile phone. The
phone book can be copied automatically to the
audio system during each connection.
–
Activate/deactivate the function in phone
mode under Phone menu Phone
settings Download phone book.
that the contact searched for starts with. For
example, a long press on the button for 6 gives
instant access to that part of the list where the
contacts with the letter M are located.
Character table keypad in centre
console
If the phone book contains a ringing caller's
contact information then this is shown in the TV
screen.
Quick search for contacts
In normal view turn TUNE to the right to obtain
a list of contacts. Turn TUNE to select and
press OK/MENU to call.
06
Under the name of the contact is the phone
number that is selected by default. If the symbol ! appears to the right of the contact then
there are several phone numbers stored for the
contact. Press OK/MENU to show the numbers. Change and dial a number other than that
selected by default by turning TUNE. Press
OK/MENU to dial.
Search in the list of contacts by using the centre console's keypad to key in the start of the
contact's name (see "Character table keypad
in centre console" for button functions).
The list of contacts can also be accessed from
normal view by pressing and holding the button
on the centre console's keypad with the letter
266
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Key
Function
Key
Function
+0pw
#*
Searching for contacts
Space . , - ? @ : ; / ( ) 1
ABCÅÄÆÀÇ2
DEFÈÉ3
GHIÌ4
JKL5
MNOÖØÑÒ6
Search contacts using the text wheel.
Character list
PQRSß7
TUVÜÙ8
WXYZ9
Shift between upper and lower
case letter.
Changing the input mode (see table below)
Phone book
To search for or edit a contact, go in phone
mode to Phone menu Phone book
Search.
06 Infotainment system
BluetoothŸ handsfree*
NOTE
There is no text wheel for High Performance,
so TUNE cannot be used there to input
characters: only the digit and letter buttons
on the control panel in the centre console
can be used for this.
123/
ABC
Change between letters and
numbers with OK/MENU.
More
Change to special characters
with OK/MENU.
New contact
Leads to the phone book (3).
Turn TUNE to select a contact,
press OK/MENU to see the
saved numbers and other information.
1. Turn4 TUNE to the desired letter, press
OK/MENU to confirm. The number and
letter buttons on the control panel in the
centre console can also be used.
2. Continue with the next letter and so on. The
result of the search is shown in the phone
book (3).
A short press on EXIT deletes an input character. A long press on EXIT will clear all entered
characters.
Entering letters for New contact.
3. To change the input mode to numbers or
special characters, or to go to the phone
book, turn TUNE to one of the options (see
explanation in the table below) in the list for
changing the input mode (2), press OK/
MENU.
By pressing a number key in the centre console
when the text wheel is shown (see illustration
above), a new character list (1) appears in the
TV screen. Continue repeatedly pressing the
number key to the desired letter and then
release. Continue with the next letter and so
on. When a button is depressed the entry is
confirmed when another button is depressed.
New contacts can be added in phone mode
under Phone menu Phone book New
contact.
To enter a number, hold in the corresponding
number key.
4
Changing the input mode (see table below)
Input field
06
NOTE
There is no text wheel for High Performance,
so TUNE cannot be used there to input
characters: only the digit and letter buttons
on the control panel in the centre console
can be used for this.
Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
267
06 Infotainment system
BluetoothŸ handsfree*
1. When the Name row is selected, press
OK/MENU to reach the input mode (illustration above).
123/
ABC
Change between letters and
numbers with OK/MENU.
2. Turn4 TUNE to the desired letter, press
OK/MENU to confirm. The number and
letter buttons on the control panel in the
centre console can also be used.
More
Change to special characters
with OK/MENU.
OK
Save and go back to Add contact with OK/MENU.
3. Continue with the next letter and so on. The
name entered is shown in the input field (2)
in the TV screen.
Change between uppercase and
lowercase letters with OK/
MENU.
4. To change the input mode to numbers,
special characters, change between
uppercase/lowercase letters, etc., turn
TUNE to one of the options (see explanation in the table below) in the list (1) and
then press OK/MENU.
06
When the name has been fully entered, select
OK in the list on the TV screen (1) and press
OK/MENU. Now continue with the telephone
number in the same way as above.
When the telephone number has been entered,
press OK/MENU and select a telephone number type (Mobile phone, Home, Work or
General). Press OK/MENU to confirm.
When all details have been filled in, select Save
contact in the menu to save the contact.
4
268
Press OK/MENU, the cursor
moves to the input field (2) at the
top of the TV screen. The cursor
can now be moved, with TUNE,
to the appropriate place to e.g.
insert new letters or delete with
EXIT. To be able to insert new
letters first go back to the input
mode, by pressing OK/MENU.
ing a number key and then pressing OK/
MENU. If there is no contact stored on the
speed dial number then an option is shown to
save a contact to the selected speed dial number.
Receiving a vCard
It is possible to receive a vCard to the car's
phone book from other mobile phones (other
than the one currently connected to the car). In
order to allow this the car is set to visible mode
for BluetoothŸ. The function is activated in
phone mode under Phone menu Phone
book Receive vCard.
Memory status
Memory status of the car's phone book and the
connected mobile phone's phone book can be
seen in phone mode under Phone menu
Phone book Memory status.
Delete phone book
Speed dial numbers
Use phone mode to add speed dial numbers
under Phone menu Phone book Speed
dial.
Dialling with speed dial numbers can be performed in phone mode using the number keys
on the keypad in the centre console, by press-
Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The car's phone book can be deleted, this is
carried out in phone mode under Phone menu
Phone book Clear phone book.
06 Infotainment system
BluetoothŸ handsfree*
NOTE
Deleting the car's telephone book only deletes contacts in the car's telephone book.
Contacts in the mobile phone's phone book
are not deleted.
Version information BluetoothŸ
The car's current BluetoothŸ version can be
seen in phone mode under Phone menu
Phone settings Bluetooth software
version in car.
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
269
06 Infotainment system
Voice recognition* mobile phone
General
The infotainment system's voice recognition1
allows the driver to voice-activate certain functions in a BluetoothŸ-connected mobile phone
or in Volvo's navigation system - RTI (Road and
Traffic Information System).
NOTE
•
•
06
The information in this section
describes the use of voice commands
to control a mobile phone connected
using BluetoothŸ. For detailed information on using a mobile phone connected using BluetoothŸ with the car's
Infotainment system see page 261.
The Volvo navigation system RTI (Road
and Traffic Information System) has a
separate user manual which contains
more information on voice control and
voice commands to control that system.
WARNING
The driver always holds overall responsibility for driving the vehicle in a safe manner
and complying with all applicable rules of
the road.
The voice recognition system allows the driver
to voice-activate certain functions of a
BluetoothŸ-connected mobile phone and in
Volvo's navigation system - RTI (Road and
Traffic Information System), while the driver
can keep his/her hands on the wheel at the
same time. The input data are in dialogue form
with spoken commands from the user and verbal replies from the system. The voice recognition system uses the same microphone as
the BluetoothŸ handsfree system (see illustration on page 261) and the voice recognition
system's replies come via the car's speakers.
Voice commands offer convenience and help
the driver to avoid being distracted, and
instead concentrate on driving and focus
attention on the road and traffic conditions.
1
270
Language
Only applies to vehicles equipped with Volvo's navigation system - RTI (Road and Traffic Information System).
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Language list.
Voice recognition is not possible for all languages. Languages available for voice recognition are marked with an icon in the language
list . Changing the language is performed
in the menu system MY CAR, see page 202.
06 Infotainment system
Voice recognition* mobile phone
Remember
Keep the following things in mind when you use
the voice recognition system:
• For a command - speak after the tone, with
normal voice at normal speed.
• Do not speak while the system is replying
(the system cannot understand commands
during this time).
• The car's doors, windows and sunroof*
must be closed.
•
Avoid background noise in the passenger
compartment.
NOTE
Steering wheel keypad.
Button for voice recognition
To activate the system
Before voice commands to a mobile phone can
be used the mobile phone must be paired and
connected via BluetoothŸ handsfree. If a telephone command is given and no mobile phone
is paired, then the system will provide information about this. For information on pairing and
connecting a mobile phone, see page 262.
• Press the button for voice recognition (1) in
order to activate the system and initiate a
dialogue with voice commands. The system will then display commonly used commands in the TV screen in the centre console.
If the driver is unsure of which command to
use, he (she) can say "Help" - the system
then responds with a few different commands which can be used in the current situation.
Voice commands can be disabled by:
•
•
•
•
Help functions for voice recognition
• Instructions: A function that helps you get
familiar with the system and the procedure
for giving commands.
• Voice training: A function that enables the
voice recognition system to learn to know
your voice and your accent. The function
provides an opportunity to voice train two
user profiles.
The help functions can be accessed by pressing the MY CAR button on the control panel in
the centre console and then turning TUNE to
the desired menu option.
Instructions
The instructions can be started in two ways:
NOTE
This instruction and voice training can only
be started when the car is parked.
06
saying "Cancel"
not speaking
• Press the button for Voice recognition and
a long press on the steering wheel button for Voice recognition
• Activate the instructions in the menu sys-
Press EXIT or another main source button (e.g. MEDIA).
say "Voice instructions".
tem MY CAR under Settings Voice
settings Voice tutorial. For a description of the menu system, see page 200.
The instructions are divided into 3 lessons,
which take around 5 minutes in total to complete. The system starts with the first lesson.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
271
06 Infotainment system
Voice recognition* mobile phone
To skip a lesson and go to the next one, press
the button for voice recognition and say
"Next". Go back to the previous lesson by saying "Previous".
Exit the instructions by means of a long press
on the button for voice recognition.
Voice training
The system displays up to fifteen phrases for
you to say. Voice training can be started in the
menu system MY CAR under Settings
Voice settings Voice training. Choose
between User 1 or User 2. For a description
of the menu system, see page 200.
06
Using voice commands
The driver initiates a dialogue with the voice
commands by pressing the button for voice
recognition (see illustration on page 271).
Once a dialogue has been started, commonly
used commands will be shown in the TV
screen. Greyed-out text or text within brackets
is not included in the spoken command.
When the driver becomes accustomed to the
system, he/she can speed up the command
dialogue and skip the prompts from the system, by briefly pressing the button for voice
recognition.
For a description of the menu system, see
page 200.
Dial a number
The system understands the numbers 0 (zero)
to 9 (nine). These numbers can be pronounced
individually, in groups of several numbers at a
time, or the whole number all at once. Numbers
greater than 9 (nine) cannot be handled by the
system, e.g. 10 (ten) or 11 (eleven) are not possible.
The following is an example of a dialogue with
voice commands. The system's reply will vary
depending on the situation.
After voice training has been completed,
remember to set your user profile under Voice
user setting.
Commands can be given in several ways
The user starts the dialogue by saying:
The command "Phone call contact" can be
pronounced as e.g.:
Phone > call number
Additional settings in MY CAR
• "Phone > Call contact" - Say "Phone", wait
Phone call number
for the system's reply, and then continue
by saying "Call contact."
• User setting - Two user profiles can be
set, the function is activated in the menu
system MY CAR under Settings Voice
settings Voice user setting. Choose
between User 1 or User 2. For a description of the menu system, see page 200.
• Voice volume - Can be changed in the
menu system MY CAR under Settings
Voice settings Voice output volume.
For a description of the menu system, see
page 200.
or
• "Phone call contact" - Say the whole command in one sequence.
Quick commands
Quick commands for the phone can be found
in the menu system MY CAR under Settings
Voice settings Voice command list
Phone commands and General commands.
or
System reply
Number?
User action
Start saying the numbers (as individual units,
i.e. six-eight-seven, etc.) in the phone number.
If you say several numbers and pause, the system will repeat them, and then say "Continue".
Continue to say the numbers. When finished,
finish the command by saying "Call".
• You can also change the number by saying
the commands "Correct" (which deletes
272
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
06 Infotainment system
Voice recognition* mobile phone
the last spoken group of numbers) or
"Delete" (which deletes the whole spoken
phone number).
play in the numbered rows and the system
prompts you to select a row number.
• If there are more rows in the list than can
be displayed simultaneously, saying
"Down" allows you to scroll down in the list
(and saying "Up" allows you to scroll up in
the list).
Dialling from the call register
The following dialogue allows you to make a
phone call from one of your mobile phone's call
registers.
The user starts the dialogue by saying:
Phone > call from the call register
or
Phone call from the call register
Continue by responding to the system's
prompts.
Calling voice mailbox
The following dialogue allows you to call your
voice mailbox to check if you have received
any messages. The phone number for your
voice mailbox must be registered in the
BluetoothŸ function, see page 264.
The user starts the dialogue by saying:
Phone > call voice mailbox
Call a contact
The following dialogue allows you to call your
pre-defined contacts in the mobile phone.
The user starts the dialogue by saying:
Phone > call contact
or
Phone call voice mailbox
06
Continue by responding to the system's
prompts.
or
Phone call contact
Continue by responding to the system's
prompts.
Consider the following when you call a contact:
• If there are several contacts with similar
names, they will be presented in the dis-
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
273
06 Infotainment system
TV*
General
NOTE
This system only supports TV transmissions
in countries which transmit signals in
mpeg-2 format and follow the DVB-T standard. The system does not support TV transmissions in mpeg-4 format or analogue
transmissions.
NOTE
The TV picture is only shown when the car
is stationary. When the car is moving at a
speed over about 6 km/h the picture disappears, No visual media available while
driving appears on the display screen,
although the audio is heard during this time.
The picture reappears when the car has
stopped.
06
IMPORTANT
A TV licence is required for this product in
some countries.
Menus
The menus in MEDIA are controlled from the
centre console and the steering wheel keypad*. For general information on menu navigation, see page 236 and menu overview, see
page 240.
Overview
Navigate in channel lists or menus by turning TUNE.
Confirm your selection or go to the menu
by pressing OK/MENU.
EXIT - leads up in the menu system, stops
the function in progress.
The next available channel is shown by
/
.
pressing
If the car is equipped with a steering wheel
keypad* and/or remote control* then in
many cases these can be used instead of
the buttons in the centre console. For a
description of the steering wheel keypad,
see page 234. For a description of the
remote control, see page 278.
NOTE
274
Station presets, numeric input.
NOTE
Cars with RSE do not shut off the rear
screens.
The reception is dependent both on how
good the signal strength and signal quality
are. The transmission may be disturbed by
various factors such as tall buildings or the
TV transmitter being far away. Coverage
level can also vary depending on where in
the country you are located.
cut menu is shown with commonly used
menu options.
Centre console control panel.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
MEDIA button. Last active source (e.g.
iPodŸ or TV) is activated. If a source is activated and you press MEDIA then a short-
06 Infotainment system
TV*
Watch TV
–
Press MEDIA, turn TUNE until TV is shown
in the TV screen, press OK/MENU.
> A search starts and after a short while
the most recently used channel is
shown.
Changing channel
NOTE
If no reception is available on the preset
buttons, it may be because the car is at a
location other than where the scan of TV
channels was run, for example, if the car
was driven from Germany to France. A new
selection of country and a new search may
then need to be carried out.
set is shown. When the scan is complete a message is shown and the picture is shown. A preset list (max. 30 presets) has now been created and is available. To change channel, see
page 275.
The scan and preset storage can be cancelled
with EXIT.
It is possible to change channel as follows:
• Turn TUNE, a list of all available channels
in the area is shown. If any of these channels is already saved as a preset then its
preset number is shown to the right of the
channel name. Continue turning TUNE to
reach the desired channel and press OK/
MENU.
• By pressing the preset buttons (0-9).
• Via a short press on the
/
buttons
the next available channel in the area is
shown.
NOTE
If the car has been moved within the country, for example, from one city to another, it
is not certain that the presets are available
at the new location as the frequency range
may have changed. In which case, carry out
a new search and save a new preset list, see
the function "Save the available TV channels
as presets", page 276.
Searching TV channels/Preset list
Channel management
1. Press TV mode on OK/MENU.
The preset list can be edited. You can change
the order of the channels that are shown in the
preset list. A TV channel can have more than
one place in the preset list. The TV channel
positions can also vary in the preset list.
2. Turn TUNE to TV menu and press OK/
MENU.
3. Turn TUNE to Select country and press
OK/MENU.
> If one or more countries have previously
been selected then they are shown in a
list.
4. Turn TUNE to either Other countries or
one of the previously selected countries.
Press OK/MENU.
> A list of all available countries is shown.
5. Turn TUNE to the desired country (e.g.
Sweden) and press OK/MENU.
> An automatic scan for available TV
channels starts, this scan takes a little
while. During this time the figure for
each channel found and added as a pre-
To change the order in the preset list, go in TV
mode to TV menu Reorganise presets.
1. Turn TUNE to the channel you want to
move in the list and confirm with OK/
MENU.
> The selected channel is highlighted.
06
2. Turn TUNE to the new location in the list
and confirm with OK/MENU.
> The channels change places with each
other.
After the preset channels (max. 30) come all the
other channels available in the area. It is pos-
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
275
06 Infotainment system
TV*
sible to move a channel up to a place in the
preset list.
Save the available TV channels as
presets
If the car has been moved within the country,
for example, from one city to another, it is not
certain that the presets are available at the new
location as the frequency range may have
changed. In which case, carry out another scan
and save a new preset list.
1. Press TV mode on OK/MENU.
2. Turn TUNE to TV menu and press OK/
MENU.
06
3. Turn TUNE to Autostore and press OK/
MENU.
> An automatic scan for available TV
channels starts, this scan takes a little
while. During this time the figure for
each channel found and added as a preset is shown. When the scan is complete a message is shown and the picture is shown. A preset list (max. 30 presets) has now been created and is available. To change channel, see
page 275.
area where you are. When a channel is found,
it is shown for approx. 10 seconds before
scanning is resumed. Scanning is stopped with
EXIT, then the channel that you just watched
continues to be shown. Scanning does not
affect the preset list.
Activate scanning in TV mode under TV menu
Scan.
Teletext
It is possible to read Teletext. Follow these
steps:
1. Press the
trol.
Enter new page number, or press the remote
control buttons
/
to go to the next page.
Return to TV screen with EXIT or by pressing
the
button on the remote control.
It is also possible to control the teletext with the
coloured buttons on the remote control.
This function automatically scans through the
frequency range for all channels available in the
276
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Press the INFO button in order to display the
information about the current programme, the
next programme and its start time. If the
INFO button is pressed once more then additional information on the current programme
can sometimes be displayed, such as start and
end times and a brief description of the current
programme. For more information on the
INFO button, see page 233.
To return to the TV picture, wait several seconds or press EXIT.
button on the remote con-
2. Enter the page number (3 digits) with the
number keys (0-9) to select page.
> The page is shown automatically.
Scanning the TV channels
Information about the current
programme
Picture settings
The settings for brightness and contrast can be
adjusted. For more information, see page 254.
The reception is lost
If the reception for the TV channel that is being
shown disappears then the picture will freeze.
Shortly after this a message appears informing
that the reception has been lost for the current
TV channel, and a new search for the channel
continues. When the reception returns the display of the TV channel starts immediately. It is
possible to change channel at any time when
the message is shown.
If the message Reception lost, searching is
shown then this is because the system has
06 Infotainment system
TV*
detected that there is no reception for all TV
channels. One possible reason may be that a
border has been crossed and that the system
is set to the wrong country. In which case,
change to the right country in accordance with
"Searching TV channels/Preset list", see
page 275.
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
277
06 Infotainment system
Remote control*
General*
The remote control can be used for all functions in the infotainment system. The remote
control's buttons have the same functions as
the buttons in the centre console or steering
wheel keypad*.
When using the remote control, first press the
remote control's button
to position F.
Then aim the remote control at the IR receiver,
which is located to the right of the INFO button
(see page 233) in the centre console.
If the car is fitted with rear TV screens* and you
want to operate one of these, select the
on the
required TV screen with the button
remote control. Then aim the remote control at
the IR receiver for the TV screen to be operated, see page 280.
WARNING
06
Keep loose objects such as mobile phones,
cameras, remote controls for accessories,
etc. in the glove compartment or other compartments. Otherwise they may injure people in the car in the event of sudden braking
or a collision.
NOTE
Corresponds to TUNE in the centre console.
278
Do not expose the remote control to direct
sunlight (e.g. on the instrument panel) - otherwise problems may arise with the batteries.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
functions
Key
Function
Change between:
L = Rear left TV screen*
F = Front TV screen
R = Rear right TV screen*
Change to navigation*
Change to radio source (AM,
FM1 etc.)
Change to media source (Disc,
TV* etc.)
Change to BluetoothŸ handsfree*
Scroll/fast rewind, change track/
song.
Play/pause
Stop
Scroll/fast forward, change
track/song.
Menu
06 Infotainment system
Remote control*
Key
Function
Key
Function
To previous, cancels function,
deletes input characters
Subtitles, selection of language
for text
Navigate up/down
Teletext*, On/Off
Navigate right/left
Confirm selection or go to the
menu system for the selected
source
Volume, decrease
Replacing the battery in the remote
control
NOTE
Battery life is normally 1-4 years and
depends on how much the remote control
is used.
1. Push down the catch on the battery cover
and slide the battery cover in the direction
of the infrared lens.
The remote control is powered by four batteries of the AA/LR6 type.
2. Remove the used batteries, turn the new
batteries in accordance with the symbols
in the battery compartment and fit them.
Take along extra batteries for a long journey.
3. Refit the cover.
Volume, increase
0-9
Preset channels, number and letter input
Shortcuts for favourite setting.
Information about the current
programme, song, etc. Also used
when there is more information
available than can be shown in
the TV screen.
06
NOTE
Be sure to dispose of the exhausted batteries in an environmentally safe manner.
Selection of language for soundtrack
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
279
06 Infotainment system
RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system*
Overview
06
TV screen
General
Headphones socket
The RSE system is a system for rear-seat
entertainment that makes it possible to e.g.
watch video, play music, listen to the radio,
watch TV* or connect other external devices
(e.g. a games console).
On/Off button
A/V-AUX input
Remote control
Headphones
IR receiver/transmitter
The RSE system is fully integrated with the
car's infotainment system and can be used
simultaneously with other functions of the infotainment system.
When the rear seat passengers are using e.g.
A/V-AUX or watching TV* while listening with
headphones, the driver and front seat passenger can still use the car's radio or media player.
280
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
However, only one disc at a time can be played
in the media player. It is possible to play back
music from e.g. an iPodŸ or steaming audio
files via BluetoothŸ.
The RSE system can be controlled from the
front TV screen (parental control).
It is possible to display or play back various
media from different sources on each TV
screen. It is also possible to display or play
back media from the same source on one or
more of the TV screens (front, right rear and left
rear). It is not possible to play back video from
06 Infotainment system
RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system*
USB while a CD or DVD disc is being played
back.
IMPORTANT
When loading luggage and large objects in
the vehicle, ensure that sufficient space is
left for the TV screens in the head restraints,
so that the TV screens are not scratched or
damaged. Cover the TV screens with appropriate covering material during loading.
Wireless headphones
NOTE
For prolonged use (more than 10 minutes)
with the engine switched off, the capacity of
the vehicle's battery may fall to such a low
level that it is not possible to start the
engine.
In this case a message will be displayed on
the screen.
Menus
NOTE
The TV screens and remote control do not
work at very low or high temperatures - they
only "come alive" after the climate control
system has created an acceptable operating temperature in the passenger compartment.
NOTE
Clean the lens on the IR receiver regularly
with a damp cloth, a dirty lens affects
remote control function.
Power consumption, ignition positions
The system can be activated in ignition position
I or II and while the engine is running. When the
car is being started the film stops temporarily
and continues when the engine has started.
The menus for RSE are controlled using the
remote control. For general information on
menu navigation and menu structures, see
page 286.
Control for channel A (CH.A) or channel B
(CH.B)
Remote control
On/Off button
The RSE system is equipped with a remote
control. Using this it is possible to control the
functions for each TV screen. The remote control can also be used to control other functions
in the infotainment system, even from the rear
seat.
Volume
For information on the remote control, see
page 278.
Indicator lamp On/Off
06
The RSE system includes two wireless headphones.
The wireless headphones are activated with
the On/Off button (2), an indicator lamp illuminates (4). Select CH.A (channel A) or CH.B
(channel B) using the control (1). Adjust the volume using the volume control (3).
The headphones are automatically switched
off after about 3 minutes if they are not used.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
281
06 Infotainment system
RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system*
Battery replacement in wireless
headphones
The headphones are powered by two batteries
of the AAA model.
Take along extra batteries for a long journey.
Headphones socket
Connection of A/V-AUX input
It is possible to connect external headphones
via the headphones socket (3.5 mm) on the
side of the head restraints, see the illustration
on page 280. The volume is controlled using
the remote control.
A/V-AUX input, Electrical socket 12 V
The input allows you to connect other equipment. Always follow the instructions included
with the external equipment, or from the manufacturer or reseller, when connecting. Equipment connected via the A/V-AUX input can use
the TV screens, wireless headphones, headphones sockets and the car's speakers.
NOTE
Wireless headphones.
06
1. Unscrew the screw and detach the battery
cover.
The customer is responsible that equipment
connected to the A/V-AUX input or headphones socket does not cause interference
in the vehicle's RSE system.
2. Remove the used batteries, turn the new
batteries in accordance with the symbols
in the battery compartment and insert
them.
3. Fit the cover and screw in the screw.
The A/V-AUX input is located under the armrest in
the tunnel console.
1. Connect the video cable to the yellow
socket.
2. Connect the left-hand audio cable to the
white socket and the right-hand one to the
red socket.
3. Connect the power cable to the electrical
socket if your equipment is designed for 12
V.
Always follow the instructions for the external
equipment when connecting.
For electrical socket location, see page 227
Environmental care
Be sure to dispose of the exhausted batteries
in an environmentally safe manner.
282
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
06 Infotainment system
RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system*
Playing back audio/video via the A/VAUX input
1. Press MEDIA, turn TUNE to scroll down to
RSE on the TV screen, confirm selection
with OK/MENU.
Settings from the front TV screen
1. Switch on the rear TV screen by means
pressing the On/Off button on the TV
screen.
2. Turn TUNE to select the right, left-hand or
both TV screens, and confirm with OK/
MENU.
2. Aim the remote control at the IR receiver
, turn
on the TV screen and press
TUNE to A/V AUX , confirm selection with
.
3. Turn TUNE to select RADIO, MEDIA (or
RSE settings). Press OK/MENU to confirm.
4. Turn TUNE to the desired source (e.g.
Disc) and confirm with OK/MENU. The
selected source will start automatically (if
e.g. a disc is in the media player).
3. Switch on the connected device and press
PLAY or equivalent on the connected
device.
MEDIA
Cancel and go back with EXIT.
The input volume is adjusted in the menu under
A/V AUX input volume.
TUNE
The remote control can also be used for settings. For more information on the remote control, see page 278.
To activate the system
EXIT
Input volume
The RSE system can be activated from either
the front or rear TV screen.
From the front TV screen, press MEDIA, turn
TUNE and select RSE, confirm with OK/
MENU.
From the rear TV screen, by means of pressing
the On/Off button on the rear TV screen and
then pressing
or
on the remote
control, turn TUNE and select a source (e.g.
Disc), confirm selection with
.
OK/MENU
Parental control for the TV*
Selection of source in the rear TV
screens
From the front TV screen it is possible to select
the source (what shall be displayed or played
back) for the right and left-hand rear TV
screens respectively. It is possible select the
same source for both or different sources for
the right and left-hand TV screens respectively.
It is possible to set a permitted age limit for the
TV, so that only programmes for the appropriate age can be viewed. The setting is activated
for both TV screens.
06
Activate under RSE settings TV parental
control, in accordance with point 2-4 in the
section "Selection of source in the rear TV
screens", see page 283. Choose between Age
0-6, Age 7-13, Age 14-18 and No parental
control.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
283
06 Infotainment system
RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system*
Audio off
TV screen settings1 rear TV screen
It is possible to mute the two rear TV screens
from the front TV screen. The function is activated under RSE settings Mute, in accordance with point 2-4 in the section "Selection of
source in the rear TV screens", see page 283.
When playing back video files and displaying
TV* a pop-up menu is available by means of
on the remote control. The poppressing
up menu has different content depending on
what is being played back or displayed.
TV screen off
Day/Night mode
It is possible to switch off the video for the two
rear TV screens from the front TV screen. The
function is activated under RSE settings
Display off, in accordance with point 2-4 in the
section "Selection of source in the rear TV
screens", see page 283.
The TV screen can be set in three different
modes for different light conditions. Choose
between Auto, Day and Night.
Press one of the remote control's numeric keys
(0 - 9) to switch on the TV screen again. The TV
screen is also switched to the On mode when
the ignition is switched on.
06
Switching off the remote control (front)
It is possible to switch off the IR receiver for the
front TV screen, which means that the remote
control cannot be used for the front TV screen.
The function is activated under RSE settings
Disable remote control (front), in accordance with point 2-4 in the section "Selection of
source in the rear TV screens", see page 283.
1
2
284
Press
on the remote control and change
the mode under Day/Night mode on the TV
screen. For general information on menu navigation and menu structures, see page 286.
Picture settings
You can adjust the settings for brightness, contrast, shade and colour.
Press
on the remote control and change
the mode under Image settings on the TV
screen. For general information on menu navigation and menu structures, see page 286.
Display format
It is possible to choose between display formats Normal, Zoom and Screen fit.
Only available for playing back video files and displaying TV*.
Only applies to DVD video discs.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Normal - The image is shown in its normal
mode (normally 4:3 or 16:9 format).
Zoom - Full screen used but parts of the image
are cut off.
Screen fit - Full screen used but image proportions may be slightly distorted.
Unless otherwise stated the image is displayed
in the screen format Normal.
Press
on the remote control and change
the mode under Screen format on the TV
screen. For general information on menu navigation and menu structures, see page 286.
Source menu
What is shown in the pop-up menu for the
source menu depends on what is being played
back or displayed, it can be e.g. CD/DVD data
menu or USB menu. For general information
on menu navigation and menu structures, see
page 286.
DVD disc's menu2
If a DVD video disc is played back then this
menu option is shown in the pop-up menu. For
general information on menu navigation and
menu structures, see page 286.
06 Infotainment system
RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system*
Menu settings from the rear TV screen
TV settings*
For general information on menu navigation
and menu structures, see page 286.
Searching TV channels/Preset list
Random3
See page 275.
See page 253.
Save the available TV channels as
presets
Repeat folder4
See page 276.
See page 253.
DivXŸ Video On Demand4
The media player can be registered in order to
play DivX VOD type files from burned discs or
USB. The code for registration is available in
disc mode or USB mode under DivX® VOD
code. For more information visit
www.divx.com/vod.
USB hub
It is possible to connect a USB hub to the USB
connection, see page 257.
1. Switch on the wireless headphones, select
CH.A for left-hand screen or CH.B for
right-hand screen.
2. Aim the remote control at the IR receiver
on the TV screen and press
, turn
TUNE to desired source (Disc, USB,
AUX etc.), confirm selection with
.
3. Insert a CD disc in the car's media player
or connect an external audio source via the
car's USB port/AUX input or via BluetoothŸ.
Scanning the TV channels
See page 276.
Music, video, radio and TV*
Playback and navigation in playlists
Playing back music
It is possible to play back music from disc
tracks/audio files via the car's media player,
USB port/AUX input or via streaming audio files
from a BluetoothŸ-connected phone.
NOTE
The system only supports one iPodŸ user at
a time in the navigation mode (playlist).
Rotate the scroll wheel on the remote control
to access the playlist/folder structure.
either gives confirmation of subfolder selection
or starts playing back the selected disc track/
audio file. It is also possible to play back the
disc track/audio file using
on the remote
control and change the disc tracks/audio file
using
/
. Stop playback using
.
06
For more information, see page 252.
For more information about media players,
USB/AUX and Media BluetoothŸ, see the
pages 251, 255 and 258.
3
4
Watching video
It is possible to watch video from disc tracks/
video files via the car's media player or USB
port.
Applies to CD-Audio, CD/DVD discs, USB and iPodŸ.
Applies to CD/DVD discs and USB.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
285
06 Infotainment system
RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system*
For more information about media players and
USB, see the pages 251 and 255.
1. Switch on the wireless headphones, select
CH.A for left-hand screen or CH.B for
right-hand screen.
2. Aim the remote control at the IR receiver
, turn
on the TV screen and press
TUNE to desired source (Disc or USB),
confirm selection with
.
3. Insert a DVD disc in the car's media player
or connect an external source via the car's
USB port.
Playback and navigation
06
Play back disc track/video file using
on
the remote control and change disc track/
video file using
/
. Stop playback
. For more information about playusing
back and navigation of DVD video discs, see
page 253 and for video files, see page 252.
Fast forward/reverse
Start fast forward/rewind by means of a long
press on the buttons
/
. Then
increase fast forward/rewind speed by short
presses the buttons. Audio files are fast forwarded/rewound at one speed, while video
files can be fast forwarded/rewound at four different speeds. Fast forward/rewind is stopped
-,
- or the equivalent
by pressing
opposite
/
button.
286
Listening to radio
It is possible to listen to radio via the car's
radio.
1. Switch on the wireless headphones, select
CH.A for left-hand screen or CH.B for
right-hand screen.
2. Aim the remote control at the IR receiver
, turn
on the TV screen and press
TUNE to desired source (AM, FM1,
DAB1* etc.), confirm selection with
.
3. Select a station with one of the preset buttons (0 - 9) on the remote control or press
/
, the radio will search for the
next/previous available station.
For more information on the radio, see
page 244.
Watching TV*
It is possible to watch TV via the car's media
player.
1. Switch on the wireless headphones, select
CH.A for left-hand screen or CH.B for
right-hand screen.
2. Aim the remote control at the IR receiver
on the TV screen and press
, turn
TUNE to TV, confirm selection with
.
3. Select a channel with one of the preset
buttons (0 - 9) on the remote control or
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
press
/
, the next/previous
channel available in the area is displayed.
For more information on the TV, see page 274.
Menu navigation RSE
General
The RSE menus are operated both from the
front TV screen, and from either of the rear TV
screens. From the front TV screen it is possible
to both activate a source for a rear TV screen,
and to make certain settings for the two rear TV
screens.
RSE menus front TV screen
To access the menu RSE must first be selected
under MEDIA via the front TV screen. Then
press OK/MENU to access the menu. Turn
TUNE to the desired selection and confirm with
OK/MENU. The remote control and steering
wheel keypad can also be used.
It is possible to make settings for either right or
left-hand TV screen or both TV screens.
Left RSE screen menu, Right RSE screen
menu and Both RSE screen menus:
Power off/Power on
RADIO
MEDIA
06 Infotainment system
RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system*
RSE settings
Mute
Display off
Disable remote control (front)
TV parental control
Reset all RSE settings
Pop-up menu
RSE5
Press
on the remote control when a
video file is being played back or the TV* is
being displayed in order to access the pop-up
menu. Menu selections are made using the
scroll wheel and the buttons on the remote
control. For information on the remote control,
see page 278.
Screen format
RSE menus rear TV screens
Press
on the remote control when a
source (e.g. Disc) is selected in order to access
the RSE menus for the rear TV screen.
Menu selections are made using the scroll
wheel and the buttons on the remote control.
For information on the remote control, see
page 278.
RADIO
RSE CD/DVD Data menu
Disc menu
Random
Repeat folder
DivX® VOD code
Day/Night mode
Display off
Reset disc settings
Menu valid for AM, FM1, FM2, DAB1* and
DAB2*:
RSE DVD Video menu
DVD Video Menu
Day/Night mode
Display off
Reset all RSE settings
MEDIA
Image settings
Day/Night mode
RSE CD Audio menu
Source menu6
Disc menu
DVD disc menu7
Reset disc settings
Random
DVD disc menu
Subtitles
Audio tracks
Advanced settings
06
Day/Night mode
Display off
Reset disc settings
Day/Night mode
Display off
5
6
7
Only applies when playing back videos or displaying TV*.
What is shown in the pop-up menu for the source menu depends on what is being played back or displayed, it can be e.g. CD/DVD data menu or USB menu.
Only applies to DVD video discs.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
287
06 Infotainment system
RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system*
RSE USB menu
RSE iPod menu
USB menu
iPod menu
Random
Random
Repeat folder
Day/Night mode
DivX® VOD code
Display off
Select USB device
Reset iPod settings
Day/Night mode
RSE BluetoothŸ menu
Display off
Bluetooth menu
Reset USB settings
Random
RSE AUX menu
Day/Night mode
AUX menu
Display off
AUX input volume
06
Reset Bluetooth settings
Day/Night mode
RSE TV menu*
Display off
TV menu
Reset AUX settings
RSE A/V-AUX menu
Autostore
A/V AUX menu
Scan
A/V AUX input volume
Day/Night mode
Day/Night mode
Display off
Display off
Reset TV settings
Reset AUX settings
288
Select country
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
06 Infotainment system
06
289
Recommendations during driving.........................................................
Refuelling..............................................................................................
Fuel.......................................................................................................
Loading.................................................................................................
Cargo area............................................................................................
Driving with a trailer..............................................................................
Towing and recovery.............................................................................
290
292
295
296
299
302
305
311
DURING YOUR JOURNEY
07 During your journey
Recommendations during driving
General
For more information and further advice, see
the pages 12 and 382.
Economical driving
Driving economically means driving smoothly
while thinking ahead and adjusting your driving
style and speed to the prevailing conditions.
• Drive in the highest gear possible, adapted
to the current traffic situation and road lower engine speeds result in lower fuel
consumption.
• Avoid driving with open windows.
• Avoid sudden unnecessary acceleration
and heavy braking.
• Remove unnecessary items from the car the greater the load the higher the fuel consumption.
• Use engine braking to slow down, when it
can take place without risk to other road
users.
• A roof load and ski box increase air resistance, leading to higher fuel consumption
- remove the load carriers when not in use.
07
• Do not run the engine to operating temperature at idling speed, but rather drive
with a light load as soon as possible - a
cold engine consumes more fuel than a
warm one.
• A car with D4 AWD or D5 AWD engine in
combination with a 6-speed manual gearbox is started in 2nd gear.
292
WARNING
Never switch off the engine while moving,
such as downhill, this deactivates important
systems such as the power steering and
brake servo.
Driving in water
The car can be driven through water at a maximum depth of 25 cm at a maximum speed of
10 km/h. Extra caution should be exercised
when passing through flowing water.
During driving in water, maintain a low speed
and do not stop the car. When the water has
been passed, depress the brake pedal lightly
and check that full brake function is achieved.
Water and mud for example can make the
brake linings wet resulting in delayed brake
function.
• Clean the electric contacts of the electric
engine block heater and trailer coupling
after driving in water and mud.
• Do not let the car stand with water over the
sills for any long period of time - this could
cause electrical malfunctions.
IMPORTANT
Engine damage can occur if water enters
the air filter.
In depths greater than 25 cm, water could
enter the transmission. This reduces the
lubricating ability of the oils and shortens
the service life of these systems.
In the event of the engine stalling in water,
do not try restart - tow the car from the water
to a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Risk of engine
breakdown.
Engine, gearbox and cooling system
Under special conditions, for example hard
driving in hilly terrain and hot climate, there is
a risk that the engine and drive system may
overheat - in particular with a heavy load.
For information about overheating when driving with a trailer, see page 305.
• Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front
of the grille when driving in hot climates.
• If the temperature in the engine's cooling
system is too high the instrument panel's
warning symbol is illuminated and there is
a text message displayed there High
engine temp Stop safely - stop the car in
a safe way and allow the engine to run at
idling speed for several minutes to cool
down.
07 During your journey
Recommendations during driving
• If the text message High engine temp
•
•
•
Stop engine or Coolant level low, Stop
engine is shown then the engine must be
switched off after stopping the car.
In the event of overheating in the gearbox
a built-in protection function is activated
which, amongst other things, illuminates
the instrument panel's warning symbol and
there is a text message displayed there
Transmission hot Reduce speed or
Transmission hot Stop safely - follow
the recommendation given and lower the
speed and stop the car in a safe way and
allow the engine to run at idling speed for
a few minutes to allow the gearbox to cool
down.
If the car overheats, the air conditioning
may be switched off temporarily.
Do not turn the engine off immediately you
stop after a hard drive.
NOTE
It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to
operate for a while after the engine has been
switched off.
Open tailgate
WARNING
Do not drive with the tailgate open. Toxic
exhaust fumes could be drawn into the car
through the cargo area.
least 15 minutes - battery charging is more
effective during driving than running the
engine at idling speed while stationary.
Before a long journey
• Check that the engine is working normally
and that fuel consumption is normal.
• Make sure that there are no leaks (fuel, oil
Do not overload the battery
or other fluid).
The electrical functions in the car load the battery to varying degrees. Avoid using the key
position II when the engine is switched off.
Instead use the I mode - which uses less
power.
• Check all bulbs and tyre tread depths.
• Carrying a warning triangle is a legal
Also, be aware of different accessories that
load the electrical system. Do not use functions
which use a lot of power when the engine is
switched off. Examples of such functions are:
Check the following in particular before the
cold season:
•
•
•
•
ventilation fan
headlamps
windscreen wiper
audio system (high volume).
If the battery voltage is low the information display shows the text Low battery Power save
mode. The energy-saving function then shuts
down certain functions or reduces certain
functions such as the ventilation fan and/or
audio system.
–
In which case, charge the battery by starting the engine and then running it for at
requirement in certain countries.
Winter driving
• The engine coolant must contain at least
50% glycol. This mixture protects the
engine against frost erosion down to
approximately –35 °C. To achieve optimum
antifreeze protection, different types of glycol must not be mixed.
• The fuel tank must be kept filled to prevent
condensation.
07
• Engine oil viscosity is important. Oils with
lower viscosity (thinner oils) facilitate starting in cold weather and also reduce fuel
consumption while the engine is cold. For
more information on suitable oils, see
page 379.
293
07 During your journey
Recommendations during driving
IMPORTANT
Low viscosity oil must not be used for hard
driving or in hot weather.
• The condition of the battery and charge
level must be inspected. Cold weather places great demands on the battery and its
capacity is reduced by the cold.
• Use washer fluid to avoid ice forming in the
washer fluid reservoir.
To achieve optimum roadholding Volvo recommends using winter tyres on all wheels if
there is a risk of snow or ice.
NOTE
The use of winter tyres is a legal requirement
in certain countries. Studded tyres are not
permitted in all countries.
Slippery driving conditions
07
294
Practise driving on slippery surfaces under
controlled conditions to learn how the car
reacts.
07 During your journey
Refuelling
Refuelling
Opening the fuel filler flap manually
Opening/closing the fuel cap
The fuel filler flap can be opened manually
when electric opening from the passenger
compartment is not possible.
A certain overpressure may arise in the tank in
the event of high outside temperatures. Open
the cap slowly.
1. Open/remove the side hatch in the cargo
area (same side as fuel filler flap) and locate
the green cord with handle.
• After refuelling - refit the cap and turn it
Opening/closing the fuel filler flap
Open the fuel filler flap using the button on the
lighting panel - the flap opens when the button
is released.
The arrow on the information display's
symbol reminds which side of the car
the fuel filler cap is located.
2. Pull the cord gently straight back until the
fuel filler flap folds out with a "click".
• Close the fuel filler flap by pressing it in until
a click confirms that it is closed.
IMPORTANT
Pull the wire gently - minimal force is
required to disengage the hatch lock.
until one or more clicking sounds are
heard.
Filling up with fuel
• Do not overfill the tank but fill until the
pump nozzle cuts out.
07
NOTE
Excess fuel in the tank can overflow in hot
weather.
295
07 During your journey
Fuel
General information on fuel
Fuel of a lower quality than that recommended
by Volvo must not be used as engine power
and fuel consumption is negatively affected.
WARNING
Always avoid inhaling fuel vapour and getting fuel splashes in the eyes.
In the event of fuel in the eyes, remove any
contact lenses and rinse the eyes in plenty
of water for at least 15 minutes and seek
medical attention.
Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol,
bioethanol and mixtures of them and diesel
are highly toxic and could cause permanent
injury or be fatal if swallowed. Seek medical
attention immediately if fuel has been swallowed.
WARNING
Fuel which spills onto the ground can be
ignited.
07
Switch off the fuel-driven heater before starting to refuel.
Never carry an activated mobile phone
when refuelling. The ring signal could cause
spark build-up and ignite petrol fumes,
leading to fire and injury.
296
IMPORTANT
Mixing different types of fuel or the use of
fuel not recommended invalidates Volvo's
guarantees, and any associated service
agreement. This applies to all engines.
NOTE: It does not apply to cars with engines
that are adapted to run on ethanol fuel (E85).
NOTE
Extreme weather conditions, driving with a
trailer or driving at high altitudes in combination with fuel grade are factors that could
affect the car's performance.
Catalytic converters
The purpose of the catalytic converters is to
purify exhaust gases. They are located close to
the engine so that operating temperature is
reached quickly.
The catalytic converters consist of a monolith
(ceramic or metal) with channels. The channel
walls are lined with a thin layer of platinum/rhodium/palladium. These metals act as catalysts,
i.e. they participate in and accelerate a chemical reaction without being used up themselves.
Lambda-sondTM oxygen sensor
The Lambda-sond is part of a control system
intended to reduce emissions and improve fuel
economy.
An oxygen sensor monitors the oxygen content
of the exhaust gases leaving the engine. This
value is fed into an electronic system that continuously controls the injectors. The ratio of fuel
to air directed to the engine is continuously
adjusted. These adjustments create optimal
conditions for efficient combustion, and
together with the three-way catalytic converter
reduce harmful emissions (hydrocarbons, carbon monoxide and nitrous oxides).
Petrol
Petrol must fulfil the EN 228 standard. Most
engines can be run with octane ratings of 95
and 98 RON. Only in exceptional cases should
91 RON be used.
• 95 RON can be used for normal driving.
• 98 RON is recommended for optimum performance and minimum fuel consumption.
When driving in temperatures above +38 °C,
fuel with the highest possible octane rating is
recommended for optimum performance and
fuel economy.
07 During your journey
Fuel
IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT
•
Always refuel with unleaded petrol so as
not to damage the catalytic converter.
Only ever use fuel that fulfils the European
diesel standard.
•
Do not use additives not recommended
by Volvo.
The sulphur content must be a maximum of
50 ppm.
IMPORTANT
Diesel
Only use diesel fuel from well-known producers. Never use diesel of dubious quality. Diesel
should fulfil the EN 590 or JIS K2204 standards. Diesel engines are sensitive to contaminants in the fuel, such as excessively high volumes of sulphur particles for example.
At low temperatures (-6 °C to -40 °C), a paraffin
precipitate may form in the diesel fuel, which
may lead to ignition problems. Special diesel
fuel designed for low temperatures around
freezing point is available from the major oil
companies. This fuel is less viscous at low temperatures and reduces the risk of paraffin precipitate.
The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is
reduced if the tank is kept well filled. When
refuelling, check that the area around the fuel
filler pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto the
paintwork. Wash off any spillage with detergent and water.
1
to carry out a check. Do this before starting the
engine, once the fuel tank has been filled with
diesel:
1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition
switch and push it in to the end position
(see page 78).
2. Press the START button without depressing the brake and/or clutch pedal.
Diesel type fuels that must not be used:
3. Wait approx. 1 minute.
•
•
•
•
4. To start the engine: Depress the brake and/
or clutch pedal and then press the
START button again.
Special additives
Marine diesel fuel
Heating oil
FAME1 (Fatty Acid Methyl Ester) and
vegetable oil.
These fuels do not fulfil the requirements in
accordance with Volvo recommendations
and generate increased wear and engine
damage that is not covered by the Volvo
warranty.
NOTE
Before filling with fuel in the event of fuel
shortage:
•
Stop the car on as flat/level ground as
possible - if the car is tilting there is a
risk of air pockets in the fuel supply.
Empty tank
Draining condensation from the fuel filter
The design of the fuel system in a diesel engine
means that if the vehicle runs out of fuel, the
tank may need to be vented in the workshop in
order to restart the engine after fuelling.
The fuel filter separates condensation from the
fuel. Condensation can disrupt engine operation.
Once the engine has stopped due to fuel starvation, the fuel system needs a few moments
07
The fuel filter must be drained at the intervals
specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet
Diesel fuel may contain a certain amount of FAME, but further amounts must not be added.
297
07 During your journey
Fuel
or if you suspect that the car has been filled
with contaminated fuel.
IMPORTANT
Certain special additives remove the water
separation in the fuel filter.
Soot filter full See manual is shown on the
instrument panel display.
Fuel consumption and emissions of
carbon dioxide
Start regeneration of the filter by driving the car
until the engine reaches normal operating temperature, preferably on a main road or motorway. The car should then be driven for approximately 20 minutes more.
Fuel consumption figures may change if the car
is equipped with extra equipment that affects
the car's weight. See information on weights
page 374 and table page 382.
Diesel particle filter (DPF)
Diesel cars are equipped with a particle filter,
which results in more efficient emission control. The particles in the exhaust gases are collected in the filter during normal driving. Socalled "regeneration" is started in order to burn
away the particles and empty the filter. This
requires the engine to have reached normal
operating temperature.
Regeneration of the filter is automatic and normally takes 10-20 minutes. It may take a little
longer at a low average speed. Fuel consumption may increase slightly during regeneration.
Regeneration in cold weather
07
If the car is frequently driven short distances in
cold weather then the engine does not reach
normal operating temperature. This means that
regeneration of the diesel particle filter does
not take place and the filter is not emptied.
NOTE
A smaller reduction of engine power may be
noticed temporarily during regeneration.
When regeneration is complete the warning
text is cleared automatically.
Use the parking heater* in cold weather so that
the engine reaches normal operating temperature more quickly.
IMPORTANT
If the filter fills up with particles then it can
be difficult to start the engine and the filter
will be incapable of functioning. Then there
is a risk that the filter will have to be
replaced.
When the filter has become approximately
80% full of particles, a warning triangle on the
instrument panel illuminates, and the message
298
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The manner in which the car is driven, and
other non-technical factors can also affect fuel
consumption.
Consumption is higher and power output lower
for fuel with an octane rating of 91 RON.
NOTE
Extreme weather conditions, driving with a
trailer or driving at high altitudes in combination with fuel grade are factors that could
affect the car's performance.
07 During your journey
Loading
General information on loading
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The
total of the weight of the passengers and all
accessories reduces the car's payload by a
corresponding weight. For more detailed information on weights, see page 374.
The tailgate is opened via a button on
the lighting panel or the remote control key, see page 57.
WARNING
The car's driving characteristics change
depending on the weight and distribution of
the load.
To bear in mind when loading
• Position the load firmly against the rear
seat's backrest.
Note that objects must not prevent the function
of the WHIPS system for the front seats if any
of the rear seat's backrests is folded down,see
page 27.
• Centre the load.
• Heavy objects should be placed as low as
possible. Avoid placing heavy loads on
lowered backrests.
• Cover sharp edges with something soft to
avoid damaging the upholstery.
• Secure all loads to the load retaining eyelets with straps or web lashings.
Front seat
The passenger seat backrest can also be
folded for an extra long load, see page 80.
WARNING
A loose object weighing 20 kg can, in a
frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, carry
the impact of an item weighing 1000 kg.
WARNING
Roof load
Using load carriers
To avoid damaging the car and for maximum
possible safety while driving, the load carriers
designed by Volvo are recommended.
The protection provided by the inflatable
curtain in the headlining may be compromised or eliminated by high loads.
Carefully follow the installation instructions
supplied with the carriers.
•
• Check periodically that the load carriers
Never load cargo above the backrest.
and load are properly secured. Lash the
load securely with retaining straps.
WARNING
Always secure the load. During heavy braking the load may otherwise shift, causing
injury to the car's occupants.
Cover sharp edges and sharp corners with
something soft.
Switch off the engine and apply the parking
brake when loading/unloading long items.
Otherwise you may accidentally knock the
gear lever or gear selector with the load into
a drive position - and the car could then
move off.
• Distribute the load evenly over the load
carriers. Put the heaviest objects at the
bottom.
• The size of the area exposed to the wind,
and therefore fuel consumption, increase
with the size of the load.
• Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration,
heavy braking and hard cornering.
07
WARNING
The car's centre of gravity and driving characteristics are altered by roof loads. For
information on maximum permitted roof
load, including load carriers and any space
box, see page 374.
299
07 During your journey
Loading
Lowering the rear seat backrest
Bag holder*
12 V electrical socket*
To simplify loading in the cargo area, the rear
seat backrest can be folded down, see
page 82.
G017745
Load retaining eyelets
Bag holder under folding hatch in the floor.
1. Fold up the holder, which is part of the floor
hatch.
2. Fasten the bags with strap and secure the
carrying handle in the hooks.
The folding load retaining eyelets are used to
fasten straps in order to anchor items in the
cargo area.
Lower the cover to access the electrical
socket.
• The socket also provides voltage when the
remote control key is not in the ignition
switch.
IMPORTANT
Max. power takeoff is 10 A (120 W).
07
WARNING
Hard, sharp and/or heavy objects that are
loose or protrude could cause injury during
heavy braking.
Always secure large and heavy objects with
a seatbelt or cargo retaining straps.
300
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
NOTE
Remember that using the electrical socket
with the engine switched off involves the
risk of discharging the car's battery.
07 During your journey
Loading
NOTE
The compressor for temporary emergency
puncture repair has been tested and
approved by Volvo. For information on the
use of Volvo's recommended temporary
emergency puncture repair (TMK), see
page 325.
07
301
07 During your journey
Cargo area
Safety net
WARNING
Loads in the cargo area must be firmly
secured, even if the safety net is correctly
fitted.
Take care to press forward the rod's retaining hooks for each respective roof mounting's front end position.
Attaching
G034213
NOTE
The safety net is fitted into four mounting points.
A safety net prevents loads or pets from being
thrown forward in the passenger compartment
in the event of sudden braking. For safety reasons, the safety net must always be correctly
fastened and secured.
07
The safety net is most easily fitted via one of
the rear doors.
WARNING
Make sure that the upper mountings of the
safety net are correctly fitted and that the
anchoring straps are securely fastened.
Do not use a damaged net.
The net is made of a strong nylon fabric and
can be secured two different locations in the
car:
1. Unfold the safety net and make sure that
the split upper rod is locked in extended
position.
• Rear fitting - Behind the rear seat backrest
• Front fitting - Behind the front seat back-
2. Hook one end of the rod into the front or
rear roof mounting with the anchoring strap
locks turned towards you.
rests.
3. Hook the other end of the rod into the roof
mounting on the opposite side - the telescopic spring-loaded retaining hooks facilitate alignment.
302
Rear fitting.
4. Rear fitting: With the net fitted in the rear
roof mountings, hook the safety net's
anchoring straps into the front floor eyes in
the cargo area.
07 During your journey
Cargo area
Break the rod in the centre, fold it together
and roll up the net.
IMPORTANT
If the seat/backrest is pressed hard backwards against the safety net then the net
and/or its roof mountings could be damaged.
The folded safety net can be stored under the
cargo compartment floor.
Safety grille*
5. Tension the safety net with the anchoring
straps.
Removal and storage
Front fitting.
Pay attention to make sure that you do not
press the seat/backrest hard against the
net when the seat/backrest is moved back
again - only adjust until the seat/backrest
makes contact with the net.
G031978
Front fitting: With the net fitted in the front
roof mountings, hook the safety net's
anchoring straps into the eyes on the rear
of the seat slide rails - it is easier if the
backrests are straightened and the seats
are moved forward slightly.
A safety grille prevents loads or pets from
being thrown forward in the passenger compartment in the event of sudden braking.
The safety net can be easily removed and folded
up.
Release the tension in the net by pressing
in the button on the anchoring strap's lock
and feeding out part of the strap.
Press in the catch and detach both of the
anchoring strap's hooks.
Folding up
Take hold of the bottom of the safety grille and
pull back/up.
07
IMPORTANT
The safety grille cannot be folded up or
down when a cargo cover is fitted.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
303
07 During your journey
Cargo area
Fitting/removal
The safety grille is normally permanently installed in the car because it can easily be folded
up in the roof and so be out of the way if a
longer cargo area is required. However, if
desired, the safety grille can be dismantled and
removed from the car.
For information about the tools required and
methods for fitting/removal, see the installation
instructions1 that were included with the initial
purchase.
Pull the cargo cover over the load and hook it
into the recesses at the cargo area's rear posts.
IMPORTANT
The safety grille cannot be folded up or
down when the cargo cover is fitted.
Attaching the cargo cover
Move one end piece of the cover into the
recess on the side panel.
Move the other end piece into the corresponding recess.
For safety reasons, the safety grille must
always be correctly fastened and secured
when being refitted.
Press both sides in. A "click" should be
audible and the red marking should disappear.
> Check that both end pieces are locked.
Cargo cover*
Removing the cargo cover
1. Press in one end piece button and lift it out.
2. Carefully angle the cover up/out and the
other end piece loosens automatically.
07
G031977
Lowering the cargo cover's rear sealing
disc
1
304
In its rolled-in position, the cargo cover's rear
sealing disc protrudes horizontally into the
cargo area when it is fitted.
Installation instructions no. 30715972.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
–
Pull the sealing disc back gently, free from
its support shelves, and lower.
07 During your journey
Driving with a trailer
General
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The
total of the weight of the passengers and all
accessories, e.g. towbar, reduces the car's
payload by a corresponding weight. For more
detailed information on weights, see
page 374.
If the towing bracket is mounted by Volvo, then
the car is delivered with the necessary equipment for driving with a trailer.
• The car's towing bracket must be of an
approved type.
• If the towbar is retrofitted, check with your
Volvo dealer that the car is fully equipped
for driving with a trailer.
• Distribute the load on the trailer so that the
weight on the towing bracket complies
with the specified maximum towball load.
• Increase the tyre pressure to the recommended pressure for a full load. For tyre
pressure label location, see page 323.
• The engine is loaded more heavily than
usual when driving with a trailer.
• Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is
brand new. Wait until it has been driven at
least 1000 km.
• The brakes are loaded much more than
usual on long and steep downhill slopes.
Downshift to a lower gear and adjust your
speed.
• For safety reasons, the maximum permitted speed for the car when coupled with a
trailer should not be exceeded. Follow the
regulations in force for the permitted
speeds and weights.
• Maintain a low speed when driving with a
stationary the rear of the car lowers slightly,
which is normal.
Trailer weights
For information on Volvo's permitted trailer
weights, see page 375.
trailer up long, steep ascents.
• Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of
more than 12%.
Trailer cable
An adapter is required if the car's towing
bracket has 13 pin electrics and the trailer has
7 pin electrics. Use an adapter cable approved
by Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag
on the ground.
Direction indicators and brake lights on
the trailer
If any of the trailer's lamps for direction indicators are broken, then the combined instrument
panel's symbol for direction indicators flashes
faster than normal and the display shows the
text Bulb fail - Ind. signal trailer.
If any of the trailer's lamps for the brake light
are broken then the Bulb fail - Stop lamp
trailer text is shown.
NOTE
The stated maximum permitted trailer
weights are those permitted by Volvo.
National vehicle regulations can further limit
trailer weights and speeds. Towbars can be
certified for higher towing weights than the
car can actually tow.
WARNING
Follow the stated recommendations for
trailer weights. Otherwise, the car and trailer
may be difficult to control in the event of
sudden movement and braking.
Manual gearbox
Overheating
07
When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hot
climate there may be a risk of overheating.
• Do not run the engine at higher revolutions
Level control*
The rear shock absorbers maintain a constant
height irrespective of the car's load (up to the
maximum permissible weight). When the car is
than 4500 rpm (diesel engines: 3500 rpm)
- otherwise the oil temperature may
become too high.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
305
07 During your journey
Driving with a trailer
Diesel engine 5-cyl
2. Activate the parking brake.
• In the event of a risk of overheating the
3. Move the gear selector to position P.
optimal speed for the engine is 2300-3000
rpm for optimal circulation of the coolant.
Automatic gearbox
Overheating
When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hot
climate there may be a risk of overheating.
• An automatic gearbox selects the optimum
gear related to load and engine speed.
• In the event of overheating a warning symbol illuminates on the instrument panel
combined with a text message - follow the
recommendation given.
Steep inclines
4. Release the foot brake.
• Move the gear selector to park position P
•
when parking an automatic car with a
hitched trailer. Always use the parking
brake.
Follow the installation instructions carefully.
•
The detachable section must be locked
with the key before setting off.
• Block the wheels with chocks when park-
•
Check that the indicator window shows
green.
ing a car with hitched trailer on a hill.
Starting on a hill
1. Depress the foot brake.
2. Move the gear selector to driving position D.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Release the foot brake and start driving off.
• Do not lock the automatic transmission in
a higher gear than the engine "can cope
with" - it is not always a good idea to drive
at a high gear with low engine revolutions.
IMPORTANT
07
See also the specific information on slow
driving with trailer for cars with the
Powershift automatic transmission on page
124.
Parking on a hill
1. Depress the foot brake.
306
WARNING
If the car is fitted with a Volvo detachable
towbar:
Towing bracket
If the car is equipped with a detachable towbar,
the installation instructions for the loose section must be followed carefully, see page 308.
Important checks
• The towbar's towball must be cleaned and
greased regularly.
NOTE
If a towball hitch with vibration damper is
used, it is not necessary to grease the towball.
07 During your journey
Driving with a trailer
Towbar storage space.
IMPORTANT
Always remove the towbar after use and
store it in the appointed location in the car,
firmly fastened with its strap.
G021485
Specifications
G031713
Storing the detachable towbar
Dimensions, mounting points (mm)
A
1013
B
69
C
855
D
428
E
109
F
296
G
Side member
H
Ball centre
07
307
07 During your journey
Driving with a trailer
The indicator window must show red.
G021490
G018928
G021488
Attaching the towbar
The indicator window must show green.
G021487
07
308
Ensure that the mechanism is in the
unlocked position by turning the key clockwise.
Insert the towbar until you hear a click.
G000000
G021489
Remove the protective cover by first pressing in the catch
and then pulling the
cover straight back
.
Turn the key anticlockwise to locked position. Remove the key from the lock.
07 During your journey
Check that the towbar is secure by pulling
it up, down and back.
WARNING
If the towbar is not fitted correctly then it
must be detached and reattached in
accordance with the previous instructions.
IMPORTANT
G021495
G021494
Driving with a trailer
Safety cable.
Push in the locking wheel
and turn it
until you hear a click.
anticlockwise
WARNING
Be sure to attach the trailer's safety cable to
the correct place.
Removing the towbar
Only grease in the ball for the towing hitch,
the remainder of the towbar should be clean
and dry.
Turn the locking wheel down fully, until it
comes to a stop. Hold it in this position
while pulling the towbar rearward and
upward.
07
WARNING
Insert the key and turn it clockwise to the
unlocked position.
Secure the towbar safely if it is stored in the
car, see page 307.
309
07 During your journey
Driving with a trailer
• Car with trailer subjected to a sudden and
powerful side wind.
• Car with trailer drives on an uneven road
surface or in a pothole.
G018929
• Sweeping steering wheel movements.
Push the protective cover until it snaps
tight.
Trailer Stability Assist - TSA*
The TSA system (Trailer Stability Assist) serves
to stabilise the car and trailer combination if it
begins to snake.
The TSA function is part of the DSTC system
(Dynamic Stability and Traction Control), see
page 146.
Function
07
The snaking phenomenon can occur with any
car/trailer combination. Normally, snaking
occurs at extremely high speeds. But, there is
a risk of it occurring at lower speeds
(70-90 km/h) if the trailer is overloaded or the
load is improperly distributed, e.g. too far back.
In order for snaking to occur, there must be a
triggering factor, e.g.:
310
Operation
If snaking has started, it could be difficult or
even impossible to suppress. This makes the
car/trailer combination difficult to control and
there is a risk that you could, for example, end
up in the wrong lane or leave the carriageway.
TSA system continually monitors car movements, particularly lateral movements. If snaking is detected, the front wheels are individually
braked. This serves to stabilise the car/trailer
combination. This is often enough to help the
driver regain control of the car.
If snaking is not eliminated the first time the
TSA system comes into action, the car/trailer
combination is braked with all wheels and
engine power is reduced. Once snaking has
been gradually suppressed and the car/trailer
combination is once again stable, the TSA system stops regulating and the driver once again
has full control of the car.
Miscellaneous
The TSA system can engage within the speed
interval 60 to 160 km/h.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
NOTE
TSA function is switched off if the driver
selects Sport mode, see page 146.
TSA may fail to engage if the driver uses severe
steering wheel movements to try to rectify the
snaking because in such a situation the TSA
system cannot determine whether it is the
trailer or the driver that is causing the snaking.
The DSTC symbol in the combined
instrument panel flashes when the
TSA is working.
07 During your journey
Towing and recovery
Towing
WARNING
Find out the statutory maximum speed limit for
towing before towing begins.
1. Unlock the steering lock by inserting the
remote control key in the ignition switch
and giving a long press on the START/
STOP ENGINE button - key position II is
activated, see page 78 for more information on key positions.
The brake servo and power steering do not
work when the engine is switched off - the
brake pedal needs to be depressed
about 5 times more heavily and the steering
is considerably heavier than normal.
Manual gearbox
Prior to towing:
2. The remote control key must remain in the
ignition switch while the car is being towed.
–
3. Keep the towline taut when the towing
vehicle reduces speed by holding your foot
gently pressed on the brake pedal thereby avoiding unnecessary jerking.
Automatic gearbox Geartronic
•
The remote control key must be in key
position II - in position I all airbags are
deactivated.
•
Never remove the remote control key
from the ignition switch when the car is
being towed.
IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT
•
However, the car can be towed for a
short distance at low speed to move it
from a dangerous position - not further
than 10 km and not faster than
10 km/h. Note that the car must always
be towed with the wheels rolling forward.
•
In the event of moving a longer distance
than 10 km, the car must be transported
with the drive wheels raised from the
road - professional recovery is recommended.
Note that the car must always be towed with
the wheels rolling forward.
•
WARNING
Check that the steering lock is unlocked
before towing.
In the event of uncertainty as to whether or not
the car is equipped with Powershift transmission, this can be verified by checking the designation on the transmission's label under the
bonnet - see page 372. The designation ”MPS6” means that it is Powershift – transmission otherwise it is Geartronic automatic
transmission.
Avoid towing.
4. Be prepared to brake to stop.
•
Move gear lever into neutral and release
the parking brake.
lubrication. If towing still has to take place, the
route must be as short as possible and then
with very low speed.
Cars with automatic gearbox must not
be towed at speeds above 80 km/h or
further than 80 km.
Prior to towing:
–
Move the gear selector to position N and
release the parking brake.
07
Automatic gearbox Powershift
The model with Powershift transmission
should not be towed as it is dependent on the
engine running in order to receive sufficient
Prior to towing:
–
Move the gear selector to position N and
release the parking brake.
311
07 During your journey
Towing and recovery
Screw the towing eye right in up to its
flange. Turn in the towing eye firmly e.g.
using the wheel wrench.
Jump starting
Do not tow the car to bump start the engine.
Use a donor battery if the battery is discharged
and the engine does not start, see page 119.
After use, unscrew the towing eye and
return it to its place.
IMPORTANT
Finish by refitting the cover onto the
bumper.
The catalytic converter may be damaged
during attempts to tow-start the engine.
IMPORTANT
Towing eye
The towing eye is screwed into a threaded
socket behind a cover on the right-hand side
of the bumper, front or rear.
Attaching the towing eye
Take out the towing eye that is located
under the floor hatch in the cargo area - in
some cases it may be hidden under the sill.
The cover for the towing eye's attachment
point is available in two variants which
must be opened in different ways:
• Open the variant with a recess using a
coin or similar inserted in the recess,
turning it outwards. Then turn out the
cover completely and remove it.
07
312
• The second variant has a marking along
one side or in a corner: Press the marking with a finger and fold out the opposite side/corner at the same time using
a coin or similar - the cover turns around
its axis and can then be removed.
The towing eye is only designed for towing
on roads - not for pulling the car unstuck or
out of a ditch. Call a recovery service for
recovery assistance.
NOTE
On certain cars with towbar fitted the towing
eye cannot be attached in the rear bracket.
Attach the towrope in the towbar.
For this reason it is advisable to store the
detachable towbar's towball in the car.
07 During your journey
Towing and recovery
Recovery
Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.
IMPORTANT
Note that the car must always be transported with the wheels rolling forward.
•
An All Wheel Drive car (AWD) with raised
front suspension must not be towed at
speeds above 70 km/h. It should not be
towed further than 50 km.
07
313
General .................................................................................................
Changing wheels ..................................................................................
Tyre pressure .......................................................................................
Warning triangle and first-aid kit*..........................................................
Emergency puncture repair (TMK)* ......................................................
314
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
316
320
323
324
325
WHEELS AND TYRES
08 Wheels and tyres
General
Driving characteristics
Tyres greatly affect the car's driving characteristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre pressure and speed rating are important for how the
car performs.
Tyres with the greatest tread depth should
always be fitted to the rear of the car (to
decrease the risk of skidding).
New tyres
NOTE
Ensure that tyres of the same type and
dimensions, and also the same make, are
fitted to all four wheels.
Direction of rotation
Follow the recommended tyre pressures
specified in the tyre pressure table, see
page 385.
Tyre care
G021778
Tyre age
The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation.
08
316
Tyres with a tread pattern which are designed
to only turn in one direction have the direction
of rotation marked with an arrow. The tyre must
always rotate in the same direction throughout
its lifespan. Tyres should only be switched
between front and rear positions, never
between left and right-hand sides, or vice
versa. If the tyres are fitted incorrectly, the car's
braking characteristics and capacity to force
rain and slush out of the way are adversely
affected.
All tyres older than 6 years old should be
checked by an expert even if they seem
undamaged. Tyres age and decompose, even
if they are hardly ever or never used. The function can therefore be affected. This applies to
all tyres that are stored for future use. Examples of external signs which indicate that the
tyre is unsuitable for use are cracks or discoloration.
Tyres are perishable. After a few years they
begin to harden at the same time as the friction
capacity/characteristics gradually deteriorate.
For this reason, aim to get as fresh tyres as
possible when you replace them. This is especially important with regard to winter tyres. The
last four digits in the sequence mean the week
and year of manufacture. This is the tyre's
DOT marking (Department of Transportation),
and this is stated with four digits, for example
1510. The tyre in the illustration was manufactured in week 15 of 2010.
Summer and winter tyres
When summer and winter wheels are changed
the wheels should be marked with which side
of the car they were mounted on, for example
L for left and R for right.
08 Wheels and tyres
General
The correct tyre pressure results in more even
wear, see page 323. Driving style, tyre pressure, climate and road condition affect how
quickly your tyres age and wear. To avoid differences in tread depth and to prevent wear
patterns arising, the front and rear wheels can
be switched with each other. A suitable distance for the first change is approx. 5000 km
and then at 10 000 km intervals. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo
workshop for checking if you are uncertain
about tread depth. If significant differences in
wear (>1 mm difference in tread depth)
between tyres have already occurred, the least
worn tyres must always be placed on the rear.
Understeer is normally easier to correct than
oversteer, and leads to the car continuing forwards in a straight line rather than having the
rear end skidding to one side, resulting in possible complete loss of control over the car. This
is why it is important for the rear wheels never
to lose grip before the front wheels.
Wheels should be stored lying down or hanging
up - and not standing up.
WARNING
A damaged tyre can lead to loss of control
of the car.
Only use rims that are tested and approved by
Volvo and which are Volvo genuine accessories. Check the torque with a torque wrench.
Tyres with tread wear indicators
Locking wheel bolts*
Locking wheel bolts* can be used on both aluminium and steel rims. Under the cargo area
floor there is space for the sleeve for the lockable wheel bolts.
Tools
G021829
Wear and maintenance
Tread wear indicators.
Tread wear indicators are narrow treadless
bands across the width of the tread. On the
side of the tyre are the letters TWI (Tread Wear
Indicator). When the tyre's tread depth is down
to 1.6 mm, the tread depth will be level in height
with the tread wear indicators. Change to new
tyres as soon as possible. Remember that
tyres with little tread depth provide very poor
grip in rain and snow.
Rims and wheel bolts
IMPORTANT
Located under the cargo area floor are the
car's towing eye, jack* and wheel wrench*.
There is also space for the sleeve for the lockable wheel bolts.
The wheel bolts must be tightened to
140 Nm. Overtightening can damage the
nuts and the bolts.
08
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
317
08 Wheels and tyres
General
Jack*
IMPORTANT
The original jack should only be used for
changing to the spare wheel. The jack's thread
must always be well greased.
The tools and jack* must be stored in the
intended location in the car's cargo area
when not in use.
Tools - returning into place
Winter tyres
Volvo recommends winter tyres with particular
dimensions. Tyre dimensions are dependent
on engine variant. When driving on winter tyres,
the correct type of tyres must be fitted to all
four wheels.
G029336
NOTE
The tools and jack* must be returned to their
correct places after use. The jack needs to be
cranked together to the correct position in
order to have space.
The foam block and spare wheel are replaced
in the reverse order to taking out.
Volvo recommends that you consult a Volvo
dealer about which wheel rim and tyre types
are most suitable.
Studded tyres
Studded winter tyres should be run in gently for
500-1000 km so the studs settle properly into
the tyres. This gives the tyre, and especially the
studs, a longer service life.
Note that there is an arrow on the upper foam
block. It must point forwards in the car.
08
318
NOTE
The legal provisions for the use of studded
tyres vary from country to country.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Tread depth
Road conditions with ice, slush and low temperatures place considerably higher demands
on tyres than summer conditions. Volvo therefore recommends not to drive on winter tyres
that have a tread depth of less than 4 millimetres.
Using snow chains
Snow chains may only be used on the front
wheels (also applies to all-wheel drive cars).
Never drive faster than 50 km/h with snow
chains. Avoid driving on bare ground as this
wears out both the snow chains and tyres.
WARNING
Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equivalent chains designed for the car model, and
tyre and rim dimensions. In the event of
uncertainty Volvo recommends that you
consult an authorised Volvo workshop. The
wrong snow chains may cause serious
damage to your car and lead to an accident.
IMPORTANT
Only single-sided snow chains are permitted. Use Volvo genuine snow chains or similar that are properly suited to the car model,
tyre size and wheel rim size. In the event of
uncertainty Volvo recommends that you
consult an authorised Volvo workshop.
08 Wheels and tyres
General
Specifications
The car has whole vehicle approval. This
means that certain combinations of wheels and
tyres are approved. For the permissible combinations, see page 385
Wheel (rim) dimensions
Wheels (rims) have a designation of dimensions, for example: 7Jx16x50.
R
Radial ply
18
Rim diameter in inches
103
Codes for the maximum permitted
tyre load, tyre load index (LI)
V
Speed rating for maximum permitted
speed, speed rating (SS). (In this case
240 km/h).
7
Rim width in inches
Load index
J
Rim flange profile
16
Rim diameter in
inches
Each tyre has a certain capacity to carry a load,
a load index (LI). The car's weight determines
the load capacity required of the tyres. Minimum permitted index is specified in the table,
see page 385.
50
Off-set in mm (distance from wheel
centre to wheel contact surface against
the hub)
Tyre dimensions
The dimensions are stated on all car tyres.
Example of designation:
235/60 R18 103 V.
235
Tyre width (mm)
60
Ratio between tyre wall height and
tyre width (%)
Speed ratings
Each tyre can withstand a certain maximum
speed, a speed rating (Speed Symbol; SS).
Tyre speed class must at least correspond with
the car's top speed. Minimum permitted speed
rating is specified in the table, see page 385.
The only exception to these conditions is winter tyres (both those with metal studs and those
without), where a lower speed rating may be
used. If such a tyre is chosen, the car must not
be driven faster than the speed rating of the
tyre (for example, class Q can be driven at a
maximum of 160 km/h).
Traffic regulations determine how fast a car
can be driven, not the speed rating of the tyres.
NOTE
It is the maximum permitted speed that is
stated in the table.
Q
160 km/h (used only on winter tyres)
T
190 km/h
H
210 km/h
V
240 km/h
W
270 km/h
Y
300 km/h
WARNING
The car must be fitted with tyres which have
the same or a higher load index (LI) and
speed rating (SS) than specified. If a tyre
with too low a load index or speed rating is
used, it may overheat.
08
319
08 Wheels and tyres
Changing wheels
Spare wheel*
The spare wheel (Temporary spare) is only
intended for use temporarily and must be
replaced by an ordinary wheel as soon as possible. The car's handling may be altered by the
use of the spare wheel. The spare wheel is
smaller than the normal wheel. The car's
ground clearance is affected accordingly. Pay
attention to high kerbs and do not machine
wash the car. If the spare wheel is fitted on the
front axle, you cannot use snow chains at the
same time. On all-wheel drive cars the drive on
the rear axle can be disconnected. The spare
wheel must not be repaired. The correct tyre
pressure for the spare wheel is stated in the
tyre pressure table, see page 385.
IMPORTANT
Never drive faster than 80 km/h with a spare
wheel on the car.
foam block. The foam block contains all the
tools.
Taking out the spare wheel
1. Fold up the cargo area floor, from the rear
and forwards.
2. Undo the retaining screw.
The car must never be driven fitted with
more than one temporary spare wheel.
08
320
The label also indicates the jack's maximum
lift capacity at a specified minimum lifting
height.
3. Lift out the foam block with its tools.
4. Lift out the spare wheel.
Removing
Set up the warning triangle, see page 324 if a
wheel must be replaced at a busy location. The
car and jack* must be on a firm horizontal surface.
1. Apply the parking brake and engage
reverse gear, or position P if the car has an
automatic gearbox.
WARNING
IMPORTANT
NOTE
Volvo recommends only using the jack* that
belongs to the car model in question, which
is indicated on the jack's label.
Check that the jack is not damaged, that the
threads are thoroughly lubricated and that it
is free from dirt.
The spare wheel is located in the spare wheel
well with the outside down. The same bolt runs
through to secure the spare wheel and the
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
2. Take out the jack*, wheel wrench* and
removal tool for wheel covers* located
under the cargo floor in the cargo area. If
another jack is selected, see page 332.
3. Place chocks in front of and behind the
wheels which will remain on the ground.
Use heavy wooden blocks or large stones
for example.
4. Screw together the towing eye with the
wheel wrench* until the stop position as
illustrated below.
08 Wheels and tyres
Changing wheels
jack down so it is pressed squarely on the
ground.
IMPORTANT
The towing eye must be screwed into all
threads in the wheel bolt wrench.
IMPORTANT
The ground must be firm, smooth and level.
5. Loosen the wheel bolts ½-1 turn anticlockwise with the wheel wrench.
WARNING
Never position anything between the
ground and the jack, nor between the jack
and the car's jacking point.
6. There are two jacking points on each side
of the car. There is a recess in the plastic
cover at each point. Crank the foot of the
7.
Check that the jack sits in the anchorage as
illustrated and that the foot is positioned
vertically under the anchorage.
IMPORTANT
The jack mounting point is the rearmost of
the two rear recesses.
8. Lift the car so that the wheel is free.
Remove the wheel bolts and lift off the
wheel.
Installation
1. Clean the contact surfaces between wheel
and hub.
08
321
08 Wheels and tyres
Changing wheels
2. Put on the wheel. Tighten the wheel bolts
thoroughly.
3. Lower the car so that the wheels cannot
rotate.
WARNING
Never crawl under the car when it is raised
on the jack.
Passengers must leave the car when it is
raised on the jack.
Park the car so that passengers have the car
- or preferably a crash barrier - between
them and the road.
NOTE
4. Tighten the wheel bolts crosswise. It is
important that the wheel bolts are tightened properly. Tighten to 140 Nm. Check
the torque with a torque wrench.
5. Refit any full wheel covers.
NOTE
The wheel cover outlet for the valve must be
positioned over the valve on the wheel rim
during fitting.
08
322
The car's regular jack is designed only for
use occasionally and for a short time, such
as when changing a wheel with a punctured
tyre, switching between summer tyres and
winter tyres, etc. Only the jack belonging to
the specific model is to be used to jack up
the car. If the car is to be jacked up more
often, or for a longer time than is required
just to change a wheel, use of a garage jack
is recommended. In this instance, follow the
instructions for use that come with the
equipment.
08 Wheels and tyres
Tyre pressure
Tyre pressure
Fuel economy, ECO pressure
At speeds under 160 km/h, the general tyre
pressure is recommended (applies for both full
load and light load) in order to obtain optimum
fuel economy.
Checking the tyre pressure
The tyre pressures must be checked every
month.
G021830
This also applies to the car's spare wheel.
The tyre pressure decal on the driver's side
door pillar (between frame and rear door)
shows which pressures the tyres should have
at different loads and speed conditions. This is
also specified in the tyre pressure table, see
page 385.
• Tyre pressure for the car's recommended
tyre dimension
• ECO pressure1
• Spare wheel tyre pressure (Temporary
Spare)
NOTE
Temperature differences change the
tyre pressure.
1
Check tyre pressures on cold tyres. "Cold
tyres" means the tyres are the same temperature as the ambient temperature. After several
kilometres of driving, the tyres warm up and the
pressure increases.
Inadequate tyre pressure increases fuel consumption, shortens tyre lifespan and impairs
the car's roadholding. Driving on tyres with tyre
pressure that is too low could result in the tyres
overheating and being damaged. Tyre pressure affects travelling comfort, road noise and
steering characteristics.
NOTE
Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a
natural phenomenon. Tyre pressure also
varies depending on ambient temperature.
08
ECO pressure results in improved fuel economy.
323
08 Wheels and tyres
Warning triangle and first-aid kit*
Warning triangle
Lift the floor hatch and take out the warning
triangle.
Take the warning triangle from the case,
fold out and assemble the two loose sides.
Fold out the warning triangle's support
legs.
Follow the regulations for the use of a warning
triangle. Position the warning triangle in a suitable place with regard to traffic.
Ensure the warning triangle and its case are
properly secured in the cargo area after use.
First aid kit*
08
324
A case with first aid equipment is located under
the floor in the cargo area.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
08 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair (TMK)*
General
the wall. Do not seal tyres with the emergency
puncture repair kit if they have larger slits,
cracks or similar damage.
Connect the compressor to one of the car's 12
V sockets, see pages 227 and 300. Choose the
electrical socket that is nearest the punctured
tyre.
IMPORTANT
Emergency puncture repair (TMK; Temporary
Mobility Kit) is used to seal a puncture and
check and adjust tyre pressure. It consists of a
compressor and a bottle with sealing fluid. The
kit works as a temporary repair. The sealing
fluid bottle must be replaced before its expiration date and after use.
The sealing fluid effectively seals tyres punctured in the tread.
NOTE
The emergency puncture repair kit is only
intended for sealing tyres with a puncture in
the tread.
If the compressor for emergency puncture
repair is connected to one of the two sockets in the tunnel console, see page 227, no
other current consumer must be connected
to the other one.
WARNING
You should not drive faster than 80 km/h
after the emergency tyre repair kit has been
used. Volvo recommends that you visit an
authorised Volvo workshop for inspection of
the sealed tyre (maximum driving distance
is 200 km). The staff there can determine
whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if
it needs to be replaced.
Overview
NOTE
The compressor for temporary emergency
puncture repair has been tested and
approved by Volvo.
Location of the emergency puncture
repair kit
Set up the warning triangle if a tyre is being
sealed in a trafficked location. The emergency
puncture repair kit is located under the floor in
the cargo area, see page 324.
Label, maximum permitted speed
Switch
Cable
08
Bottle holder (orange cap)
The emergency puncture repair kit has limited
capacity to seal tyres which have punctures in
Protective cap
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
325
08 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair (TMK)*
Pressure reducing valve
Sealing punctured tyres
WARNING
Air hose
The sealing fluid can irritate the skin. In the
case of contact with skin, wash away the
fluid with soap and water.
Sealing fluid bottle
Pressure gauge
3. Check that the switch is in position 0 and
locate the cable and the air hose.
NOTE
Do not break the bottle's seal before use.
The seal is broken automatically when the
bottle is screwed in.
4. Unscrew the orange cap and unscrew the
bottle's stopper.
G014338
5. Screw the bottle into its holder.
WARNING
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped
with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
For information on the function of the parts, see
preceding illustration.
08
326
1. Open the lid of the emergency puncture
repair kit.
6. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw
in the air hose valve connection to the bottom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.
2. Detach the label for maximum permitted
speed and affix it to the steering wheel.
7. Plug the cable into the 12 V socket and
start the car.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
08 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair (TMK)*
NOTE
If the compressor is connected to one of the
two 12 V sockets, in the tunnel console, no
other current consumer must be connected
to the other one.
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without
supervision when the engine is running.
8. Flick the switch to position I.
WARNING
Never stand next to the tyre when the compressor is running. If cracks or unevenness
arise then the compressor must be
switched off immediately. The journey
should not be continued. Contacting an
authorised tyre centre is recommended.
NOTE
When the compressor starts, the pressure
can increase up to 6 bar but the pressure
drops after approximately 30 seconds.
9. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes.
IMPORTANT
Risk of overheating. The compressor must
not run for more than 10 minutes.
10. Switch off the compressor to check the
pressure on the pressure gauge. Minimum
pressure is 1.8 bar and maximum 3.5 bar.
(Release air with the pressure reducing
valve if the tyre pressure is too high.)
WARNING
If the pressure is below 1.8 bar then the hole
in the tyre is too big. The journey should not
be continued. Contacting an authorised tyre
centre is recommended.
11. Switch off the compressor and unplug the
cable from the 12 V socket.
12. Detach the hose from the tyre valve and fit
the valve cap.
13. As soon as possible, drive approximately
3 km at a maximum speed of 80 km/h so
that the sealing fluid can seal the tyre.
Rechecking the repair and pressure
2. Read the tyre pressure on the pressure
gauge.
• If it is below 1.3 bar then the tyre is
insufficiently sealed. The journey should
not be continued. Contact a tyre centre.
• If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3
bar, the tyre must be inflated to the pressure specified in accordance with the
tyre pressure table, see page 385 (1
bar=100 kPa). Release air using the
pressure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high.
WARNING
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped
with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
3. Make sure the compressor is switched off.
Detach the air hose and cable. Refit the
dust cap.
NOTE
The sealing fluid bottle and the hose must
be replaced after use. Volvo recommends
that this replacement is performed by an
authorised Volvo workshop.
1. Reconnect the equipment.
08
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
327
08 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair (TMK)*
WARNING
Check the tyre pressure regularly.
Volvo recommends that you drive to the nearest authorised Volvo workshop for the replacement/repair of the damaged tyre. Advise the
workshop that the tyre contains sealing fluid.
WARNING
You should not drive faster than 80 km/h
after the emergency tyre repair kit has been
used. Volvo recommends that you visit an
authorised Volvo workshop for inspection of
the sealed tyre (maximum driving distance
is 200 km). The staff there can determine
whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if
it needs to be replaced.
Inflating the tyres
The car's original tyres can be inflated by the
compressor.
1. The compressor must be switched off.
Make sure that the switch is in position 0
and locate the cable and air hose.
08
2. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw
in the air hose valve connection to the bottom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.
WARNING
Inhaling car exhaust fumes can result in
danger to life. Never leave the engine running in sealed areas or areas that lack sufficient ventilation.
Replace the bottle when the expiration date
has passed. Treat the old bottle as environmentally hazardous waste.
WARNING
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without
supervision when the engine is running.
3. Connect the cable to one of the car's 12 V
sockets and start the car.
4. Start the compressor by flicking the switch
to position I.
IMPORTANT
Risk of overheating. The compressor must
not run for more than 10 minutes.
5. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified in
accordance with the tyre pressure table,
see page 385. (Release air using the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is
too high.)
6. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air
hose and cable.
7. Refit the dust cap.
328
Replacing the sealing fluid canister
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The bottle contains 1.2-Ethanol and natural
rubber-latex.
Harmful if ingested. Could result in allergic
reaction in the event of skin contact.
Avoid contact with the skin and eyes.
Store out of the reach of children.
08 Wheels and tyres
08
329
Engine compartment.............................................................................
Lamps...................................................................................................
Wiper blades and washer fluid..............................................................
Battery...................................................................................................
Fuses.....................................................................................................
Car care................................................................................................
330
332
339
345
348
353
364
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
09 Maintenance and service
Engine compartment
09
General
Volvo service programme
To keep the car as safe and reliable as possible, follow the Volvo service programme as
specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
Volvo recommends engaging an authorised
Volvo workshop to perform the service and
maintenance work. Volvo workshops have the
personnel, special tools and service literature
to guarantee the highest quality of service.
IMPORTANT
For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and
follow the instructions in the Service and
Warranty Booklet.
Check regularly
Check the following oils and fluids at regular
intervals, e.g. when refuelling:
•
•
•
•
332
Coolant
Engine oil
Power steering fluid
Washer fluid
WARNING
Remember that the radiator fan (located at
the front of the engine compartment, behind
the radiator) may start automatically some
after the engine has been switched off.
Always have the engine cleaned by a workshop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is
hot.
Raising the car
NOTE
Volvo recommends only using the jack that
belongs to the car model in question. If a
jack is selected other than the one recommended by Volvo, follow the instructions for
use supplied with the equipment.
If the car is raised with a workshop jack; position the jack against the front edge on the
engine's subframe.
Do not damage the splashguard under the
engine. Ensure that the workshop jack is positioned so that the car cannot slide off the jack.
Always use axle stands or similar.
If you raise the car using a two-pillar workshop
lift, ensure that the front and rear lift arms are
fixed under the lifting points. See preceding
illustration.
Opening and closing the bonnet
09 Maintenance and service
Engine compartment
Engine compartment, overview
09
Filling washer fluid
Air filter
WARNING
G031911
The ignition system has very high voltage
and output. The voltage in the ignition system is highly dangerous. The remote control
key must always be in 0 position when work
is being done in the engine compartment,
see page 78.
Pull the handle by the pedals. An information symbol lights when the bonnet is open,
see page 72.
Move the catch to the left and open the
bonnet. (The catch hook is located
between the headlamp and grille, see illustration.)
The appearance of the engine compartment may
vary depending on engine variant.
Coolant expansion tank
Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition coil
when the remote control key is in II position
or when the engine is hot.
Checking the engine oil
Power steering fluid reservoir
WARNING
Check that the bonnet locks properly when
closed.
Engine oil dipstick1
Radiator
Filling engine oil
Reservoir for brake and clutch fluid
(located on the driver's side)
Battery
Relay and fuse box
1
Engines with electronic oil level sensor have no dipstick (5-cyl. diesel).
333
09 Maintenance and service
Engine compartment
09
Volvo recommends Castrol oil products.
When driving under adverse conditions, see
page 378.
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for the
engine's service intervals all engines are
filled with a specially adapted synthetic
engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil
has been made very carefully with regard to
service life, starting characteristics, fuel
consumption and environmental impact.
An approved engine oil must be used in
order that the recommended service intervals can be applied. Only use a prescribed
grade of oil for both filling and oil change,
otherwise you will risk affecting service life,
starting characteristics, fuel consumption
and environmental impact.
driver is informed via the warning symbol in the
centre of the instrument unit as well as by display texts. Certain models have both variants.
Contact a Volvo dealer for more information.
Change the engine oil and oil filter in accordance with the intervals specified in the Service
and Warranty Booklet.
Using oil of a higher than specified grade is
permitted. If the car is driven in adverse conditions, Volvo recommends using an oil of a
higher grade, see page 378.
Checking the oil level in a new car is especially
important before the first scheduled oil change.
Volvo recommends checking the oil level every
2 500 km. The most accurate measurements
are made on a cold engine before starting. The
measurement will be inaccurate if taken immediately after the engine is switched off. The
dipstick will indicate that the level is too low
because the oil has not had time to flow down
into the oil sump.
For capacities,see page 379 and onwards.
Engine with oil dipstick2
G021737
Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all warranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed
grade and viscosity is not used.
Volvo recommends that oil changes are carried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.
2
334
Only applies to petrol and 4-cyl. diesel.
G021734
Volvo uses different systems for warning of
low/high oil level or low/high oil pressure. Certain variants have an oil pressure sensor, and
then the lamp for oil pressure is used. Other
variants have an oil level sensor, and then the
The oil level must be between the MIN and MAX
marks.
Dipstick and filler pipe.
Measurement and filling if required
1. Ensure that the car is level. After switching
off the engine it is important to wait
09 Maintenance and service
Engine compartment
5 minutes to allow the oil time to run back
to the sump.
09
Engine with electronic oil level sensor3
2. Pull up and wipe the dipstick.
3. Re-insert the dipstick.
4. Pull it out and check the level.
5. If the level is close to MIN then 0.5 litres
should be added. If the level is significantly
below, then an additional amount is
required.
6. If required, check the level again, do it after
driving a short distance. Then repeat steps
1 - 4.
WARNING
Never fill above the MAX mark. The level
should never be above MAX or below MIN
as this could lead to engine damage.
Message and graph in the display.
Filler pipe.4
Message
You do not need to take action with respect to
the engine oil level before a message is shown
in the display, see the illustration below.
Engine oil level
WARNING
Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold
due to the risk of fire.
3
4
The oil level is checked using the electronic oil
level gauge with the thumbwheel when the
engine is switched off,see page 198.
WARNING
If the message Oil service required is
shown, visit a workshop. The oil level may
be too high.
Only applies to 5-cyl. diesel.
Engines with electronic oil level sensor have no dipstick (5-cyl. diesel).
335
09 Maintenance and service
09
Engine compartment
IMPORTANT
In the event of the message Oil level low
Refill 0.5 Ltr, only fill with 0.5 litres.
NOTE
The oil level is only detected by the system
during driving. The system cannot directly
detect changes when the oil is filled or
drained. The car must be driven
about 30 km before the oil level display is
correct.
Measuring the oil level
Coolant
If the oil level needs to be checked then it
should be carried out in accordance with the
sequence below.
Checking the level and topping up
1. Activate key position II, see page 78.
2. Rotate the thumbwheel on the left-hand
stalk switch to position Engine oil level
Wait....
> You will then see information displayed
about the engine oil level.
WARNING
Do not fill more oil if filling level (3) or (4)
appears as shown in the illustration below.
The level must never be above MAX or
below MIN, as this could lead to engine
damage.
When topping up the coolant, follow the
instructions on the packaging. It is important
that the mixture of coolant concentrate and
water is correct for the prevailing weather conditions. Never top up with water only. The risk
of freezing increases with both too little and too
much coolant concentrate.
WARNING
Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold
due to the risk of fire.
336
The figures 1-4 represent filling level. Do not fill
more oil if filling level (3) or (4) is shown. Recommended filling level is 4.
WARNING
Coolant can be very hot. If the coolant
requires topping up when the engine is at
operating temperature, unscrew the expansion tank cap slowly to gently release the
overpressure.
09 Maintenance and service
Engine compartment
For capacities and for standards regarding
water quality, see page 380.
IMPORTANT
•
Check the coolant regularly
The level must lie between the MIN and MAX
marks on the expansion tank. If the system is
not filled sufficiently, high temperatures could
occur, causing a risk of damage to the engine.
A high content of chlorine, chlorides
and other salts may cause corrosion in
the cooling system.
Brake and clutch fluid
Checking the level
•
Always use coolant with anti-corrosion
agent as recommended by Volvo.
Brake and clutch fluid have a common reservoir. The level must be between the MIN and
MAX marks that are visible inside the reservoir.
Check the level regularly.
•
Ensure that the coolant mixture is 50%
water and 50% coolant.
Change the brake fluid every other year or at
every other regular service.
•
Mix the coolant with approved quality
tap water. In the event of any doubt
about water quality, used ready-mixed
coolant in accordance with Volvo recommendations.
•
When changing coolant/replacing cooling system components, flush the cooling system clean with approved quality
tap water or flush with ready-mixed
coolant.
For capacities and recommended fluid grade,
see page 380. The fluid should be changed
annually on cars driven in conditions requiring
hard, frequent braking, such as driving in
mountains or tropical climates with high
humidity.
•
The engine must only be run with a wellfilled cooling system. Otherwise, temperatures that are too high may occur
resulting in the risk of damage (cracks)
in the cylinder head.
09
WARNING
If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the
brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further
before topping up the brake fluid. Volvo recommends that the reason for the loss of
brake fluid is investigated by an authorised
Volvo workshop.
337
09 Maintenance and service
09
Engine compartment
Filling
Power steering fluid
Air conditioning system
Troubleshooting and repair
The air conditioning system contains fluorescent tracing agents. Use ultraviolet light when
looking for leaks.
Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
The air conditioning system contains pressurised refrigerant R134a. This system must
only be serviced and repaired by an authorised workshop.
The fluid reservoir is located on the driver's side.
The fluid reservoir is protected under the cover
over the cold zone in the engine compartment.
The round cover must be removed first before
the reservoir cap can be reached.
1. Turn and open the cover located on the
covering.
2. Unscrew the reservoir cap and fill the fluid.
The level must be between the MIN and
MAX marks, which are located on the
inside of the reservoir.
IMPORTANT
Do not forget to refit the cap.
338
IMPORTANT
Keep the area around the power steering
fluid reservoir clean when checking. The
cover must not be opened.
Check the level frequently. The fluid does not
require changing. The fluid level must be
between the MIN and MAX marks. For capacities and recommended fluid grade, see
page 380.
NOTE
If a fault should arise in the power steering
system or if the engine is switched off and
the car must be towed, it can still be steered.
09 Maintenance and service
Lamps
General
All bulbs are specified, see page 344. The following list contains locations of bulbs and
other light sources that are specialised or
unsuitable for changing except at a workshop:
• Active Xenon headlamps - ABL (Xenon
lamps)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Direction indicators, door mirrors
Approach lighting, door mirrors
Courtesy lighting
WARNING
The car’s electrical system must be in key
position 0 when replacing bulbs, see
page 78
IMPORTANT
Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with
your fingers. Grease and oils from your fingers are vaporised by the heat, coating the
reflector and then causing damage.
Glovebox lighting
General interior lighting in the roof
Reading lamps
Headlamps front
All of the headlamp bulbs are replaced via the
engine compartment. Loosen and remove the
whole headlamp.
Removing the headlamp
Side position, position lamps rear
1. Set the car's electrical system in key position 0, see page 78:
Brake light, Rear fog lamp, Reversing lamp
2. (First illustration)
LED lights, general
WARNING
On cars with Xenon headlamps, the
replacement of Xenon lamps must be carried out at a workshop - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended. Working with
Xenon lamps demands extreme caution
because the headlamp is equipped with a
high voltage unit.
09
Pull out the headlamp's locking pins.
Pull the headlamp straight forward.
IMPORTANT
Do not pull the electrical cable, only the connector.
3. (Second illustration)
Detach the headlamp connector by
pressing down the clip with your thumb.
339
09 Maintenance and service
09
Lamps
At the same time, guide out the connector with your other hand.
4. Lift out the headlamp and place it on a soft
surface to avoid scratching the lens.
switched on or the remote control key is
inserted into the ignition switch.
Dipped beam, halogen
Removing the cover
5. Replace the bulb in question.
Securing the headlamp
1. Detach the headlamp, see page 339.
2. Remove the cover.
Before starting to replace a bulb, see
page 339.
1. Release the catches by pressing out.
When securing, check that the long lock pin is
engaged - it should be engaged in both eyes.
1. Plug in the connector, a clicking sound
should be heard.
2. Reinstall the headlamp and locking pins.
Check that they are correctly inserted.
3. Check the lighting.
The headlamp must be mounted and the connector correctly installed before the lighting is
340
2. Remove the cover by pulling it straight out.
Reinstall the cover in reverse order.
3. Unplug the connector from the bulb.
4. Detach the bulb by pressing the holder
downwards.
5. Fit the new bulb in the socket and snap it
in. It can be secured in one position.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
09 Maintenance and service
Lamps
Main beam, Halogen
Extra main beam, ABL headlamps*
Direction indicators
1. Detach the headlamp.
1. Detach the headlamp.
1. Detach the headlamp.
2. Remove the cover, see page 340
2. Remove the cover, see page 340.
3. Detach the bulb by turning anticlockwise
and then pulling straight out
3. Unplug the connector from the bulb.
2. Detach the bulb holder by turning anticlockwise.
4. Unplug the connector from the bulb.
4. Detach the bulb holder by pulling it straight
out.
5. Replace the bulb and align it in the socket
and turn clockwise in order to secure it. It
can be secured in one position.
5. Replace the bulb and fit the new one in the
socket. It can only be secured in one position.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
09
3. Pull the bulb holder in order to extract the
bulb.
4. Remove the blown bulb by pressing it in
and turning anticlockwise.
5. Fit a new bulb, press down and turn clockwise.
6. Fit the bulb holder and turn clockwise.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
341
09 Maintenance and service
09
Lamps
Side marker lamps
Rear fog lamp
Before starting to replace a bulb, see
page 339.
The rear fog lamp is accessed behind the
bumper.
1. Detach the headlamp.
1. Detach the bulb holder by turning anticlockwise.
2. Turn the bulb holder anticlockwise and
remove it.
3. Remove the blown bulb and fit a new one.
It can only be installed in one way.
4. Fit the bulb holder in the socket and turn
clockwise.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
342
2. Remove the blown bulb by pressing it in
and turning the bulb anticlockwise.
3. Fit a new bulb, press down and turn clockwise.
4. Fit the bulb holder and turn clockwise.
Location of rear bulbs
Lamp lens, right-hand side
Position (LED)/side marker lamps
Side reflector, rear
Brake light
Reversing lamp
Indicator
Brake light (LED)
09 Maintenance and service
Lamps
Number plate lighting
Lighting, cargo area
Both the brake light and the reversing lamp
bulbs are replaced from inside the cargo area.
1. Remove the screws with a screwdriver.
1. Insert a screwdriver and gently prize so
that the lamp housing comes loose.
G031942
Brake light and reversing lamp
09
1. Open the panel.
2. Carefully detach the whole lamp housing
and withdraw it.
2. Detach the bulb holder by turning anticlockwise.
3. Replace the bulb.
3. Remove the blown bulb by pressing it in
and turning anticlockwise.
4. Refit the whole lamp housing and screw it
into place.
2. Replace the bulb.
3. Check that the bulb illuminates and press
back the lamp housing.
4. Fit a new bulb, press down and turn clockwise.
5. Fit the bulb holder and turn clockwise.
``
343
09 Maintenance and service
09
Lamps
Vanity mirror lighting
WA
Type
Dipped beam,
halogen
55
H7 LL
Main beam,
Halogen
65
H9
Extra main
beam, ABL
65
H9
Front direction
indicators
21
PY21W LL
Side marker
lamps front
3
W3WLL
Direction indicators side,
door mirrors
5
WY5W LL
3. Use needle-nose pliers to pull the bulb
straight out to the side and replace with a
new one. Note! - Do not pinch hard with the
pliers. Otherwise the lamp lens could then
be crushed.
Courtesy lighting front
3
T10 Socket
W2.1x9.5d
Glovebox lighting
5
Socket SV8.5
Length 43 mm
Attaching the lamp lens
Vanity mirror
lighting
2
T5 Socket
W2x4.6d
Cargo area
lighting
10
Socket SV8.5
Length 43 mm
1. Insert a screwdriver under the lamp lens
and gently prize up the lock lugs on the
edge.
2. Snap off the lamp lens.
1. Refit the lamp lens.
2. Press it into place.
WA
Type
Number plate
lighting
5
C5W LL
Brake light
21
P21W LL
Reversing lamp
21
P21W LL
Rear fog lamp
21
P21W LL
Lighting
Lighting
Removal of lamp lens
344
Specification, bulbs
A
Watt
09 Maintenance and service
Wiper blades and washer fluid
Wiper blades
Service position
trical system to key position I. (For detailed
information on key positions, see page 78.)
2. Briefly press the START/STOP ENGINE
button again to set the car’s electrical system in key position 0.
3. Within 3 seconds, move the right stalk
switch up and hold it in position for
approx. 1 second.
> The wipers then move to standing
straight up.
Wiper blades in service position.
In order to change, clean or lift the wiper blades
(for scraping off ice from the windscreen, for
example) they must be in service position.
IMPORTANT
Before placing the wiper blades in the service position, make sure that they are not frozen down.
09
NOTE
Once the wiper arms have been in service
position, the wipers must be activated and
deactivated before service position can be
used again.
Replacing the wiper blades
The wipers return to their starting position
when you briefly press the START/STOP
ENGINE button to set the car’s electrical system to key position I (or when the car is
started).
IMPORTANT
If the wiper arms in service position have
been folded up from the windscreen, they
must be folded back down onto the windscreen before the wipers are allowed to
return to their starting position. This is to
avoid scraping the paint on the bonnet.
1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition
switch1 and briefly press the START/
STOP ENGINE button to set the car's elec-
1
Not necessary in cars with Keyless function.
345
09 Maintenance and service
09
Wiper blades and washer fluid
1. Fold out the wiper arm.
2. Grip the inner section of the blade (by the
arrow).
3. Turn anticlockwise to use the blade's end
position against the wiper arm as a lever to
detach the blade more easily.
Fold up the wiper arm when it is in service
position. Press the button located on the
wiper blade mounting and pull straight out
parallel with the wiper arm.
Slide in the new wiper blade until a "click"
is heard.
Check that the blade is firmly installed.
4. Fold the wiper arm back towards the windscreen.
G021763
4. Press the new wiper blade into position.
Check that it is firmly installed.
Cleaning
For cleaning wiper blades and windscreen, see
page 364 and onwards.
NOTE
The wiper blades are different lengths. The
blade on the driver's side is longer than the
blade on the passenger side.
Replacing the wiper blades, rear window
G032770
The wipers return from service position to their
starting position when you briefly press the
START/STOP ENGINE button to set the car’s
electrical system to key position I (or when the
car is started).
346
5. Lower the wiper arm.
IMPORTANT
Check the wiper blades regularly.
Neglected maintenance shortens the service life of the wiper blades.
09 Maintenance and service
Wiper blades and washer fluid
09
Filling washer fluid
The windscreen and headlamp washers share
a common reservoir.
IMPORTANT
Use washer fluid with antifreeze during the
winter to avoid freezing in the pump, reservoir and hoses.
For capacities, see page 380.
347
09 Maintenance and service
09
Battery
Operation
The service life and function of the battery is
influenced by factors such as the number of
starts, discharging, driving style, driving conditions, climatic conditions etc.
• Never disconnect the battery when the
engine is running.
• Check that the cables to the battery are
correctly connected and properly tightened.
WARNING
•
348
The battery can generate oxyhydrogen
gas, which is highly explosive. A spark
can be formed if a jump lead is connected incorrectly, and this can be
enough for the battery to explode.
•
The battery contains sulphuric acid,
which can cause serious burns.
•
If sulphuric acid comes into contact
with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with
large quantities of water. If acid
splashes into the eyes - seek medical
attention immediately.
NOTE
The life of the battery is shortened if it
becomes discharged repeatedly.
The life of the battery is affected by several
factors, including driving conditions and climate. Battery starting capacity decreases
gradually with time and therefore needs to
be recharged if the car is not used for a
longer time or when it is only driven short
distances. Extreme cold further limits starting capacity.
To maintain the battery in good condition, at
least 15 minutes of driving/week is recommended or that the battery is connected to
a battery charger with automatic trickle
charging.
A battery that is kept fully charged has a
maximum service life.
IMPORTANT
Never use a quick charger to charge the
battery.
IMPORTANT
If the following instruction is not observed
then the energy saving function for infotainment may be temporarily disengaged, and/
or the message in the information display
about the main battery's state of charge
may be temporarily inapplicable, following
the connection of an external battery or battery charger:
•
The negative battery terminal on the
car's main battery must never be used
for connecting an external battery or
battery charger - only the car chassis
may be used as the grounding point.
See the section "Start assistance" - for a
description of how the cable clamps must
be attached.
09 Maintenance and service
Battery
Symbols on the battery
Avoid sparks and naked
flames.
Use protective goggles.
Risk of explosion.
Further information in the
owner's manual.
Replacing the main battery
Removal
First of all: Take the remote control key from
the ignition switch and wait at least 5 minutes
before any electrical connections are touched
- this is because the car's electrical system
needs to store the necessary information to
control modules.
Must be taken for recycling.
Store the battery out of
the reach of children.
The battery contains corrosive acid.
09
NOTE
An expended battery must be recycled in an
environmentally responsible manner - it
contains lead.
349
09 Maintenance and service
09
Battery
Release the rubber moulding so that the
rear cover is free.
Fitting
Remove the rear cover by screwing one
quarter turn and lifting it away.
WARNING
Connect and remove the positive and negative cables in the correct order.
1. Lower the battery into the battery box.
Detach the black negative cable.
Detach the red positive cable.
2. Move the battery inward and to the side
until it reaches the rear edge of the box.
3. Tighten the clamp that holds the battery.
Detach the ventilation hose from the battery.
Loosen the screw holding the battery
clamp.
Move the battery to the side and lift it up.
4. Connect the ventilation hose.
> Check that it is correctly connected to
both battery and outlet in the body.
5. Connect the red positive cable.
6. Connect the black negative cable.
7. Press in the rear cover. (See Removal.)
8. Fit the rubber moulding. (See Removal.)
9. Align the front cover and secure it with the
clips. (See removal.)
Open the clips on the front cover and
remove the cover.
350
For more information on the car's main battery
- see page 386.
09 Maintenance and service
Battery
Eco Start/Stop DRIVe*
For more information on Start/Stop - see
page 126.
When replacing batteries in cars with the
Start/Stop function, the AGM1 type batteries must be fitted.
NOTE
•
The higher the current take-off in the car
(extra cooling/heating, etc.) the more
the batteries must be charged =
increased fuel consumption.
•
When the capacity of the battery has
fallen below the lowest permissible level
then the Start/Stop function is disengaged.
For more information on the car's main battery
- see page 119 and 386.
Battery
Cold start
capacityA,
CCA (A)
Start
760
Location of the batteries
IMPORTANT
Cars with the Start/Stop function are equipped
with two 12 V batteries - one extra powerful
battery for starting and one support battery
that helps during the Eco Start/Stop DRIVe
function's starting sequence.
Support
120
SizeB,
L×W×H
(mm)
278×175×
190
150×90×106
Capacity
(Ah)
70
8
09
Temporarily reduced Start/Stop function due
to high current take-off means:
• The engine starts automatically2 without
A: Left-hand drive car. B: Right-hand drive car. 1.
Battery for starting3 2. Support battery.
The support battery normally requires no more
service than the normal battery that is used for
starting. A workshop should be contacted in
the event of questions or problems - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
the driver depressing the clutch pedal
(manual gearbox).
• The engine starts automatically without the
driver lifting his/her foot off the foot brake
pedal (automatic gearbox).
A
B
In accordance with the SAE standard.
Largest possible size.
1
2
3
Absorbed Glass Mat
Automatic starting can only take place if the gear lever is in neutral position.
The battery for starting is described in detail on page 349.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
351
09 Maintenance and service
09
Battery
IMPORTANT
If the following instruction is not observed
then the Start/Stop function may temporarily cease to work after the connection of an
external battery or battery charger:
•
The negative battery terminal on the
car's main battery must never be used
for connecting an external battery or
battery charger - only the car chassis
may be used as the grounding point.
See the section "Start assistance" - for a
description of how the cable clamps must
be attached.
NOTE
If the battery has become so discharged
that everything is "black" and in principle
the car does not have all the normal electrical functions and the engine is subsequently
started using an external battery or battery
charger, then the Start/Stop function will be
activated. It will then be possible for the
engine to be auto-stopped but in the event
of an auto-stop the Start/Stop function may
fail to auto-start the engine due to inadequate capacity in the battery.
The battery must first be charged in order to
ensure a successful auto-start after an autostop. At an outside temperature of +15 °C
the battery needs to be charged for at least
1 hour. At a lower outside temperature a
charging time of 3-4 hours is recommended. The recommendation is that the
battery is charged using an external battery
charger.
If this is not possible then the recommendation is to temporarily deactivate the
Start/Stop function until the battery has
been adequately recharged.
For more information about recharging the
battery, see the section "Battery" in the
chapter "Maintenance and service".
352
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses
General
09
Location, fuse boxes
All electrical functions and components are
protected by a number of fuses in order to protect the car's electrical system from damage by
short circuiting or overloading.
If an electrical component or function does not
work, it may be because the component's fuse
was temporarily overloaded and failed. If the
same fuse fails repeatedly then there is a fault
in the circuit. Volvo recommends that you visit
an authorised Volvo workshop for checking.
Changing
1. Look in the fuse diagram to locate the fuse.
2. Pull out the fuse and check from the side
to see whether the curved wire has blown.
3. If this is the case, replace it with a new fuse
of the same colour and amperage.
WARNING
Never use a foreign object, or a fuse with an
amperage higher than that specified when
replacing a fuse. This could cause significant damage to the electrical system and
possibly lead to fire.
Central electrical unit locations in a left-hand
drive car. In a right-hand drive car the central
electrical units under the glovebox change
sides.
Engine compartment
Under the glovebox
Under the glovebox
Cargo area
Engine compartment cold zone (only Start/
Stop*)
353
09 Maintenance and service
09
Fuses
Engine compartment
354
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses
General fuses, engine compartment
On the inside of the cover there are tweezers
that facilitate the procedure for the removal
and fitting of fuses.
Positions (see preceding illustration)
Engine compartment, upper
Engine compartment, front
Engine compartment, lower
These fuses are all located in the engine compartment box. The fuses in (C) are located
under (A).
On the inside of the cover is a label that shows
the location of the fuses.
• Fuses 1-7 and 42-44 are of the "Midi Fuse"
type and must only be replaced by a workshop1.
• Fuses 8-15 and 34 are of the "JCASE" type
and should be replaced by a workshop1.
• Fuses 16-33 and 35-41 are of the "Mini
Fuse" type.
1
Function
A
Function
A
Primary fuse for the central electronic module (CEM) with fuse
box B under the gloveboxA
50
Parking heater*
25
Ventilation fanA
40
Primary fuse for the central electronic module (CEM) with fuse
box B under the glovebox
50
Primary fuse for central electrical unit in cargo areaA
60
Primary fuse for central electrical unit in passenger compartment with fuse box A under the
gloveboxA
60
Primary fuse for central electrical unit in passenger compartment with fuse box A under the
gloveboxA
60
-
-
ABS pump
40
ABS valves
20
-
-
Headlamp levelling*; Active
Xenon headlamps - ABL*
10
Primary fuse for the central electronic module (CEM) with fuse
box B under the glovebox
20
ABS
5
-
Speed related power steering*
5
PTC element, air preheater*A
100
10
Headlamp washers*
20
Engine control module; Transmission control module; Airbags
Windscreen wipers
30
Heated washer nozzles*
10
-
09
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
355
09 Maintenance and service
09
356
Fuses
Function
A
Function
A
Function
A
-
-
5
5
-
-
-
-
-
-
Start relayA
30
Solenoid clutch A/C (5, 6-cyl.);
Valves, Engine control module
(6-cyl.) Solenoids (6-cyl. without
turbo); Actuator motors, intake
manifold (6-cyl. without turbo);
Mass air flow sensor (4-cyl. 2.0
l petrol, 5-cyl. petrol); Oil level
sensor (5-cyl. diesel)
10
Headlamp control
Relay coil in relay for solenoid
clutch A/C (not 5-cyl. diesel);
Relay coil in relay for coolant
pump (5-cyl. diesel Start/Stop);
Relay coils in central electrical
unit in engine compartment cold
zone (Start/Stop)
5
10
Auxiliary lamps*
20
Ignition coils (4-cyl. petrol);
Glow control module (5-cyl. diesel)
Lambda-sonds (4-cyl. petrol);
Lambda-sond (diesel); Control
module, radiator roller cover
(manual 5-cyl. 2.0 l diesel)
10
Internal relay coils
Horn
15
Ignition coils (5, 6-cyl. petrol);
Capacitor (6-cyl.)
20
EVAP valve (5, 6-cyl. petrol);
Lambda-sonds (5, 6-cyl. petrol)
15
Relay coil in main relay for
engine management system;
Engine control module (5, 6-cyl.
petrol)
10
Engine control module (petrol)
10
Diesel filter heater
20
Engine control module (diesel)
15
15
15
Solenoid clutch A/C (not 5-cyl.
diesel); Coolant pump (5-cyl.
diesel Start/Stop)
15
Mass air flow sensor (5-cyl. diesel, 6-cyl.); Control valves (5cyl. diesel); Injectors (5, 6-cyl.
petrol); Engine control module
(5-cyl. petrol, 6-cyl.)
Control module, radiator roller
cover (5-cyl. petrol)
5
Transmission control module
Crankcase ventilation heater (5cyl. diesel); Oil pump automatic
gearbox (5-cyl. diesel Start/
Stop)
10
Glow plugs (diesel)
70
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses
A
Function
A
Cooling fan (4-cyl., 5-cyl. petrol)
60
Cooling fan (6-cyl., 5-cyl. diesel)
80
Electro-hydraulic power steering
100
09
For cars with the Start/Stop function this fuse location is
empty - see instead page 362.
357
09 Maintenance and service
09
Fuses
Under the glovebox
Positions
On the inside of the cover is a label that shows
the location of the fuses in fuse box A.
Box A
Function
A
-
-
Function
A
-
-
Primary fuse for audio control module*; Primary fuse
for fuses 16-20: Infotainment
40
-
-
-
358
Box A
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Function
A
Control panel, rear passenger door, right
20
Control panel, rear passenger door, left
20
12 V socket, cargo area*
15
Keyless*
20
Control panel, driver's door
20
Power seat driver's side*
20
Control panel, front passenger door
20
Power seat passenger side*
20
-
Box A
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses
Box A
Function
A
-
Box A
Function
A
-
Seat heating (driver's side)
15
Steering wheel module
7.5
Infotainment control module
5
5
Central locking system, fuel
filler flap
10
Audio control unit (amplifier)*
10
Parking assistance*; Parking camera*; Towbar control
module *
Rear window washer
15
AWD control module*
15
Windscreen washers
15
Active chassis Four-C*
10
Unlocking, tailgate
10
Digital radio*; TV*
Audio
15
Telematics*; Bluetooth*
5
Rear Seat Entertainment
(RSE)*
7.5
Sunroof*; Interior lighting
roof; Climate sensor*;
Damper motors, air intake
5
12 V socket, tunnel console
15
Seat heating, rear right*
Box B
Box B
Function
A
Function
A
Folding head restraint*
10
Rear window wiper
15
Fuel pump
20
Movement detector alarm*;
Climate panel
5
Steering lock
15
Siren alarm*; Data link connector OBDII
5
-
-
-
09
7.5
15
Interior lighting; Driver's
door control panel, power
windows; Power seats,
front*; Remote controlled
garage door opener*
Seat heating, rear left*
15
Information display (DIM)
5
-
Power lumbar support*
15
10
Airbags
10
Seat heating (passenger
side)
15
Adaptive cruise control,
ACC*; collision warning system*
Collision warning system*
5
Interior lighting; Rain sensor
7.5
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
359
09 Maintenance and service
09
Fuses
Box B
Function
Accelerator pedal sensor,
PTC element air preheater*;
Dimming, interior rearview
mirror*; Seat heating, rear*
360
A
7.5
-
-
Brake light
5
Sunroof*
20
Immobiliser
5
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses
09
Cargo area
The fuse box is located behind the upholstery on the left-hand side.
Positions
Function
A
Electric parking brake, left
30
Electric parking brake, right
30
Rear window defroster
30
Trailer socket 2*
15
Function
A
Function
A
Power operated tailgate*
20
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Trailer socket 1*
-
-
-
40
-
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
361
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses
09
Engine compartment, cold zone - Start/Stop*
Location of fuses for the Start/Stop function.
• Fuses A1 and A2 are of the "MEGA Fuse"
Positions
type and must only be replaced by a workshop2.
• Fuses 1-11 are of the "Midi Fuse" type and
must only be replaced by a workshop2.
• Fuse 12 is of the "Mini Fuse" type.
For more information on Start/Stop - see
page 126.
2
362
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Function
Main fuse for central electrical
unit in the engine compartment
Function
A
175
A
Main fuse for central electronic
module (CEM) with fuse box B
under the glovebox, central
electrical unit in passenger
compartment with fuse box A
under the glovebox, central
electrical unit in cargo area
175
PTC element, air preheater*
100
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses
Function
A
Function
A
Primary fuse for the central electronic module (CEM) with fuse
box B under the glovebox
50
Support battery
70
15
Primary fuse for central electrical unit in passenger compartment with fuse box A under the
glovebox
60
Central electronic module
(CEM) - reference voltage support battery; Charging point
support battery
Primary fuse for central electrical unit in passenger compartment with fuse box A under the
glovebox
60
Primary fuse for central electrical unit in cargo area
60
Ventilation fan
40
-
-
-
-
Start relay
30
Internal diode
50
09
363
09 Maintenance and service
09
Car care
Washing the car
Wash the car as soon as it becomes dirty.
Wash the car in a car wash with oil separator.
Use car shampoo.
WARNING
Always have the engine cleaned by a workshop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is
hot.
• Hose down the underbody.
• Rinse the whole car until the loose dirt has
been removed in order to reduce the risk
of scratches from washing. Do not spray
directly onto the locks.
• If necessary, use cold degreasing agent on
very dirty surfaces. Note that the surfaces
must not then be warmed up by the sun!
• Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and
plenty of lukewarm water.
• Clean the wiper blades with a lukewarm
–
Set the wiper blades in service position,
see page 345.
NOTE
• Remove bird droppings from the paintwork
as soon as possible. Bird droppings contain chemicals that affect and discolour
paintwork very quickly. An authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended for the
removal of any discoloration.
For cleaning:
IMPORTANT
Dirty headlamps have impaired functionality. Clean them regularly, when refuelling for
example.
Do not use any corrosive cleaning agents
but use water and a non-scratching sponge
instead.
NOTE
Outside lighting such as headlamps, fog
lamps and rear lamps may temporarily have
condensation on the inside of the lens. This
is normal, all exterior lighting is designed to
withstand this. Condensation is normally
vented out of the lamp housing when the
lamp has been switched on for a time.
Wash the wiper blades and windscreen regularly with lukewarm soap solution or car
shampoo.
Do not use any strong solvents.
Automatic car washes
An automatic car wash is a simple and quick
way of washing the car, but it cannot reach
everywhere. Handwashing the car is recommended for achieving optimum results.
NOTE
During the first few months a new car must
only be handwashed. This is because the
paintwork is more sensitive when it is new.
soap solution or car shampoo.
• Use cold degreasing agent on very dirty
surfaces.
• Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or
a water scraper. If you avoid allowing water
droplets to dry in strong sunlight then the
risk of water stains that may need to be
polished away is reduced.
364
High-pressure washing
Cleaning the wiper blades
Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper blades,
as well as insects, ice etc. on the windscreen,
impair the service life of wiper blades.
When using high-pressure washing, use
sweeping movements and make sure that the
nozzle does not come closer than 30 cm to the
surface of the car (the distance applies to all
exterior parts). Do not spray directly onto the
locks.
09 Maintenance and service
Car care
Testing the brakes
WARNING
IMPORTANT
Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and
rubber.
Always test the brakes after washing the
car, including the parking brake, to ensure
that moisture and corrosion do not attack
the brake linings and reduce braking performance.
When using degreasant on plastic and rubber, only rub with light pressure if it is necessary. Use a soft washing sponge.
Lightly depress the brake pedal now and then
when driving long distances in rain or slush.
The heat from the friction causes the brake linings to warm up and dry. Do the same thing
after starting in very damp or cold weather.
Polishing agent that contains abrasive must
not be used.
Exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components
A special cleaning agent available from Volvo
dealers is recommended for the cleaning and
care of coloured plastic parts, rubber and trim
components, such as glossy trim mouldings.
When using such a cleaning agent the instructions must be followed carefully.
Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear
away or damage the glossy surface layer.
Rims
Only use rim cleaning agent recommended by
Volvo.
Strong rim cleaning agents can damage the
surface and cause stains on chrome-plated
aluminium rims.
Polishing and waxing
Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull
or to give the paintwork extra protection.
The car does not need to be polished until it is
at least one year old. However, the car can be
waxed during this time. Do not polish or wax
the car in direct sunlight.
Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you
begin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphalt
and tar stains using tar remover or white spirit.
09
More stubborn stains can be removed using
fine rubbing paste designed for car paintwork.
Polish first with a polish and then wax with liquid or solid wax. Follow the instructions on the
packaging carefully. Many preparations contain both polish and wax.
IMPORTANT
Only paint treatment recommended by
Volvo should be used. Other treatment such
as preserving, sealing, protection, lustre
sealing or similar could damage the paintwork. Paintwork damage caused by such
treatments is not covered by Volvo warranty.
Water-repellent coating*
Never use products such as car wax,
degreaser or similar on glass surfaces as this could ruin their water-repellent
properties.
Take care when cleaning so as not to damage
the glass surface.
To avoid damaging glass surfaces when
removing ice – only use plastic ice scrapers.
There is natural wear of the water-repellent
coating.
Treatment with a special finishing agent available from Volvo dealers is recommended in
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
365
09 Maintenance and service
09
Car care
order to maintain the water-repellent properties. This should be used first after three years
and then each year.
Rustproofing – inspection and
maintenance
The car received a thorough and complete
rustproofing at the factory. Parts of the body
are made of galvanised sheet metal. The
underbody is protected by a wear-resistant
anti-corrosion compound. A thin, penetrating
rustproofing fluid was sprayed into the
exposed members, cavities, closed sections
and side doors.
Under normal conditions the rustproofing does
not require treatment for approximately 12
years. After this period, it should be treated at
three-year intervals. Volvo recommends that
you engage an authorised Volvo workshop for
assistance if the car needs further treatment.
Dirt and road salt can lead to corrosion so it is
important to keep the car clean. The car's rustproofing needs to be checked regularly and
touched-up if necessary in order for it to be
maintained.
Cleaning the interior
Only use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly
and follow the instructions included with the
car care product.
Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning
agents.
Carpets and cargo area
Remove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning of
the floor carpet and the inlaid carpets. Use a
vacuum cleaner to remove dust and dirt.
Each inlay mat is secured with pins.
–
Take hold of the inlay mat at each pin and
lift the mat straight up.
Fit the inlay mat in place by pressing it in at
each pin.
WARNING
Before setting off check that the inlaid mat
in the driver area is firmly affixed and
secured in the pins in order to avoid getting
caught adjacent to and under the pedals.
A special textile cleaner is recommended for
stains on the floor mat after vacuuming. Floor
mats should be cleaned with agents recommended by your Volvo dealer!
366
Stains on fabric upholstery and roof
upholstery
A special fabric cleaning agent, available from
authorised Volvo dealers, is recommended to
avoid impairing the fire retardant qualities of
the upholstery.
IMPORTANT
Sharp objects and Velcro may damage the
fabric upholstery.
Treating stains on leather upholstery
Volvo's leather upholstery is chromium-free
and is treated to preserve its original appearance.
Leather upholstery ages and acquires a beautiful patina over time. The leather is refined and
processed so that it retains its natural characteristics. It is given a protective coating, but
regular cleaning is required in order to maintain
both characteristics and appearance. Volvo
offers a comprehensive product for the cleaning and treatment of leather upholstery which,
when used in accordance with the instructions,
preserves the leather's protective coating.
After a period of use the natural appearance of
the leather will nevertheless emerge, depending more or less on the surface texture of the
leather. This is a natural maturing of the leather
and shows that it is a natural product.
09 Maintenance and service
Car care
To achieve best results Volvo recommends
cleaning and the application of protective
cream once to four times per year (or more if
necessary). The Volvo Leather Care kit is available from your Volvo dealer.
IMPORTANT
•
•
Certain items of coloured clothing (for
example, jeans and suede garments)
may stain the upholstery.
Never use strong solvents. Such products may damage fabric, vinyl and
leather upholstery.
Washing instructions for leather
upholstery
1. Pour the leather cleaner on the dampened
sponge and squeeze out a strong foam.
Protective treatment of leather
upholstery
1. Pour a small amount of the protective
cream on the felted cloth and massage in
a thin layer of cream with gentle circular
movements on the leather.
2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes
before use.
The leather has now been given improved protection against stains and improved UV protection.
Washing instructions for the leather
steering wheel
• Remove dirt and dust with a soft pre-moistened sponge and neutral soap.
•
Leather needs to breathe. Never cover the
leather steering wheel with protective plastic.
2. Work the dirt away with gentle circular
movements.
• Use natural oils. Volvo's leather care
3. Dab accurately with the sponge on the
stains. Allow the sponge to absorb the
stain. Do not rub.
If the steering wheel has stains:
4. Wipe off with soft paper or a cloth and
allow the leather to dry completely.
–
agents are recommended for best results.
Group 1 (ink, wine, coffee, milk, sweat and
blood)
09
Group 2 (fats, oils, sauces and chocolate)
1. Same procedure as group 1.
2. Polish with an absorbent paper or cloth.
Group 3 (dry dirt, dust)
1. Use a soft brush to remove the dirt.
2. Same procedure as group 1.
Treating stains on interior plastic, metal
and wood parts
A fibrillated fibre or microfibre cloth, lightly
moistened with water, available from Volvo
dealers, is recommended for cleaning interior
parts and surfaces.
Do not scrape or rub stains. Never use strong
stain removers. A special cleaning agent available from Volvo dealers can be used for more
difficult cleaning.
Cleaning seatbelts
Use water and a synthetic detergent. A special
textile cleaning agent is available from your
Volvo dealer. Make sure the seatbelt is dry
before allowing it to retract.
Use a soft cloth or sponge. Mix a 5%
ammonia solution. (For blood stains, use a
solution of 2 dl water and 25g salt.)
367
09 Maintenance and service
Car care
09
Touching up minor paintwork damage
Colour code (Paint code)
Paint is an important part of the car's rustproofing and should therefore be checked regularly. To avoid the onset of rust, damaged
paintwork should be rectified immediately. The
most common types of paintwork damage are
stone chips, scratches, and marks on the
edges of wings, doors and bumpers.
Repairing minor paint damage such as
stone chips and scratches
Materials
• primer1 - for e.g. plastic-clad bumpers
• base coat and clear coat - are available in
spray cans or as touch-up pens/sticks2
• masking tape
• fine sand paper1.
G021832
there are special adhesive primers available in spray cans
Code for car's colour
It is important that the correct colour is used.
For product decal location, see page 372.
Before work is started, the car must be clean
and dry as well as at a temperature above
15 °C.
1. Apply a piece of masking tape over the
damaged surface. Then remove the tape to
remove any loose paint.
If the damage has reached down to a metal
surface (sheet steel), it is preferable to use
a primer. In the event of damage to a plastic surface, an adhesive primer should be
used for better results - spray into the
spray can's cap and brush thinly.
1
2
368
If required.
Follow the instructions that are included with the package for the touch-up pen/stick.
09 Maintenance and service
Car care
09
2. A light sanding with very fine abrasive
material can be performed locally before
painting if necessary (e.g. if there are rough
edges). Clean the surface thoroughly and
allow to dry.
3. Stir the primer well and apply using a fine
brush, matchstick or similar. Finish with
base coat and clear coat once the primer
has dried.
4. For scratches, proceed as above, but
mask around the damaged area to protect
the undamaged paintwork.
NOTE
If the stone chip has not penetrated down
to the meal and an undamaged layer of paint
remains in place, fill in with base coat and
clear coat as soon as the surface has been
cleaned.
369
Type designations.................................................................................
Dimensions and weights.......................................................................
Engine specifications............................................................................
Engine oil...............................................................................................
Fluids and lubricants.............................................................................
Fuel.......................................................................................................
Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pressure .........................................
Electrical system...................................................................................
Type approval.......................................................................................
Symbols in the display..........................................................................
370
372
374
377
378
380
382
385
386
387
399
SPECIFICATIONS
10 Specifications
Type designations
Label location
10
372
10 Specifications
Type designations
Knowing the car's type designation, vehicle
identification and engine numbers can facilitate all contact with an authorised Volvo dealer
regarding the car and when ordering spare
parts and accessories.
Type designation, vehicle identification
number, maximum permissible weights,
codes for colour and upholstery and type
approval number. The label is visible when
the right rear door is opened.
NOTE
The labels shown in the owner's manual are
not provided as exact reproductions of
those in the car. The purpose is to show
their approximate appearance and location
in the car. The information that applies to
your car in particular is available on the label
in question in your car.
10
Label for parking heater.
Engine code and engine serial number.
6-cyl.
4-cyl / 5-cyl
Label for engine oil.
Gearbox type designation and serial number.
Manual gearbox
Automatic gearbox
Car's identification number. (VIN Vehicle
Identification Number)
Further information on the car is presented in
the registration document.
373
10 Specifications
Dimensions and weights
Dimensions
10
Dimensions
374
mm
Dimensions
mm
Weights
Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank
90% full and all fluids.
A
Wheelbase
2774
H
Rear track
1586
B
Length
4627
I
Load width, floor
1090
C
Load length, floor, folded rear
seat
J
Width
1891
1789
K
Width including door mirrors
2120
L
Width including folded-in door
mirrors
D
Load length, floor
972
E
Height
F
Load height
802
G
Front track
1632
1713
1891
The weight of passengers and accessories,
and towball load (when a trailer is hitched, see
table page 375) influences the payload and is
not included in the kerb weight.
Permitted max. load = Gross vehicle weight Kerb weight.
10 Specifications
Dimensions and weights
Towing capacity and towball load
NOTE
The documented kerb weight applies to
cars in the standard version - i.e. a car without extra equipment or accessories. This
means that for every accessory added the
loading capacity of the car is reduced correspondingly by the weight of the accessory.
Examples of accessories that reduce loading capacity are the Kinetic/Momentum/
Summum equipment levels, as well as other
accessories such as Towbar, Load carriers,
Space box, Audio system, Auxiliary lamps,
GPS, Fuel-driven heater, Safety grille, Carpets, Cargo cover, Power seats, etc.
Weighing the car is a certain way of ascertaining the kerb weight of your own particular car.
10
NOTE
The use of a stabiliser hitch on the towing
bracket is recommended for trailers heavier
than 1800 kg.
For information on decal location, see page 372.
Max. gross vehicle weight
Max. train weight (car+trailer)
Max. front axle load
Max. rear axle load
WARNING
Equipment level
The car's driving characteristics change
depending on how heavily it is loaded and
how the load is distributed.
Max. load: See registration document.
Max. roof load: 100 kg.
Engine
Engine codeA
Gearbox
All
All
All
T5
B4204T7
Automatic, MPS6
Max. weight braked trailer (kg)
Max. towball load (kg)
0–1200
50
1800
90
375
10 Specifications
Dimensions and weights
10
Engine
Engine codeA
Gearbox
3.2 AWD
B6324S5
T6 AWD
Max. weight braked trailer (kg)
Max. towball load (kg)
Automatic, TF-80SC
1800
90
B6304T4
Automatic, TF-80SC
2000
90
D3
D5204T7
Manual, M66
1600
75
D3
D5204T7
Automatic, TF-80SC
1600
75
D4
D5204T3
Manual, M66
1600
75
D4
D5204T3
Automatic, TF-80SC
1600
75
D4 AWD
D5244T17
Manual, M66
1800
90
D4 AWD
D5244T17
Automatic, TF-80SC
2000
90
D5204T3
Automatic, TF-80SC
1600
75
D5 AWD
D5244T11
Manual, M66
1800
90
D5 AWD
D5244T15
Automatic, TF-80SC
2000
90
D4
A
B
AWDB
Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine, see page 372.
Only certain markets.
Max. weight unbraked trailer (kg)
750
376
Max. towball load (kg)
50
10 Specifications
Engine specifications
Engine specifications
10
NOTE
Not all engines are available in all markets.
Engine
Engine
codeA
Output
(kW/rpm)
Output
(hp/rpm)
Torque (Nm/
rpm)
No. of
cylinders
Bore
(mm)
Stroke
(mm)
Swept
volume
(litres)
Compression
ratio
T5
B4204T7
177/5500
240/5500
320/1800-5000
4
87.5
83.1
1.999
10.0:1
T6 AWD
B6304T4
224/5600
304/5600
440/2100–4200
6
82.0
93.2
2.953
9.3:1
3.2 AWD
B6324S5
179/6400
243/6400
320/3200
6
84
96
3.192
10.8:1
D3
D5204T7
100/3500
136/3500
350/1500-2250
5
81.0
77
1.984
16.5:1
D5204T3
120/3500
163/3500
400/1500-2750
5
81.0
77
1.984
16.5:1
D4 AWD
D5244T17
120/4000
163/4000
420/1500–2500
5
81.0
93.15
2.400
16.5:1
D5 AWD
D5244T11C
158/4000
215/4000
420/1500–3250
5
81.0
93.15
2.400
16.5:1
D5 AWD
D5244T15D
158/4000
215/4000
440/1500-3000
5
81.0
93.15
2.400
16.5:1
D4
D4 AWDB
A
B
C
D
Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine, see page 372.
Only certain markets.
Manual gearbox
Automatic gearbox
377
10 Specifications
Engine oil
Adverse driving conditions
10
Adverse driving conditions can lead to abnormally high oil temperature or oil consumption.
Below are some examples of adverse driving
conditions.
Check the oil level more frequently for long
journeys:
•
•
•
•
towing a caravan or trailer
in mountainous regions
at high speeds
in temperatures colder than -30 °C or hotter than +40 °C
The above also apply to shorter driving distances at low temperatures.
Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse
driving conditions. It provides extra protection
for the engine.
Volvo recommends Castrol oil products.
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for the
engine's service intervals all engines are
filled with a specially adapted synthetic
engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil
has been made very carefully with regard to
service life, starting characteristics, fuel
consumption and environmental impact.
An approved engine oil must be used in
order that the recommended service intervals can be applied. Only use a prescribed
grade of oil for both filling and oil change,
otherwise you will risk affecting service life,
starting characteristics, fuel consumption
and environmental impact.
Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all warranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed
grade and viscosity is not used.
Volvo recommends that oil changes are carried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.
378
10 Specifications
Engine oil
Engine oil grade
Engine
Engine codeA
Recommended oil grade
Volume, incl. oil filter
10
(litres)
T6 AWD
3.2 AWD
B6304T4
Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5
approx 6.8
B6324S5
Viscosity: SAE 0W–30
approx 6.8
D4
D5204T3
approx. 5.9
D3
D5204T7
approx. 5.9
D4 AWD
D5244T17
approx. 5.9
D5 AWD
D5244T11C
approx. 5.9
D5 AWD
D5244T15D
approx. 5.9
D4 AWDB
Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5
T5
B4204T7
Viscosity: SAE 5W–30
approx. 5.4
When driving under adverse conditions, use ACEA A5/B5 SAE 0W-30.
A
B
C
D
Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine, see page 372.
Only certain markets.
Manual gearbox.
Automatic gearbox.
For filling engine oil, see page 333.
379
10 Specifications
Fluids and lubricants
Coolant
10
EngineA
Prescribed grade: Coolant recommended by
Volvo mixed with 50% water1, see the packaging.
Volume
(litres)
A
3.2 AWD
B6324S5
T6 AWD
B6304T4
D4
D5204T3
D3
D5204T7
D4 AWD
D5244T17
D5 AWD
D5244T15
D5 AWD
D5244T11
T5
B4204T7
8.9
10.5
Engine code, component and serial number can be read on
the engine, see page 372.
Other fluids and lubricants
Manual gearbox
M66
1
380
Water quality must fulfil the standard STD 1285.1.
Volume (litres)
1.9
Prescribed transmission fluid
BOT 350M3
10 Specifications
Fluids and lubricants
Automatic gearbox
Volume (litres)
Prescribed transmission fluid
MPS6
7.3
BOT 341
TF-80SC
7.0
AW1
Fluid
System
Brake fluid
Brake system
Power steering fluid
Power steering
Washer fluid
Cars with headlamp washing
6.5
Cars without headlamp washing
4.5
Fuel
Volume (litres)
0.6
-
10
Prescribed grade
DOT 4+
WSS M2C204-A2 or equivalent product.
Washer fluid recommended by Volvo - with frost protection during
cold weather and below freezing point.
Petrol engine
approx. 70
Petrol: see page 296
Diesel engine
approx. 70
Diesel: see page 297
NOTE
Under normal driving conditions, the gearbox oil does not need to be changed during
its service life. However, this may be necessary under adverse driving conditions,
see page 380.
381
10 Specifications
Fuel
CO2 emissions and fuel consumption
10
382
T5
262
11.3
161
6.9
198
8.5
T6 AWD
354
15.2
188
8.1
249
10.7
3.2 AWD
322
13.8
176
7.6
229
9.9
D3
182
6.9
129
4.9
149
5.7
D3
229
8.7
148
5.6
178
6.8
D4
182
6.9
129
4.9
149
5.7
D4
229
8.7
148
5.6
178
6.8
D4 AWD
172
6.5
135
5.1
149
5.7
D4 AWD
233
8.9
148
5.6
179
6.8
10 Specifications
Fuel
10
D5 AWD
172
6.5
135
5.1
149
5.7
D5 AWD
233
8.9
148
5.6
179
6.8
Explanation
NOTE
gram/km
litre/100 km
Urban driving
Extra-urban driving
Combined driving
1
If the consumption and emission data is
missing then it is included in the enclosed
supplement.
Fuel consumption and emissions of
carbon dioxide
Fuel consumption and emission values in the
table above are based on specific EU cycles1,
that apply to cars with kerb weight in the basic
version and without extra equipment. The car's
weight may increase depending on equipment.
This, as well as how heavily the car is loaded,
increases fuel consumption and carbon dioxide emissions.
There are several reasons for increased fuel
consumption compared with the table's values. Examples of this are:
• The driver's driving style.
• If the customer has specified wheels larger
than those fitted as standard on the model's basic version, then resistance increases.
• High speed results in increased wind resistance.
• Fuel quality, road and traffic conditions,
weather and the condition of the car.
Even a combination of the above-mentioned
examples can result in significantly improved
Official fuel consumption figures are based on two standardised driving cycles in a laboratory environment ("EU driving cycles") all in accordance with EU Directive 80/1268/EEC (Euro 4), EU Regulation
no 692/2008 (Euro 5) and UN ECE Regulation no 101. The regulations cover the driving cycles for urban driving and extra-urban driving. - Urban driving - the measurement starts with cold starting
the engine. The driving is simulated. - Extra-urban driving - the car is accelerated and braked at speeds between 0 and 120 km/h. The driving is simulated. - A car with D4 AWD or D5 AWD engine
and 6-speed manual gearbox is started in 2nd gear. The combined driving value given in the table is a combination of urban driving and extra-urban driving, in accordance with applicable legislation.
CO2 emissions - the exhaust gases are collected in order to calculate the carbon dioxide emissions during the two driving cycles. These are then analysed and give the value for CO2 emissions.
383
10 Specifications
Fuel
10
consumption. For further information, please
refer to the regulations referred to1.
Large deviations in fuel consumption may arise
in a comparison with the EU driving cycles1
which are used in the certification of the car
and on which the consumption figures in the
table are based.
To bear in mind
Tips that the driver can use in order to reduce
consumption:
• Drive gently and avoid unnecessary acceleration as well as braking too hard.
• Drive with the correct air pressure in the
tyres and check this regularly - select ECO
tyre pressure for best results, see the tyre
pressure table on page 385.
• Choice of tyres can affect fuel consumption - seek advice on suitable tyres from a
dealer.
See further information and more advice on
pages 12 and 292.
See page 296 for general information on fuel.
1
384
Official fuel consumption figures are based on two standardised driving cycles in a laboratory environment ("EU driving cycles") all in accordance with EU Directive 80/1268/EEC (Euro 4), EU Regulation
no 692/2008 (Euro 5) and UN ECE Regulation no 101. The regulations cover the driving cycles for urban driving and extra-urban driving. - Urban driving - the measurement starts with cold starting
the engine. The driving is simulated. - Extra-urban driving - the car is accelerated and braked at speeds between 0 and 120 km/h. The driving is simulated. - A car with D4 AWD or D5 AWD engine
and 6-speed manual gearbox is started in 2nd gear. The combined driving value given in the table is a combination of urban driving and extra-urban driving, in accordance with applicable legislation.
CO2 emissions - the exhaust gases are collected in order to calculate the carbon dioxide emissions during the two driving cycles. These are then analysed and give the value for CO2 emissions.
10 Specifications
Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pressure
Approved tyre pressures
Engine
Tyre size
Speed
(km/h)
235/65 R 17
All engines
Load, 1 - 3 persons
Max. load
ECO pressureA
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front/rear
(kPa)B
(kPa)
(kPa)
(kPa)
(kPa)
0 - 160
240
240
270
270
270
160 +
240
240
270
270
-
max. 80
420
420
420
420
-
10
235/60 R 18
235/55 R 19
255/45 R 20
Temporary Spare Tyre
A
B
Economical driving.
In certain countries there is the "bar" unit beside the SI unit "Pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa.
NOTE
All engines, tyres or combinations of these
are not always available in all markets.
385
10 Specifications
Electrical system
Electrical system
10
The car has a voltage-regulated AC alternator.
The electrical system is single-pole and uses
the chassis and engine casing as a conductor.
The battery capacity is dependent upon the
equipment level in the vehicle.
IMPORTANT
If the battery is replaced, replace it with a
battery of the same cold start capacity and
reserve capacity as the original (see the
decal on the battery).
Battery
Engine
Voltage (V)
CCA - Cold Cranking Amperes (A)
(minutes)
12
520–800
100–160
Diesel
12
700–800
135–160
12
760A
135
Battery type AGM (Absorbed Glass Mat) must be used in cars with the Start/Stop function.
NOTE
•
The battery's container size should be
consistent with the original battery's
dimensions.
•
The battery's height is different depending on size.
Eco Start/Stop DRIVe*
For information on batteries in cars with
Eco Start/Stop DRIVe, see page 351.
386
Reserve capacity
Petrol (Ethanol)
Petrol/Diesel with Start/Stop function
A
Cold start capacity,
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
10 Specifications
Type approval
Remote control key system
Country
Lock system, standard
China
Country
Radar system
Country
10
Singapore
EU, China
IDA: Infocomm Development
Authority of Singapore.
Hong Kong
Brazil
Keyless lock system (Keyless drive)
Country
EU
Korea
``
387
10 Specifications
Type approval
BluetoothŸ
10
Declaration of Conformity (Declaration of Conformity)
Country
Countries
in the EU:
Exporting country: Japan
Manufacturer: Alpine Electronics Inc.
Type of equipment: BluetoothŸ device
For further information visit http://ec.europa.eu/enterprise/rtte/faq.htm #informing
388
10 Specifications
Type approval
Country
10
Czech
Republic:
Alpine Electronics, Inc. tímto prohlašuje, že tento BluetoothŸ Module je ve shodě se základními požadavky a dalšími příslušnými
ustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/ES.
Denmark:
Undertegnede Alpine Electronics, Inc. erklærer herved, at følgende udstyr BluetoothŸ Module overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige
relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Germany:
Hiermit erklärt Alpine Electronics, Inc., dass sich das Gerät BluetoothŸ Module in Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden
Anforderungen und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet.
``
389
10 Specifications
Type approval
Country
10
390
Estonia:
Käesolevaga kinnitab Alpine Electronics, Inc. seadme BluetoothŸ Module vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ põhinõuetele ja nimetatud
direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele sätetele.
UK
Hereby, Alpine Electronics, Inc., declares that this BluetoothŸ Module is in compliance with the essential requirements and other
relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Spain:
Por medio de la presente Alpine Electronics, Inc. declara que el BluetoothŸ Module cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera
otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Greece:
ΜΕ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑ Alpine Electronics, Inc. ΔΗΛΩΝΕΙ ΟΤΙ BluetoothŸ Module ΣΥΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕΤΑΙ ΠΡΟΣ ΤΙΣ ΟΥΣΙΩΔΕΙΣ ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ
ΚΑΙ ΤΙΣ ΛΟΙΠΕΣ ΣΧΕΤΙΚΕΣ ΔΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ ΤΗΣ ΟΔΗΓΙΑΣ 1999/5/ΕΚ.
France:
Par la présente Alpine Electronics, Inc. déclare que l'appareil BluetoothŸ Module est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres
dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.
Italy:
Con la presente Alpine Electronics, Inc. dichiara che questo BluetoothŸ Module è conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre
disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.
Latvia:
Ar šo Alpine Electronics, Inc. deklarē, ka BluetoothŸ Module atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām prasībām un citiem ar to
saistītajiem noteikumiem.
Lithuania:
Šiuo Alpine Electronics, Inc. deklaruoja, kad šis BluetoothŸ Module atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos
nuostatas.
Netherlands:
Hierbij verklaart Alpine Electronics, Inc. dat het toestel BluetoothŸ Module in overeenstemming is met de essentiële eisen en de andere
relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.
Malta:
Hawnhekk, Alpine Electronics, Inc., jiddikjara li dan BluetoothŸ Module jikkonforma mal-ĘtiĒijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti oĘrajn
relevanti li hemm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC.
Hungary:
Alulírott, Alpine Electronics, Inc. nyilatkozom, hogy a BluetoothŸ Module megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ követelményeknek és az
1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.
10 Specifications
Type approval
Country
Poland:
Niniejszym Alpine Electronics, Inc. oświadcza, że BluetoothŸ Module jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostałymi
stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.
Portugal:
Alpine Electronics, Inc. declara que este BluetoothŸ Module está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposições da
Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Slovenia:
Alpine Electronics, Inc. izjavlja, da je ta BluetoothŸ Module v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi določili direktive
1999/5/ES.
Slovakia:
Alpine Electronics, Inc. týmto vyhlasuje, že BluetoothŸ Module spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky príslušné ustanovenia Smernice
1999/5/ES.
Finland:
Alpine Electronics, Inc. vakuuttaa täten että BluetoothŸ Module tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sitä
koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen.
Sweden:
Härmed intygar Alpine Electronics, Inc. att denna BluetoothŸ Module står I överensstämmelse med de väsentliga egenskapskrav och
övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.
Iceland:
Alpine Electronics, Inc. hereby certifies that this BluetoothŸ Module conforms to the essential characteristic requirements and other
relevant regulations of directive 1999/5/EC.
Norway:
Alpine Electronics, Inc. erklærer herved at utstyret BluetoothŸ Module er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og øvrige relevante
krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
10
``
391
10 Specifications
Type approval
Country
10
China:
㄀कϝᴵǂ䖯ষ੠⫳ѻॖଚ೼݊ѻકⱘ䇈ᯢк៪Փ⫼᠟‫ݠ‬Ёˈᑨߞॄϟ䗄᳝݇‫ݙ‬ᆍ˖
ᷛᯢ䰘ӊЁ᠔㾘ᅮⱘᡔᴃᣛᷛ੠Փ⫼㣗ೈˈ䇈ᯢ᠔᳝᥻ࠊǃ䇗ᭈঞᓔ݇ㄝՓ⫼ᮍ⊩˗
ƵՓ⫼乥⥛˖*+]
Ƶㄝᬜܼ৥䕤ᇘࡳ⥛(,53˖໽㒓๲Ⲟ˘ G%L ᯊ˖싨P:៪싨G%Pǂķ
Ƶ᳔໻ࡳ⥛䈅ᆚᑺ˖໽㒓๲Ⲟ˘ G%L ᯊ˖싨G%P0+](,53ķ
Ƶ䕑乥ᆍ䰤˖SSP
Ƶᴖᬷথᇘ䕤ᇘࡳ⥛ᇍᑨ䕑⊶f ‫ֵס‬䘧ᏺᆑҹ໪˖
•
•
•
•
•
싨G%PN+]0+]
싨G%PN+]*+]
싨G%P0+]*+]
싨G%P0+]*+]
싨G%P0+]݊ᅗ *+]
ϡᕫ᪙㞾᳈ᬍথᇘ乥⥛ǃࡴ໻থᇘࡳ⥛ࣙᣀ乱໪ࡴ㺙ᇘ乥ࡳ⥛ᬒ໻఼ˈϡᕫ᪙㞾໪᥹໽㒓៪ᬍ⫼݊ᅗথᇘ໽㒓˗
Փ⫼ᯊϡᕫᇍ৘⾡ড়⊩ⱘ᮴㒓⬉䗮ֵϮࡵѻ⫳᳝ᆇᑆᡄ˗ϔᮺথ⦄᳝ᑆᡄ⦄䈵ᯊˈᑨゟे‫ذ‬ℶՓ⫼ˈᑊ䞛প᥾ᮑ⍜䰸ᑆᡄৢᮍৃ㒻㓁
Փ⫼˗
Փ⫼ᖂࡳ⥛᮴㒓⬉䆒໛ˈᖙ乏ᖡফ৘⾡᮴㒓⬉Ϯࡵⱘᑆᡄ៪ᎹϮǃ⾥ᄺঞए⭫ᑨ⫼䆒໛ⱘ䕤ᇘᑆᡄ˗
ϡᕫ೼亲ᴎ੠ᴎഎ䰘䖥Փ⫼DŽ
392
10 Specifications
Type approval
Country
Taiwan:
‫܅‬㧤෷ሽंᘿ୴ࢤሽᖲጥ෻䏺ऄรԼ㦕
10
รԼԲය
ᆖী‫ڤ‬ᎁᢞ‫ٽ‬௑հ‫פ܅‬෷୴᙮ሽᖲΔॺᆖ๺‫ױ‬Δֆ‫׹‬Ε೸ᇆࢨࠌ‫݁ृش‬լ൓ᖐ۞!᧢‫ޓ‬᙮෷Ε‫ף‬Օ‫פ‬෷ࢨ᧢‫଺ޓ‬๻ૠհ௽ࢤ֗‫פ‬౨Ζ
รԼ؄ය
‫פ܅‬෷୴᙮ሽᖲհࠌ‫ش‬լ൓ᐙ᥼ଆ౰‫ڜ‬٤֗եឫ‫ٽ‬ऄຏॾΙᆖ࿇෼‫ڶ‬եឫ෼ွழΔ!ᚨ‫ܛم‬ೖ‫ش‬Δࠀ‫ޏ‬࿳۟ྤեឫழֱ൓ᤉᥛࠌ‫ش‬Ζছႈ
‫ٽ‬ऄຏॾΔਐࠉሽॾऄ๵ࡳ!‫܂‬ᄐհྤᒵሽຏॾΖ‫פ܅‬෷୴᙮ሽᖲႊ‫ٽ࠹ݴ‬ऄຏॾࢨՠᄐΕઝᖂ֗᠔᛭‫ش‬ሽं!ᘿ୴ࢤሽᖲ๻ໂհեឫΖ
CCAB10LP0230T7
``
393
10 Specifications
Type approval
Country
10
South
Korea:
⭧㟓#⭠‿
Volvo Car Korea
㐔㷡㣄G䂈☐aGuY\TphtYXWX}
㥐䖼G⮹aGi“œŒ›––›Ghœ‹–GuˆŽˆ›–•Gyˆ‹–
⯜⒬G⮹aGphtYUX
㇤G⇔㬐aGtˆ™ŠVYWXW
Alpine Electronics, Inc
Made in Japan
ါཨ#⭠‿
Volvo Car Korea
⸰⸨㣄┍㵜䂈⫠㙸
㉐㟬㐐G㟝㇤ẠG䚐⇜ Y ┍G^Y]TX^ZG⸰⸨⾀♝G[ 㽩
⸰⸨㣄┍㵜GḔᵑ㉰䉤GX\__TX^^^
http://www.volvocars.com/kr
⏷⧴⫛#ⱇ⪣⏷㢸
୔␭䚨Gⱨ㉔㉘⽸⏈G㤸䑀䝰㐔Gᴴ⏙㉥㢨G㢼㡰⳴⦐G㢬⮹㙼㤸ḰGḴ⥜═G㉐⽸㏘⏈G䚔G㍌G㛺㏩⏼␘
394
10 Specifications
Type approval
Country
10
Singapore:
The United Arab
Emirates:
Jordan:
The product that contains the Bluetooth module is approved with the following certification number.
BT module certification number: TRC/LPD/2010/4.
BT module name: IAM2.1BT PWB EU
``
395
10 Specifications
Type approval
Country
10
South
Africa:
Uruguay:
396
This product contains URSEC approved transmitter [module name and model name (IAM2.1 BT PWB EU + BVJG905A, BVVE905A,
BVLV905A)]
10 Specifications
Type approval
Country
Jamaica:
Approved for use in Jamaica SMA EI: IAM2.1
Thailand:
This telecommunication equipment conforms to NTC technical requirement.
10
Nigeria:
Mexico:
Warning
"Este equipo opera a titulo secundario, consecuentemente, debe aceptar interferencias perjudiciales incluyendo equipos de la misma
clase y puede no causar interferencias a sistemas operando a titulo primario."
BluetoothŸ module installation information
This module board is to be installed only by the professional line operator and used only for car audio produced by ALPINE ELECTRONICS, INC. When this BluetoothŸ Module Board is installed in the Car Audio, we shall consider the following points: 1. Since
"IAM2.1 BT PWB US" owns its FCC ID/IC Number, we shall affix an exterior label on the outside of the product if the FCC ID is not
visible. The exterior label shall use wording such as either "Contains Transmitter Module Board FCC ID: A269ZUA130 / IC: 700BIAM2101" or "Contains FCC ID: A269ZUA130 / IC: 700B-IAM2101". 2. "IAM2.1 BT PWB US" complies with requirements of subsections
15.19(a)(3) in FCC Rules Part 15 Subpart C. The manual statement 15.19 (a)(3) is included in User Guide of the product.
COFETEL No. RCPALIA10-0353
``
397
10 Specifications
Type approval
Country
10
Botswana:
Croatia:
398
10 Specifications
Symbols in the display
General
There are a variety of different symbols in the
display in the car. The symbols are divided into
warning, indicator and information symbols.
Shown below are the most common symbols
with their meanings and a reference to where
in the manual further information can be found.
For more information on symbols and text
messages, see pages 72, 74 and 198.
- Red warning symbol, illuminates when
a fault has been indicated which could affect
the safety and/or driveability of the car. At the
same time an explanatory text is displayed in
the information display.
- Yellow information symbol, illuminates
in combination with text in the information display, when a deviation in any of the car's systems has occurred. The yellow symbol information can also illuminate in combination with
other symbols.
Symbols in the display
Indicator and information symbols in the
combined instrument panel
Indicator and warning symbols in the
combined instrument panel
Symbol
Symbol
Meaning
Page
Fault in the
ABL system*
72, 90
Emissions system
72
Fault in the
ABS system
72, 134
Rear fog lamp
on
72, 91
72, 135, 147,
310
Meaning
Page
Low oil pressure
74
Parking
brake
74, 137, 139
Airbags SRS
19, 74
Seatbelt
reminder
16, 74
Alternator
not charging
74
Fault in the
brake system
74, 134
Stability system, DSTC, Hill
descent control, Trailer stability assist
19, 31, 74, 75,
124
Stability system, sport
mode
72, 147
Warning,
safety mode
Engine preheater (diesel)
72
Low level in
fuel tank
72, 219
10
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
399
10 Specifications
Symbols in the display
10
Meaning
Page
Information,
read display
text
72
Main beam on
72, 90
Meaning
Page
Adaptive cruise
control*, Distance
Warning* (Distance
Alert)
160, 164
160, 164
72
Adaptive cruise
control*, Distance
Warning* (Distance
Alert)
Right-hand
direction indicators
72
Adaptive cruise
control*
160
DRIVe - Start/
Stop*
72, 130
155, 162
Not used
-
Adaptive cruise
control*, Distance
Warning* (Distance
Alert)
Adaptive cruise
control*, Distance
Warning* (Distance
Alert)
155, 162
Adaptive cruise
control*
154
Radar sensor*
160,
164, 176
Left-hand
direction indicators
Symbol
Other information symbols in the
combined instrument panel
Symbol
400
Meaning
Page
Adaptive cruise
control*
150,
154, 160
Adaptive cruise
control*
160
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Symbol
-
G025102
Symbol
Meaning
Page
Start/Stop*, Adaptive cruise control*
130, 160
-
-
Camera sensor*,
Laser sensor*
168,
176,
180, 183
Auto Brake*, Distance Warning*
(Distance Alert), City
SafetyTM, Collision
warning system*
164,
168, 176
Fuel-driven engine
block heater and
passenger compartment heater*
219
ABL system*
90
Fuel filler flap, righthand side
295
Low battery
219
Parking brake
139
10 Specifications
Symbols in the display
Symbol
Meaning
Page
Rain sensor*
98
Driver Alert System*
180
Driver Alert System*, Lane Departure Warning*
180, 183
Driver Alert System*, Lane Departure Warning*
183
Driver Alert System*, Time for a
break
180
Information symbols in the roof console
display
Symbol
Meaning
Page
Seatbelt reminder
17
Airbag, passenger
seat, activated
22, 23
Airbag, passenger
seat, deactivated
23
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
10
401
11 Alphabetical Index
11
A
Air conditioning system
repair................................................... 338
A/V-AUX input.......................................... 282
Air distribution.................................. 209, 217
ACC – Adaptive cruise control................. 152
Air quality system IAQS .......................... 215
Active Bending Lights (ABL)...................... 90
Air vents................................................... 210
Active chassis – FOUR-C........................ 224
Alarm..........................................................
alarm indicator......................................
alarm signals.........................................
arming...................................................
checking the alarm...............................
deactivate.............................................
deactivating a triggered alarm..............
reduced alarm level..............................
Active Xenon headlamps........................... 90
Adapting driving characteristics.............. 224
Adaptive cruise control............................ 152
fault tracing......................................... 159
radar sensor........................................ 158
Additional heater (Diesel)......................... 221
Adjusting headlamp pattern...................... 94
halogen headlamp................................ 95
Adjusting the steering wheel...................... 85
Airbag
activating/deactivating, PACOS........... 22
driver's and front passenger side......... 20
key switch off........................................ 22
AIRBAG ..................................................... 20
Airbag system ........................................... 19
Air conditioning........................................ 215
general................................................ 208
Air conditioning, AC................................. 215
402
63
63
64
63
49
63
64
64
Alcolock................................................... 110
Allergy and asthma inducing substances. 209
All-wheel drive, AWD............................... 132
All Wheel Drive (AWD).............................. 132
Approach light, duration...................... 48, 94
Audio
headphones socket............................ 237
rear control panel................................ 237
settings............................................... 239
surround..................................... 232, 239
audio system .......................................... 233
Audio system........................................... 232
functions............................................. 239
overview.............................................. 233
Audio volume ..........................................
phone..................................................
phone/media player............................
ring signal, phone...............................
speed/noise compensation................
233
265
265
265
239
Auto
climate control settings...................... 214
Automatic car washes............................. 364
Automatic gearbox..................................
manual gear positions (Geartronic).....
towing and recovery...........................
trailer...................................................
121
122
311
306
Automatic locking...................................... 57
Automatic relocking................................... 56
Auxiliary heater........................................ 221
AUX input......................................... 233, 255
AWD, All-wheel drive............................... 132
11 Alphabetical Index
B
Backrest..................................................... 80
front seat, lowering............................... 80
Backrest rear seat, lowering...................... 83
Bag holder .............................................. 300
Battery............................................. 348, 386
headphones........................................ 282
maintenance....................................... 348
remote control ................................... 279
remote control key/PCC....................... 51
start assistance................................... 119
symbols on the battery....................... 349
warning symbols................................. 349
Blind spot (BLIS)...................................... 191
BLIS......................................................... 191
BluetoothŸ
handsfree ...........................................
media .................................................
microphone off ..................................
streaming audio .................................
transfer call to mobile ........................
261
258
264
258
264
Bonnet, opening...................................... 332
Brake and clutch fluid.............................. 337
Brake light.................................................. 91
Brakes...................................................... 133
anti-lock braking system, ABS........... 133
brake light............................................. 91
brake system...................................... 133
electric parking brake......................... 137
Emergency Brake Assistance, EBA ... 133
emergency brake lights........................ 91
filling brake fluid.................................. 338
handbrake........................................... 137
symbols in the combined instrument
panel................................................... 134
Bulbs, see Lighting.................................. 339
safety grille.......................................... 303
safety net............................................ 302
Cargo cover............................................. 304
Car upholstery......................................... 366
Car wash.................................................. 364
Catalytic converter................................... 296
recovery.............................................. 312
11
CD ........................................................... 251
Centre console........................................ 200
Chassis settings...................................... 224
Checking and topping up the coolant..... 336
C
Checking the engine oil level................... 333
Calls
incoming............................................. 263
operation............................................. 263
Children.....................................................
child safety locks..................................
child seats and side airbags.................
location in the car.................................
safety....................................................
32
40
24
32
32
Camera sensor................................ 166, 175
Child safety locks...................................... 62
Car care................................................... 364
Child seat................................................... 32
Car care, leather upholstery.................... 366
Child seats.................................................
integrated two-stage booster cushion.
ISOFIX fixture system for child seats. . .
recommended......................................
Cargo area
cargo cover......................................... 304
lighting.................................................. 93
loading................................................ 299
mounting points.................................. 300
32
38
40
33
403
11 Alphabetical Index
size classes for child seats with the ISOFIX fixture system................................. 40
upper mounting points for child seats.. 43
11
Comfort inside the passenger compartment......................................................... 225
Cigarette lighter socket............................ 226
Compass................................................. 106
calibration........................................... 106
City Safety™............................................ 165
Condensation in headlamps.................... 364
Cleaning
automatic car washes.........................
car wash.............................................
rims.....................................................
seatbelts.............................................
upholstery...........................................
controls
centre console ................................... 233
364
364
365
367
366
Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)........ 209
Controls
centre console.................................... 200
Defroster.................................................. 215
Diesel....................................................... 297
Diesel particle filter.................................. 298
Dipstick, electronic.................................. 335
Direction indicators.................................... 92
Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor... 123
Display lighting.......................................... 86
Controls, lights........................................... 86
Distance Warning.................................... 162
Control symbols......................................... 72
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II.................... 232
Cooling system........................................ 292
Door mirrors............................................. 103
Crash, see Collision................................... 31
Driver Alert Control.................................. 179
Cruise control.......................................... 150
Driver Alert System.................................. 178
CO2 emissions ........................................ 382
Curtain
panorama roof.................................... 107
Collision..................................................... 31
CZIP (Clear Zone Interior Package)......... 209
Driving......................................................
cooling system....................................
with the tailgate open.........................
with trailer...........................................
Climate control........................................ 208
general................................................ 208
sensors............................................... 208
Clock, setting............................................. 75
Collision warning............................. 170, 171
292
292
293
305
Driving in water........................................ 292
Collision warning system
radar sensor........................ 158, 165, 170
D
Collision Warning with Auto Brake*......... 170
DAB Radio............................................... 248
Colour code, paint................................... 368
Deadlock
deactivation.......................................... 60
temporary deactivation......................... 60
Combined instrument panel.............. 71, 198
404
Deadlocks.................................................. 60
Driving with a trailer
towball load........................................ 374
towing capacity.................................. 374
DSTC, see also Stability control system.. 147
DVD ......................................................... 251
11 Alphabetical Index
E
ECC, electronic climate control............... 211
Economical driving.................................. 292
ECO pressure.......................................... 323
Eco Start/Stop DRIVe.............................. 126
Electrical socket...................................... 227
cargo area........................................... 300
front seat............................................. 227
Electric parking brake..............................
low battery voltage.............................
releasing automatically.......................
releasing manually..............................
137
137
138
138
Emergency equipment
warning triangle.................................. 324
Emergency puncture repair..................... 325
Emissions of carbon dioxide................... 298
Engine
overheating......................................... 305
starting................................................ 114
Engine block heater
fuel-driven........................................... 218
Engine braking, automatic....................... 135
Engine compartment
coolant................................................
oil........................................................
overview..............................................
power steering fluid............................
336
333
333
338
Engine drag control ................................ 146
F
Fan........................................................... 213
Fault tracing for the camera sensor. 167, 175
First aid equipment.................................. 324
First aid kit .............................................. 324
Engine oil......................................... 333, 378
adverse driving conditions.................. 378
capacities........................................... 378
filter..................................................... 333
oil grade.............................................. 378
Fog lamps
rear........................................................ 91
Engine specifications............................... 377
Foot brake............................................... 133
Environmental labelling, FSC, owner's
manual....................................................... 12
FSC, environmental labelling..................... 12
Error messages
Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 160
Driver Alert Control............................. 180
Lane Departure Warning..................... 183
see Messages and symbols....... 139, 160
Error messages in BLIS........................... 193
Error messages in Distance Alert............ 164
ERS - Remote Start................................. 115
ETC, electronic temperature control ....... 212
Expectant mothers, seatbelt...................... 17
11
Fluids, capacities..................................... 380
Fluids and oils.......................................... 380
FOUR-C – Active chassis........................ 224
Fuel..........................................................
fuel consumption................................
fuel economy......................................
fuel filter..............................................
296
382
323
297
Fuse box.................................................. 353
glovebox............................................. 358
Fuses.......................................................
box in cargo area................................
changing.............................................
cold zone............................................
general................................................
353
361
353
362
353
External dimensions................................ 374
405
11 Alphabetical Index
relay/fuse box in engine compartment 354
Start/Stop........................................... 362
Fuse table
fuses in engine compartment............. 355
H
Hill Descent Control................................. 135
HomeLinkŸ .............................................. 141
Handbrake............................................... 137
Hazard warning flashers............................ 92
HDC......................................................... 135
11
G
Hoot........................................................... 85
Horn........................................................... 85
Headlamp levelling.................................... 86
Headlamp pattern, adjusting..................... 94
I
Gearbox................................................... 120
automatic............................................ 121
manual................................................ 120
Headlamp pattern adjustment
Active Bending Lights .......................... 95
Headlamps............................................... 339
IAQS – Interior Air Quality System........... 209
Gear selector inhibitor............................. 123
IC – Inflatable Curtain................................ 26
Gear selector inhibitor, mechanical disengagement................................................. 123
Headphones
battery replacement............................ 282
wireless............................................... 281
Geartronic................................................ 122
Headphones socket................. 237, 280, 282
Indicator lamps, PCC................................ 49
Glass
laminated/reinforced........................... 101
Head restraint
centre seat, rear.................................... 82
lowering.......................................... 83, 84
Inflatable curtain........................................ 26
Global opening........................................ 208
Glovebox................................................. 226
locking.................................................. 57
Gross vehicle weight............................... 374
GSI - Gear selector assistance................ 120
Heated washer nozzles.............................. 99
Heating....................................................
rearview and door mirrors..................
rear window........................................
seats...................................................
214
104
104
213
Heat-reflecting windscreen...................... 101
High engine temperature......................... 305
High-pressure headlamp washing............. 99
406
Home safe lighting..................................... 94
Ignition keys............................................... 78
Immobiliser................................................ 46
Information button, PCC............................ 49
Information displays.................................. 71
Infotainment system ...............................
menus ................................................
overview .............................................
source buttons ...................................
voice control.......................................
232
236
233
233
270
Inlaid mats............................................... 227
Instrument lighting, see Lighting................ 86
11 Alphabetical Index
Instrument overview
left-hand drive....................................... 68
right-hand drive.................................... 70
Instruments and controls........................... 68
Interior lighting, see Lighting..................... 92
Interior rearview mirror............................. 105
automatic dimming............................. 105
Intermittent wiping..................................... 98
iPodŸ, connection................................... 255
Key positions............................................. 78
L
Labels...................................................... 372
Laminated glass....................................... 101
Lamps, see Lighting................................ 339
Lane Departure Control........................... 182
Laser sensor................................................ 9
J
Jack......................................................... 320
K
Kerb weight.............................................. 374
Key............................................................. 46
Key blade................................................... 50
Keyless drive...................................... 53, 114
Keyless start (keyless drive)............... 53, 114
Keypad in the steering
wheel................................. 85, 150, 201, 234
Leather upholstery, washing instructions 366
Lighting.................................................... 339
Active Xenon headlamps...................... 90
approach light, duration................. 48, 94
automatic lighting, passenger compartment...................................................... 93
bulbs, specifications........................... 344
controls................................................. 92
display lighting...................................... 86
headlamp levelling................................ 86
home safe lighting................................ 94
in passenger compartment................... 92
instrument lighting................................ 86
main/dipped beam............................... 87
position/parking lamps......................... 91
rear fog lamp........................................ 91
tunnel detection.................................... 90
Lighting, bulb replacement......................
cargo area...........................................
dipped beam halogen.........................
direction indicators.............................
main beam, Xenon lamp.....................
main beam halogen............................
number plate lighting..........................
side marker lamps..............................
vanity mirror........................................
339
343
340
341
341
341
343
342
344
11
Light switches............................................ 86
Loading
cargo area...........................................
general................................................
mounting points..................................
roof load.............................................
299
299
300
299
Lock confirmation ..................................... 46
Locking/unlocking
inside.................................................... 56
tailgate.................................................. 57
Locks
automatic locking................................. 56
locking.................................................. 56
unlocking.............................................. 56
Lubricants................................................ 380
Lubricants, capacities.............................. 380
407
11 Alphabetical Index
M
Main/dipped beam, see Lightning............. 87
Main beam, automatic activation.............. 88
11
Maintenance
rustproofing........................................ 366
Making calls............................................. 263
Manual gearbox....................................... 120
GSI - Gear selector assistance........... 120
towing and recovery........................... 311
Manual gear positions (Geartronic).......... 122
Mood lighting............................................. 94
MY CAR................................................... 200
O
Oil, see also Engine oil............................. 378
Messages in BLIS.................................... 193
Oil level low.............................................. 333
Messages in the combined instrument
panel........................................................ 198
Overheating............................................. 305
Messages in the information display....... 147
Owner's manual, environmental labelling.. 12
media player ........................................... 251
Meters
fuel gauge............................................. 72
speedometer......................................... 72
tachometer........................................... 72
PACOS....................................................... 22
Memory function in seats.......................... 81
Microphone.............................................. 261
PACOS, switch.......................................... 22
Menu navigation, Infotainment ............... 236
Misting.....................................................
attending to the windows...................
condensation in headlamps...............
remove with the air vents...................
timer function......................................
Paintwork
colour code......................................... 368
damage and touch-up........................ 368
Max. roof load ......................................... 374
Media, BluetoothŸ ................................... 258
Menu navigation RSE.............................. 286
Menus/functions...................................... 202
Menus and messages.............................. 198
Menu structures RSE....................... 286, 287
Menu system MY CAR............................ 200
408
Messages and symbols
Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 160
Collision Warning with Auto
Brake.......................................... 168, 176
Distance Alert..................................... 164
Driver Alert Control............................. 180
Lane Departure Warning..................... 183
Mobile phone
connect...............................................
handsfree............................................
register phone.....................................
voice control.......................................
215
208
364
217
215
P
Panel lighting............................................. 86
Panic function............................................ 48
262
261
262
270
Panorama roof
curtain................................................. 107
opening and closing........................... 107
ventilation position.............................. 108
11 Alphabetical Index
Parking assistance................................... 185
parking assistance sensors................ 187
register phone..................................... 262
voice control....................................... 270
Rear bulbs
location............................................... 342
Polishing.................................................. 365
Parking brake........................................... 137
Position/parking lamps.............................. 91
Rear control panel
audio system...................................... 237
Parking heater..........................................
battery and fuel...................................
parking on a hill..................................
time setting.........................................
Power panorama roof.............................. 107
Rear-seat entertainment.......................... 280
Power seat................................................. 81
Rear TV screens...................................... 280
Powershift gearbox.......................... 124, 311
Rearview and door mirrors
compass.............................................
door....................................................
electrically retractable.........................
heating................................................
interior.................................................
Park assist camera.................................. 188
218
218
218
220
Passenger compartment......................... 225
Passenger compartment filter................. 208
Passenger compartment heater
fuel-driven........................................... 218
PCC – Personal Car Communicator
functions............................................... 47
range............................................... 48, 49
Power windows....................................... 101
Puncture, see Tyres................................. 320
Phone
connect...............................................
handsfree............................................
incoming calls.....................................
making calls........................................
phone book.........................................
phone book, shortcut.........................
receiving a call....................................
262
261
263
263
265
265
264
106
103
104
104
105
Q
Rear window, defrosting.......................... 104
Queue Assist............................................ 156
Recirculation............................................ 215
Queue Assistant....................................... 156
Recommendations during driving............ 292
Recommended child seats, table.............. 33
Pedestrian protection.............................. 170
Petrol grade............................................. 296
11
R
Radar sensor........................................... 152
limitations........................................... 158
Radio ...................................................... 244
AM/FM ............................................... 244
DAB ................................................... 248
Recovery.................................................. 313
Refrigerant............................................... 338
Refuelling.................................................
fuel cap...............................................
fuel filler flap, electrical opening.........
fuel filler flap, manual opening............
refuelling.............................................
295
295
295
295
295
Relay/fuse box: see Fuses....................... 353
Rain sensor................................................ 98
409
11 Alphabetical Index
Remote control ....................................... 278
battery replacement ........................... 279
Remote control, HomeLinkŸ
programmable ................................... 141
11
Remote control key...................................
battery replacement..............................
detachable key blade...........................
functions...............................................
range.....................................................
46
51
50
47
48
Rustproofing............................................ 366
Set time interval....................................... 162
Side airbags............................................... 24
Signal input, external....................... 233, 255
S
SIPS bags.................................................. 24
Soot filter................................................. 298
Safety grille.............................................. 303
Soot filter full............................................ 298
Safety mode.............................................. 31
Spare wheel............................................. 320
temporary spare................................. 320
Safety net................................................. 302
Seat, see Seats.......................................... 80
Spin control............................................. 146
Resetting the door mirrors....................... 104
Seatbelt
rear seat................................................ 17
seatbelt tensioner................................. 18
Spin control function............................... 146
Remote control key system, type approval............................................................ 387
Remote Start - ERS................................. 115
Stability and traction control system....... 146
Stability system....................................... 146
Resetting the power windows................. 103
Seatbelt reminder...................................... 17
Stains....................................................... 366
Retractable power door mirrors............... 104
Seatbelts.................................................... 16
Start assistance....................................... 119
Reverse gear inhibitor.............................. 121
Roll-over protection................................... 29
Seats.......................................................... 80
head restraints, rear.............................. 82
heating................................................ 213
lowering the front backrest................... 80
lowering the rear backrest.................... 83
power seats.......................................... 81
Roof load, max. weight ........................... 374
Securing loads (Loading)......................... 300
ROPS (Roll Over Protection System)......... 29
Sensus....................................................... 77
ROPS (Roll Over Protection System) (Rollover protection).......................................... 29
Service position....................................... 345
Rims
cleaning.............................................. 365
Road sign information............................. 148
410
RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system... 280
Service programme................................. 332
Steering force, speed related.................. 224
Steering force level, see Steering force... 224
Steering lock............................................ 115
Steering wheel........................................... 85
keypad.......................... 85, 150, 201, 234
keypad, adaptive cruise control......... 154
steering wheel adjustment.................... 85
Stone chips and scratches...................... 368
Storage spaces in the passenger compartment......................................................... 225
11 Alphabetical Index
Surround.......................................... 232, 239
Symbols................................................... 147
indicator symbols................................. 72
warning symbols................................... 72
Symbols and messages
Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 160
Collision Warning with Auto
Brake.......................................... 168, 176
Distance Alert..................................... 164
Driver Alert Control............................. 180
Lane Departure Warning..................... 183
T
Tailgate...................................................... 58
locking/unlocking.................................. 57
open...................................................... 59
Towbar
detachable, attachment ..................... 308
detachable, removal .......................... 309
TV............................................................. 274
Towbar, see Towing equipment.............. 306
Type designation..................................... 372
Towing..................................................... 311
towing eye.......................................... 312
Tyres
direction of rotation............................
driving characteristics.........................
maintenance.......................................
pressure..............................................
puncture repair...................................
specifications......................................
speed ratings......................................
tread wear indicators..........................
winter tyres.........................................
Towing capacity....................................... 374
Towing equipment................................... 306
specifications...................................... 307
Towing eye.............................................. 312
Trailer.......................................................
cable...................................................
driving with a trailer............................
snaking...............................................
305
305
305
310
Type approval, remote control key system........................................................... 387
316
316
316
323
325
319
319
317
318
Trailer stability assist .............................. 146
Trailer Stability Assist.............................. 310
Transmission............................................ 120
U
Temperature control................................ 214
Trip computer.......................................... 222
Unlocking
from the inside...................................... 56
from the outside................................... 56
Timer........................................................ 215
Trip meter.................................................. 75
USB, connection...................................... 255
Tools........................................................ 320
Troubleshooting
Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 159
Temperature
actual temperature............................. 208
Total airing function........................... 57, 208
11
Transponder............................................ 101
TSA - trailer stability assist ............. 146, 310
Tunnel detection........................................ 90
411
11 Alphabetical Index
V
Vanity mirror...................................... 93, 227
Ventilation................................................ 209
Vibration damper..................................... 306
11
Voice control, mobile phone.................... 270
Volvo Sensus............................................. 77
Warning triangle....................................... 324
Washer fluid, filling................................... 347
Windscreen wipers.................................... 98
rain sensor............................................ 98
Washer nozzles, heated............................. 99
Winter driving........................................... 293
Washers
rear window.......................................... 99
washer fluid, filling.............................. 347
windscreen........................................... 99
Winter tyres.............................................. 318
Water-repellent surface, cleaning............ 365
Warning lamp
adaptive cruise control....................... 152
collision warning system.................... 173
stability and traction control system. . 146
74
74
74
74
74
74
74
Warning sound
collision warning system.................... 173
Warning symbol, airbag system................ 19
412
Windscreen washing.................................. 99
Water and dirt-repellent coating.............. 101
W
Warning lamps
airbags SRS..........................................
alternator not charging.........................
fault in brake system............................
low oil pressure.....................................
parking brake applied...........................
seatbelt reminder..................................
warning.................................................
Warning symbols....................................... 72
Waxing..................................................... 365
Weights
kerb weight......................................... 374
Wheels
changing.............................................
installation...........................................
rims.....................................................
snow chains........................................
spare wheel........................................
320
321
317
318
320
Wheels and tyres..................................... 316
Whiplash injury, WHIPS............................. 27
WHIPS
child seat/booster cushion................... 27
whiplash injury...................................... 27
Windows, rearview and door mirrors....... 101
Wiper blades............................................
changing.............................................
cleaning..............................................
replacing, rear window.......................
service position...................................
345
345
346
346
345
Wipers and washing.................................. 98
Wireless headphones.............................. 281
Kdakd8Vg8dgedgVi^dc51&OHMJTI
"51SJOUFEJO4XFEFO(zUFCPSH$PQZSJHIU©7PMWP$BS$PSQPSBUJPO
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement